HKS Project No. 22564.000
Project Manual Utah National Guard Camp Williams - Building 4141 Renovation Bluffdale, Utah
Construction Documents 2019-01-11
05/29/2019
This Page Intentionally Blank UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LEGEND FIRST COLUMN: DATE OF LATEST SECTION SECOND COLUMN: SHADED INDICATES SECTION IS INCLUDED IN CURRENT PRINTING THIRD COLUMN: REVISION NUMBER (“O” INDICATES ORIGINAL, REVISIONS ARE NUMBERED CONSECUTIVELY) FOURTH COLUMN: SPECIFICATION SECTION NUMBER FIFTH COLUMN: SPECIFICATION SECTION TITLE
NOTE FOR REVISED SPECIFICATION SECTIONS
1. DELETED INFORMATION IS INDICATED BY A STRIKETHROUGH (IE, THIS IS DELETED).
2. NEW INFORMATION IS INDICATED BY A DOUBLE UNDERLINE (IE, THIS IS ADDED).
3. ALL REVISED INFORMATION IS FURTHER IDENTIFIED BY A HEAVY VERTICAL LINE TO THE RIGHT OF ALL REVISIONS IN EACH INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATION SECTION (REFER TO HEAVY BOLD LINE TO THE RIGHT FOR AN EXAMPLE).
ISSUES OF SPECIFICATIONS SECTIONS Date Description 2019-01-11 Construction Documents – Building 4141
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
2019-01-11 0 00 7300 Supplementary Conditions
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2019-01-11 0 01 1000 Summary 2019-01-11 0 01 2500 Substitution Procedures 2019-01-11 0 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures 2019-01-11 0 01 2900 Payment Procedures 2019-01-11 0 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination 2019-01-11 0 01 3200 Construction Progress Documentation 2019-01-11 0 01 3300 Submittal Procedures 2019-01-11 0 01 4000 Quality Requirements 2019-01-11 0 01 4200 References 2019-01-11 0 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 2019-01-11 0 01 6000 Product Requirements 2019-01-11 0 01 7300 Execution 2019-01-11 0 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 2019-01-11 0 01 7700 Closeout Procedures 2019-01-11 0 01 7823 Operations and Maintenance Data 2019-01-11 0 01 7839 Project Record Documents 2019-01-11 0 01 7900 Demonstration and Training
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
2019-01-11 0 02 4119 Selective Demolition
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
TOC - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
2019-01-11 0 03 3000 Cast-in-Place Concrete
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 05 – METALS
2019-01-11 0 05 5000 Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
2019-01-11 0 06 1053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 2019-01-11 0 06 4023 Interior Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
2019-01-11 0 07 2100 Thermal Insulation 2019-01-11 0 07 9200 Joint Sealants
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
2019-01-11 0 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2019-01-11 0 08 3113 Access Doors and Frames 2019-01-11 0 08 7100 Door Hardware
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
2019-01-11 0 09 2900 Gypsum Board Assemblies 2019-01-11 0 09 3000 Tiling 2019-01-11 0 09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories 2019-01-11 0 09 9100 Painting
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
2019-01-11 0 10 2113 Toilet Compartments 2019-01-11 0 10 2613 Wall and Corner Guards 2019-01-11 0 10 2813 Toilet Accessories 2019-01-11 0 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
2019-01-11 0 12 3661 Simulated Stone Countertops
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
TOC - 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
NO SECTIONS
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
NO SECTIONS (REFER TO SECTION 23 0400)
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
2019-01-11 0 23 0100 Mechanical Requirements 2019-01-11 0 23 0150 Balancing, Maintenance Manuals, and Identification 2019-01-11 0 23 0200 Insulation 2019-01-11 0 23 0300 Piping Systems, Specialties and Valves 2019-01-11 0 23 0400 Plumbing Systems 2019-01-11 0 23 0800 Air Distribution, Heating and Air Conditioning 2019-01-11 0 23 0900 Automatic Temperature Control System
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
2019-01-11 0 26 0500 Electrical General Provisions 2019-01-11 0 26 0502 Electrical Submittal, O & M Manuals and Spare Parts 2019-01-11 0 26 0507 Electrical Connections for Equipment 2019-01-11 0 26 0519 Conductors and Cables (600V and Below) 2019-01-11 0 26 0526 Grounding 2019-01-11 0 26 0529 Supporting Devices 2019-01-11 0 26 0532 Conduit Raceway 2019-01-11 0 26 0533 Electrical Boxes and Fittings 2019-01-11 0 26 0553 Electrical Identification 2019-01-11 0 26 0923 Occupancy Sensors 2019-01-11 0 26 2413 Switchgear and Switchboards 2019-01-11 0 26 2726 Wiring Devices 2019-01-11 0 26 2815 Overcurrent Protective Devices 2019-01-11 0 26 2816 Motor and Circuit Disconnects 2019-01-11 0 26 2913 Motor Starters 2019-01-11 0 26 4119 Demolition 2019-01-11 0 26 4313 Surge Protective Devices (SPD) 2019-01-11 0 26 5100 Interior and Exterior Building Lighting
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS
NO SECTIONS
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
TOC - 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
2019-01-11 0 28 3111 Fire Alarm and Detection System
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
TOC - 4 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 00 7300
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. The Supplementary Conditions modify, change, delete from or add to the General Conditions and shall apply to each and every Section of the Work as though written in full therein.
B. The following paragraphs and subparagraphs take precedence over the General Conditions. Where any part of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by the Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered provisions remain in effect.
C. Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents:
1. Sections of Division 01 - General Requirements govern the execution of all sections of the specifications. 2. Summary paragraphs placed at the beginning of the Sections present a brief indication of the principal Work included in that Section, but do not limit Work to subject mentioned nor purport to itemize Work that may be included. 3. The Relation of Specifications and Drawings shall be equal authority and priority. Should they disagree in themselves, or with each other, bids shall be based on the most expensive combination of quality and quantity of work indicated. The appropriate Work, in the event of the above mentioned disagreements, shall be determined by the Architect. 4. Should the Drawings disagree themselves, figures shall govern over scaled measurements, large scaled Drawings shall govern over small scale Drawings, the greater quantity of work or materials shall be furnished and performed; the descriptive writings shall govern over legends indicating material or conditions and the Agreement takes precedence over all other Contract Documents. 5. Failure to report a conflict in the Contract Documents shall be deemed evidence that the Contractor has elected to proceed in the more expensive manner. 6. Instructions, directions and requirements as specified shall be considered to be followed by the phrase "unless otherwise specified or indicated".
1.2 INTERPRETATION
A. In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
00 7300 - 1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
1.4 PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATION
A. When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifications.
PART 2 - (NOT USED)
PART 3 - (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
00 7300 - 2 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 1000
SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Owner-furnished, Owner-Installed (OFOI) products. 2. Owner-furnished, Contractor-installed (OFCI) products. 3. Worker conduct and appearance - work rules. 4. Access to site. 5. Specification and drawing conventions.
1.2 OWNER-FURNISHED, OWNER-INSTALLED (OFOI) PRODUCT
A. The specific product is not in this contract, and actual installation of the product will be made by the Owner.
B. Products will be indicated as follows:
1. Product prefixed with "Space for" 2. N.I.C. 3. Owner Furnished - Owner Installed 4. Product noted as "Future"
C. Roughing-in for Owner Furnished, Owner Installed Product is provided by applicable Sections governing the type of work. Obtain rough-in requirements from Owner.
1.3 OWNER-FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR-INSTALLED (OFCI) PRODUCT
A. Install products indicated as follows:
1. Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed". 2. “Reuse”. 3. “Relocate.”
B. Provide labor, transportation, materials, tools, appliances and utilities necessary for the following:
1. Relocated Products:
a. Removing installed product from the Owner's existing facility, as required. b. Transportation of product from Owner's facility to the job site.
2. Receiving and storage of Owner furnished, Contractor installed product, as required. 3. Providing materials and components for the product as necessary to install in an operating condition, but not including repairing of existing damages to the product. 4. Modification of product only as specified under the particular item.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 1000 - 1 SUMMARY
5. Installation of product in this project, complete and in operating condition, including the adjusting and calibration of the product as necessary for proper operation. 6. Testing of product. 7. Paying of fees, licenses, and taxes in conjunction with the installation of the product. 8. Roughing-in and final utility connections for the Owner furnished, Contractor installed product remains the work of Sections governing the specific utility.
1.4 WORKER CONDUCT AND APPEARANCE - WORK RULES
A. General: The conduct and appearance of each worker at the jobsite is of paramount im- portance. The Owner reserves the right to require any worker to be reassigned to work outside the Owner's property.
1. Privacy: Where applicable, conduct work of the Contract with the maximum effort to maintain the privacy of the Owner’s operations, staff, and clientele. Do not permit workers to peer into other areas of the building visible from the work area. Invasion of privacy is a major infraction of the work rules. 2. Conduct and Demeanor: Construction workers shall treat other construction workers, Owner's staff, clientele, and visitors (as applicable) professionally with respect and courtesy. 3. Physical Appearance: Require each worker to dress appropriately in a clean, neat, and professional manner. 4. Radios and Television: The use of entertainment devices including personal devices with headphones or earphones is prohibited at all times. Control the volume of communication radios and loudspeakers to avoid creating a nuisance. 5. Tobacco Products: The use of tobacco products is prohibited. 6. Language: The use of foul language is prohibited. 7. Loud Conduct: Screaming, yelling, and unnecessary loud conduct is prohibited. 8. Physical Actions: Running, horseplay, fighting, and other unprofessional conduct is prohibited. Fighting is a major infraction of the work rules. 9. Stealing: Stealing of any material, objects, furnishings, equipment, fixtures, supplies, clothing, or other items is prohibited and a major infraction. 10. Sexual Harassment: All forms of physical and verbal sexual harassment including, without limitation: touching; whistling; sexually explicit stories, jokes, drawings, photos, and representations; exhibitionism; and all other sexually oriented offensive behavior is prohibited. 11. Roaming: Construction personnel shall not be allowed to roam, or wander about, the existing facilities. 12. Eating: Construction personnel shall not use the existing Dining Area for breakfast, lunch, or dinner. 13. Parking: Construction personnel shall only park in designated areas reserved for construction parking. 14. Penalties: First infraction of the work rules shall result in a verbal warning from the Owner. Second infractions shall result in being requested to leave the Owner’s property. Owner’s decision in such matters shall be final with no exceptions.
B. Warnings and Dismissal: For minor infraction of the rules, the Owner may issue a warning. Only one warning will be allowed per worker, and a second infraction shall result in immediate dis- missal of the worker from the Owner’s property. For major infractions such as invasion of priva- cy, the worker shall be dismissed immediately without warning and possibly subject to criminal prosecution.
C. Notification of Workers: Clearly notify and educate each worker about these Work Rules and the requirements for worker conduct and appearance.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 1000 - 2 SUMMARY
1.5 ACCESS TO SITE
A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Confine constructions operations to work in areas indicated on drawings. 2. Allow for Owner occupancy of site and use by the public. 3. Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. 4. Do not use drives and entrances for parking or storage of materials. 5. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. 6. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. 7. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Owner. 8. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of Products under this Con- tract, stored on the site. 9. Move any stored Products, under Contractor’s control, which interfere with operations of the Owner or separate contractor. 10. Obtain and pay for the use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations.
C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.
1.6 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others when so noted. 3. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 4. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.
B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 1000 - 3 SUMMARY
1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 1000 - 4 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 2500
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit electronic copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use scanned PDF electronic file of form provided at end of this section or annotated PDF electronic file of electronic form received from Architect matching form provided at end of this section. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 2500 - 1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, with reasonable promptness , Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution with reasonable promptness. Acceptance of proposed substitution does not constitute approval or inclusion in Contract Documents. Pay applications certification, change orders, and certificate of substantial completion will contain such qualification.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
1.5 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Prior to starting Substitution Process, review proposed recommendations with Architect.
B. Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for construction activities not complying with Contract Documents does not constitute acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval.
C. Contractor Representations: By making substitution request, Contractor:
1. Recognizes burden of proof of equality for requested substitution rests with Contractor. 2. Represents and warrants that Contractor has personally investigated requested substitution and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to specified Work. 3. Represents and warrants that Contractor will provide same warranties for requested substitution that Contractor would for specified Work.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 2500 - 2 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
4. Certifies that cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract except for Architect's redesign cost, and waives all claims for additional costs related to requested substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution, making such other changes as may be required to make Work complete in all respects. 6. Represents and warrants that accepted substitution will perform same as specified Work would have performed. Should accepted substitution fail to perform as required, Contractor shall replace accepted substitution with specified Work at no additional cost to Owner.
D. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
E. Substitutions for Convenience:
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 2500 - 3 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 2500 - 4
Substitution Request Form 01 2500
To HKS Contract Manager
HKS Project No. Project Name
Specified Item
Section Page Paragraph Description
The undersigned General Contractor requests consideration of the following:
Proposed Substitution (Include all product data as indicated in Specification Section 01 2500 and any supplemental information as requested by the Architect.)
The undersigned General Contractor warrants to the Architect and Owner that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct.
1. The Proposed Substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. The cost reduction/increase indicated in item 5 below includes costs for changes to the building design, including engineering, design, detailing and construction costs caused by the requested Substitution. Any additional costs resulting from this substitution will be reimbursed from the cost savings in item 5 or, in it’s absence, funded as a project cost. 3. The Proposed Substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the Proposed Substitution.
The General Contractor further warrants to the Architect and Owner that the function and quality of the Proposed Substitution are equivalent or superior to the Specified Item. The General Contractor further warrants that the intent of specification section 01 2500, paragraph 2.1.C has been met.
5. Total Cost Savings/Increase to the Owner: $ 6. Compensation to the Architect / Consultant for related Additional Service fee: $
Manufacturer’s Certification of Equal Quality
I represent the manufacturer of the Proposed Substitution item and hereby certify and warrant to the Architect and Owner that the function and quality of the Proposed Substitution are equivalent or superior to the Specified Item.
Manufacturer’s Representative Date Company
Acceptances
1.
General Contractor Acceptance Date Company
2.
Owner Acceptance Date Company
3.
Architect Acceptance Date Company
4.
Consultant Acceptance Date Company
Recommend Acceptance: Yes No
©HKS-012500-2012 HKS SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 01 2500 Page 2
©HKS-012500-2012 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 2600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.
1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on Architect’s Form HKS-710 "Architect’s Supplemental Instructions"; copy attached at the end of this Section.
1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposed Change: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time using Architect’s Form HKS-709 “Proposed Change”; copy attached at the end of this Section. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Proposed Changes issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposed Change or with reasonable promptness, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposed Change, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Include updated Submittal Schedule showing effect of the change.
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposed Change: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect using Contractor’s Standard Form.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 2600 - 1 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Include updated Submittal Schedule showing effect of the change. 7. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS
A. Allowance Adjustment: If applicable, see Division 01 Section "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Proposed Change for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances.
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposed Change, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on Architects Form HKS-701 "Change Order"; copy attached at the end of this Section.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on Architects Form HKS-714 "Construction Change Directive"; copy attached at the end of this Section. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 2600 - 2
Change Order
Project Change Order No. (Name, Address) Initiation Date Architect’s Project No. Contract For Contract Date To (Contractor)
The Contract is changed as follows:
This Change Order is not in effect and will not be included in the Contract Documents until signed by the Owner, Architect and Contractor. Changes included herein are subject to all conditions affecting them under the substitution specification section.
SUMMARY
The original (Contract Sum)(Guaranteed Maximum Cost) was ...... $ Net change by previously authorized Change Orders ...... $ The (Contract Sum)(Guaranteed Maximum Cost) prior to this Change Order was ...... $ The (Contract Sum)(Guaranteed Maximum Cost) will be (increased)(decreased) (unchanged) by this Change Order ...... $ The new (Contract Sum)(Guaranteed Maximum Cost) including this Change Order will be ...... $ The Contract Time will be (increased)(decreased)(unchanged) by ( )Days The Date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is
Changes included in the summary above (do)(do not) include modifications which have been authorized by Construction Change Directive(s).
Authorized:
Architect Contractor Owner
Address Address Address
By By By
Date Date Date
©HKS 701-1998
THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Proposed Change
Proposed Change No. Issue Date
Project Project No.
Owner
To
This is not a change order. Do not proceed with this work until authorized by Owner in writing below. Submit an itemized breakdown of labor and materials, and perform all work described herein in accordance with applicable Contract Documents.
Contractor pricing is due ______days after the issue date listed above.
Description
Submitted By
Contractor’s Proposal Change in Contract Time
By Date Cost
Recommended Owner’s Authorization to Proceed
By Date By Date
©HKS 709-2007
THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Architect’s Supplemental Instructions
Project Name ASI No. Project No. Date Issued Contract For To (Contractor)
The work is to be executed in accordance with the supplemental instructions contained herein without change in Contract Time or Contract Sum. Before proceeding with these instructions return a copy to the architect indicating your acceptance of these instructions for minor change(s) to the work as consistent with the Contract Documents.
Description
ISSUED ACCEPTED
Architect Contractor
Date Date
©HKS710-1998
THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Construction Change Directive
Project Directive No. (name, address) Initiation Date Architect’s Project No. Contract For Contract Date To (Contractor)
You are directed to make the following change(s) in this Contract. Please respond with your pricing basis, amount and modification to the contract time within ______calendar days from the initiation date listed above.
PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS
The proposed basis of modification to the Contract Sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price is: Guaranteed Maximum not to exceed $ Lump Sum (increase)(decrease) of $ Unit Price of $ As provided in sub-paragraph 7.3.7 of AIA Document A201, 2007 edition. As follows:
The Contract time is proposed to (be modified)(remain unchanged). The proposed modification, if any, is (an increase of days) (a decrease of days).
This document shall become effective immediately upon execution by the Owner and Execution by the Contractor is an Architect. The Contractor shall proceed with the changes described herein indication of agreement with the immediately upon receipt. modification in the Contract Sum and Contract Time indicated herein.
Architect Owner Contractor
Address Address Address
By By By
Date Date Date
©HKS 714-2007
THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 2900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Accepted Alternates.
2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments; provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment. 4. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work; provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each element. 5. Subschedules for Separate Design Contracts: Where the Owner has retained design professionals under separate contracts who will each provide certification of payment requests, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with the scope of each design services contract as described in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form, in format accepted by Architect, with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 2900 - 1 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one- hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts , where appropriate. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.
6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Allowances (If Applicable): Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances (if applicable), as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 8. Alternates (If Applicable): Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each accepted alternate. 9. Change Orders: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each change order. 10. Separate Owner-Consultant Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each separate Owner-Consultant related Work item. 11. Purchase Contracts: When applicable, provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor. 12. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
13. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 2900 - 2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
1.3 ARCHITECTS COST DATA
A. In addition to the Schedule of Values, submit itemized cost data reporting on Architect's Form HKS-757 "Project Cost Summary"; copy attached at the end of this Section. Initial submission shall be included with contractors first Application for Payment. Final updated submission shall be included with contractors final Application for Payment.
1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
1. If the Agreement does not state payment dates, establish dates at preconstruction conference. 2. Submit draft, or pencil, copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect.
C. Application for Payment Forms: Unless directed otherwise by Owner, use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.
E. Stored Materials: If accepted by Owner, include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.
1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 2900 - 3 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
F. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.
G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from General Contractor, subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of mechanic's lien for construction period covered by the application.
a. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.
H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds.
I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. When applicable, this application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 2900 - 4 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. If applicable, final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 2900 - 5 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 2900 - 6
Project Cost Summary
Project Name Project No. Latest Update
Start Construction Date Substantial Completion Date
Submitted By
Building Type: (Select One Only) Assembly/Entertainment Aviation Commercial Education Government/Justice Healthcare Hospitality Religion Residential Sports
Structure Type: (Select One Only) Concrete Steel
SITEWORK COSTS
CATEGORY SF FOR EACH BLDG. NEW CONST GARAGE SITEWORK BLDG. RENOVATION AREA
1. Sitework/Excavation
2. Paving/Walks/Curbs
3. Hardscape
TOTAL SITEWORK $ $ $ $
BUILDING/GARAGE COSTS
CATEGORY SF FOR BLDG. EACH BLDG. NEW CONST. GARAGE SITEWORK AREA RENOVATION
4. Masonry
5. Stucco/Plaster
6. Waterproofing
7. Insulation/Roofing
8. Glass Curtain Wall
9. Stone Exterior
10. Precast Concrete
11. Lobby Finish
12. Pavers
13. Toilet Partitions
14. Toilet Accessories
15. Elevators & Escalators
16. Specialties
17. Resilient/Carpet
TOTAL EACH AREA $ $ $ $
©HKS 757-1998
Project Cost Summary Page 2
BUILDING/GARAGE COSTS
CATEGORY REMARKS BLDG. NEW CONST. GARAGE SITEWORK BLDG. RENOVATION
BLDG. NEW CONST. AREA GARAGE AREA SITEWORK AREA BLDG. RENOV. AREA SF SF SF SF
18. Overhead/General Conditions
19. General Contractor Fees
20. Demolition
21. Utilities
22. Foundations
23. Structural Frame
24. Fireproofing
25. Misc. Metals
26. Carpentry/Millwork
27. Doors and Frames
28. Finish Hardware
29. Gyp. Wallboard
30. Painting
31. Ceramic Tile
32. Acoustical Ceiling
33. Plumbing
34. Fire Sprinklers
35. Electrical
36. Energy Management
37. HVAC/Equipment
38. Security System
39. Kitchen Equipment
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45. Change Order Total
TOTAL EACH AREA $ $ $ $
TOTAL PROJECT COST $
©HKS 757-1998 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 3100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project Web site. 5. Project meetings.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Project communications documents shall be defined as the following:
1. Letters. 2. Memoranda. 3. E-Mail Communications/Internet Communications/Project Management Software Communications. 4. RFI (Request for Information - Contractor). 5. RFI-A (Request for Information - Architect).
1.3 FORMAT
A. Letters and Memoranda: Submit in formats acceptable to the Architect.
B. E–Mail Communications/Internet Communications/Project Management Software Communications: Submit in forms and formats acceptable to and as approved by the Architect.
C. RFI (Request for Information - Contractor): Submit on forms furnished by the Architect, or on other forms as approved by the Architect. Unless otherwise approved use Architect's Form HKS-750, "Request for Information"; copy attached at the end of this Section.
D. RFI-A (Request for Information - Architect), will be submitted by Architect to Contractor on Architects standard form.
1.4 PROJECT COMMUNICATIONS DOCUMENTS
A. Letters and Memoranda documents shall be submitted in a timely manner so as to facilitate project delivery and coordination. Routing of communications shall be as established in the Contract, the Contract Documents and the Pre-Construction Conference. Communications documents shall be transmitted or forwarded in a manner consistent with the schedule and progress of the work.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3100 - 1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
B. E–Mail Communications, Internet Communications, and Project Management Software programs must be compatible with the Architect’s and Owner’s computer systems and equipment. The responsibility for all costs for management of these systems, including, but not limited to, licensing, on site training or other training necessary for the proper operation of such systems, shall be by the Contractor. The Contractor shall keep written records and hard file copies of all electronic communications. Failure of the Contractor to keep such records shall waive the Contractor’s right to rely on such communications and such communications shall be deemed to have not taken place.
C. RFI (Request for Information - Contractor) shall be defined and limited to a request from the Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents. Such requests shall comply with the following requirements:
1. RFI requests shall be submitted in a timely manner, well in advance of related work, and allow sufficient time for the resolution of issues relating to the request for interpretation or clarification. Contractor shall schedule the submission of RFI’s so as to moderate and manage the flow of RFI requests. RFI’s shall be submitted in a manner consistent with the schedule and progress of the work, and shall not be submitted in a sporadic and/or excessive manner. 2. RFI requests shall be numbered in a sequential manner and contain a detailed description of the areas of work requiring interpretation or clarification. Include drawing and specification references, sketches, technical data, brochures, or other supporting data as deemed necessary by the Architect, for the Architect to provide the interpretations and clarifications requested.
a. The Contractor shall include a "Proposed Solution" to the issue requiring interpretation or clarification.
3. RFI’s submitted to the Contractor by Sub-Contractors, vendors, suppliers, or other parties to the work shall be reviewed by the Contractor prior to submission to the Architect. If the Architect deems that such RFI requests have not been adequately reviewed by the Contractor, such requests will be returned to the Contractor for further action. Sub- Contractor’s RFI shall contain a “Proposed Solution”. 4. RFI requests shall not contain submittals, substitutions requests, routine communications, correspondence, memos, claims, or any information required by other areas of the Contract Documents. RFI requests containing such information will be returned to the Contractor without action by the Architect. 5. RFI requests are limited to a request for interpretation or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents. Interpretations provided by the Architect shall not change the requirements of the Contract or the Contract Documents. If the Contractor determines that the Architect’s response to an RFI gives cause for a change in the Contract or the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly, within 5 working days, give written notice to the Architect of request for adjustments. Requests for adjustments to the Contract shall be submitted in a manner consistent with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 6. If the Architect, after review, determines that any RFI has been submitted in an incomplete manner, is unnecessary, or does not otherwise comply with the requirements of this Section, the RFI will be returned without action to the Contractor. The Contractor shall delete the original submittal date from the RFI log and enter a new submittal date at the time of re-submittal.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3100 - 2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
7. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use software log that is part of Project Web site. Software log with not less than the following:
a. Project name. b. Name and address of Contractor. c. Name and address of Architect. d. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. e. RFI description. f. Date the RFI was submitted. g. Date Architect's response was received.
8. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.
a. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
D. RFI-A (Request for Information - Architect) shall be defined as a request by the Architect for information relating to the obligations of the Contractor under the Contract.
1. After receipt of an RFI-A the Contractor shall provide a written response to the Architect within 5 working days. Responses shall be thorough, complete and shall contain all information requested by the Architect. 2. An RFI-A shall be limited to a request by the Architect for information related to the project. The RFI-A shall not be construed as authorizing or directing a change in the Contract or the Contract Documents.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and Project Web site. Keep list current at all times.
1.6 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3100 - 3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. c. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. d. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. e. Indicate required installation sequences.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3100 - 4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
f. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.
B. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements:
1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings. 2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File (PDF) format. 3. BIM File Incorporation: When applicable, develop coordination drawing files from Building Information Model (BIM) established for Project.
a. Perform three-dimensional component conflict analysis as part of preparation of coordination drawings. Resolve component conflicts prior to submittal. Indicate where conflict resolution requires modification of design requirements by Architect.
4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in Autodesk Revit and/or Autocad; and compatible with Microsoft Windows operating system. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106.
1.8 PROJECT WEB SITE
A. Use Architect's Project Web site implementing Architect’s electronic project management software system for purposes of managing project communication and documentation until Final Completion.
B. Contractor, subcontractors, and other parties granted access to Project Web site shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106.
1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the meeting. 4. Attendance: Document attendance of all participants.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3100 - 5 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, and coordination with adjacent activities. Prepare agenda appropriate to Work. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, at a time to be decided prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.
1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:
a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. If applicable, requirements for completing sustainable design documentation. e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. g. Requirements for demonstration and training. h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. j. Submittal procedures. k. If applicable, coordination of separate contracts. l. If applicable, Owner's partial occupancy requirements. m. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. n. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.
4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3100 - 6 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals.
1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following or as needed:
1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) If applicable, resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) If applicable, status of sustainable design documentation. 6) Deliveries. 7) Off-site fabrication. 8) Access. 9) Site utilization. 10) Temporary facilities and controls. 11) Work hours. 12) Hazards and risks. 13) Progress cleaning. 14) Quality and work standards. 15) Status of correction of deficient items. 16) Field observations. 17) Status of RFIs. 18) Status of proposal requests. 19) Pending changes. 20) Status of Change Orders. 21) Documentation of information for payment requests.
4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3100 - 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
F. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings on an as-needed basis. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.
1. Attendees: Each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) If applicable, resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site utilization. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Work hours. 11) Hazards and risks. 12) Progress cleaning. 13) Quality and work standards. 14) Change Orders.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
A. This project will be set up to use the project management system Newforma Project Cloud (formerly called AEC-Sync/Attolist).
B. Newforma Project Cloud, a web based construction administration software by Newforma, Inc. The Contractor's key personnel and the project construction team members will be required to utilize this system.
C. Newforma Project Cloud is a collaborative web environment which expedites and organizes the review process and saves substantial resources by minimizing administration, printing, shipping and courier costs. Contractor shall allocate the appropriate amount of money per month for use of Newforma Project Cloud within the contract sum. The fee shall be calculated from the start of construction through the Date of Final Completion. There is no separate user license as the monthly project fee covers unlimited users per project.
D. A web-based tutorial will be provided to the Contractor and project construction team members who are awarded the contract. This training will take place no later than one week from the "Notice to Proceed" date.
E. PDF mark-up software is included with the Newforma Project Cloud software for all users. No other PDF markup software is required.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3100 - 8 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
F. Newforma Project Cloud shall provide the project an independent electronic archive of all data at the end of the project via FTP or DVD(s). Utilize this system for preparation and transmission of electronic files of Project Record Documents as required in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures".
G. Refer to use of electronic project management software for project communications and submittal procedures as required in other Division 01 Sections.
H. Visit www.newforma.com for additional information on Newforma Project Cloud.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3100 - 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3100 - 10
Request for Information
Project RFI No. Project No. Receiver Sender
Date Sent Date Initiated Copies To Date Response Requested
Subject Request
Senders Proposed Answer/Solution
THE PROPOSED ANSWER/SOLUTION [ ] IS, [ ] IS NOT, INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT.
Receivers Response
Response By Company Date
Distribution
©HKS750-1998
THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 3200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction el- ement.
C. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1. PDF electronic file.
B. Startup construction schedule.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.
D. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
F. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.
G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
H. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3200 - 1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 3. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 7 days for startup and testing. 4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 5. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule (where applicable), and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 3. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. 4. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. 5. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3200 - 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control.
6. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Building flush-out. m. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
7. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a. Structural completion. b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. c. Permanent space enclosure. d. Completion of mechanical installation. e. Completion of electrical installation. f. Substantial Completion.
8. Other Constraints include but are not limited to the following:
a. Roads. b. Parking. c. Landscape.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, punch list activities, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
E. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.
F. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3200 - 3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within 14 days of date established for the Notice of Award.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (BART CHART/GANTT CHART)
A. Bar Chart/Gantt Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt- chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.
1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.
2.4 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 5. Accidents. 6. Meetings and significant decisions. 7. Unusual events (see special reports). 8. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 9. Meter readings and similar recordings. 10. Emergency procedures. 11. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 12. Change Orders received and implemented. 13. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 14. Services connected and disconnected. 15. Equipment or system tests and startups. 16. Partial completions and occupancies. 17. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3200 - 4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS
A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take electronic construction photographs.
B. Minimum Digital Camera Resolution: 1800 x 1200 dpi (dots per inch) @ 72 dpi resolution.
C. Acceptable Electronic File Format: .jpg, .tif., .tiff., .tga., jpe., or .png.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3200 - 5 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
D. Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is being taken so stamp is integral to photograph.
E. Image File Naming Convention:
07425 _ 000 _ 2001 09 01 _ 01 .jpg
Job No. Add. Yr. Mo. Day Underscore Image Serv. #
F. Print Format: 8 by 10 inch smooth surface matte prints on single-weight commercial-grade stock, mounted on linen or card stock to allow a 1 inch wide margin and enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard 3-ring binder.
G. Print Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information:
1. Name of Project. 2. Name and address of photographer. 3. Name of Architect. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Date photograph was taken. 6. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.
H. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take 4 photographs of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. Show existing conditions adjacent to property. Submit prints and CD ROMs with digital files as required under “Submittals” Article.
I. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 4 photographs monthly, coinciding with cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Photographer shall select vantage points to best show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. Submit prints and CD ROMs with digital files as required under “Submittals” Article.
1. Field Office Prints: In addition to prints required to be submitted under “Submittals” Article, make and retain in field office at Project site available at all times for reference, one set of prints of periodic construction photographs. Identify photographs the same as for those submitted to Architect.
J. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 8 photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Architect will direct photographer for desired vantage points. Submit prints and CD ROMs with digital files as required under “Submittals” Article.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3200 - 6 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 3300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action.
B. Digital Signature: A digital signature or digital signature scheme is a mathematical scheme for demonstrating the authenticity of a digital message or document.
C. Electronic Signature: An electronic signature is any legally recognized electronic means that indicates that a person adopts the contents of an electronic message.
D. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action.
E. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.
a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3300 - 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow sufficient and reasonable time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. The Architect’s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgment to permit adequate review.
D. Paper Submittals: Architect reserves the right to require paper submittals.
E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number, including revision identifier.
a. File Naming Convention (separate by dashes - or underscores _ ):
1) Specification Number / Revision Number / Submittal Sequence (A, B, C, etc.).pdf
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3300 - 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software or electronic form acceptable to Owner , containing the following information:
a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks.
5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:
a. HKS Job Number and Add Service Number (e.g. 14424.000) b. Project name. c. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. d. Manufacturer name. e. Product name. f. Submittal revision number.
6. Utilize electronic project management software program to process submittals when feasible with the type and extent of submittals. Refer to Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for description of electronic project management software.
F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
G. Deviations and Additional Information: On page, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.
H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in file name and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with notation from Architect's action stamp not requiring additional submittals.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3300 - 3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
I. Distribution: Furnish electronic copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with appropriate notation from Architect's action stamp indicating for construction. Retain a separate copy for Owner to be delivered to Owner with Project Closeout documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1. Submit electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect’s Project Web site specifically established for Project.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. b. Provide PDF electronic files from scanned paper originals at 300 dpi, minimum.
2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. When one or more individual Specification Sections includes requirements for notarized signature on certificates and certifications, provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Mill reports. d. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. e. Certification that products are appropriate for installation indicated. f. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. g. Manufacturer's product specifications. h. Standard color charts. i. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. j. Testing by recognized testing agency.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3300 - 4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
k. Application of testing agency labels and seals. l. Notation of coordination requirements. m. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products. b. Dimensions. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Design calculations. i. Schedules. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (212 by 275 mm) , but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1050 mm) . 4. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
5. BIM File Incorporation: When applicable, develop and incorporate Shop Drawing files into Building Information Model established for Project.
a. Prepare Shop Drawings in the following format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Drawings. b. Refer to Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for coordination drawings.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3300 - 5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. This is in addition to physical samples. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.
5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit 4 full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit 4 sets of Samples. Architect will retain 2 Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least 4 sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3300 - 6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
E. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."
G. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."
H. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
I. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
J. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
K. Sustainable Construction Submittals: Where applicable, comply with requirements specified in Division 01 sustainable construction requirements Section.
L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3300 - 7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.
U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2 DELEGATED-ENGINEERING SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Engineering Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
C. BIM File Incorporation: Where applicable, incorporate delegated-design drawing and data files into Building Information Model established for Project.
1. Prepare delegated-design drawings in the following format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Drawings.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3300 - 8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:
1. Final but Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "Accepted as Noted," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with both the Architect's notations and corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 2. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Not Accepted" or "Revise Resubmit," do not proceed with the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the Architect's notations. Resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark.
a. Do not permit submittals marked "Not Accepted or Revise Resubmit" to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where construction is in progress.
3. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, or for special processing or other Contractor activity, the submittal will be returned, marked "Not Reviewed" or "Not Reviewed; submittal not required by Contract Documents".
B. Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Samples or Product Data which deviates from the Contract Documents does not authorize changes to the Contract Sum. Submit in writing at the time of submission any changes to the Contract Sum affected by such Shop Drawings, Samples or Product Data, otherwise, claim for extras will not be considered.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
D. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. Review shall not be final until complete submittal has been reviewed by Architect.
E. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3300 - 9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.
G. Electronic File of Submittal Documents: Provide Architect with an independent electronic archive of project submittal documents using electronic project management software as defined in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination".
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 3300 - 10 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 4000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. 2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies. 3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4000 - 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.
E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories), an NVLAP (National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program), or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with the qualification requirements of individual specification section governing their work.
1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN
A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality- control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4000 - 2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.
1. Project quality-control manager may be the Project superintendent or be an individual with no other Project responsibilities, as accepted by the Architect.
C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.
D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:
1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections." 3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority when Commissioning is included in the Project.
E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.
F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results, including Owner acceptance of nonconforming work. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4000 - 3 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation exceed manufacturer’s statements. 8. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that is similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4000 - 4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4000 - 5 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
K. Mock-ups: Prior to fabrication and installation, build mock-up for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mock-up to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mock-up in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Contractor shall provide structural support framework.
a. Show typical components, attachments to building structure, and requirements of installation.
2. Clean exposed faces of mock-up. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when mock-up will be in- stalled. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Protect accepted mock-up from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 6. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before starting fabrication. 7. Maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for review of the completed Work. 8. Acceptance of mock-ups does not constitute acceptance of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mock-ups unless such deviations are specifically noted by Contractor, submitted to Architect in writing, and accepted by Architect in writing. 9. Demolish and remove mock-ups when directed by Architect unless accepted to become part of the completed Work.
L. Integrated Exterior Mockups: See Division 01 Section "Visual Mock-Up Requirements".
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.
3. Notify testing agencies at least 48 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4000 - 6 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."
D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service through Contractor. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4000 - 7 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
a. Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1) Specification Section number and title. 2) Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3) Description of test and inspection. 4) Identification of applicable standards. 5) Identification of test and inspection methods. 6) Number of tests and inspections required. 7) Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8) Requirements for obtaining samples. 9) Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner may engage a qualified to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:
1. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 4. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 5. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4000 - 8 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4000 - 9 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4000 - 10 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 4200
REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. Submitted: The terms “submitted”, “reported”, “satisfactory” and similar words and phrases means submitted to Architect, reported to Architect and similar phrases.
J. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.
1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4200 - 1 REFERENCES
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."
B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org
ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org
ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543
UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC)
C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CE Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761-0011 www.usace.army.mil
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923
DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov
DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil
DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov
EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov
FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4200 - 2 REFERENCES
www.faa.gov
FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov
FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov
GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov
HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov
LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov
NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB)
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999
PBS Public Buildings Service (See GSA)
PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs
RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA)
SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov
TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 http://gulliver.trb.org
USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov
USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com
D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4200 - 3 REFERENCES
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board www.access-board.gov
CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html
DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS)
FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS)
FS Federal Specification (215) 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil
Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.wbdg.org/ccb
FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS)
MIL (See MILSPEC)
MIL-STD (See MILSPEC)
MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4200 - 4 REFERENCES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4200 - 5 REFERENCES
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 4200 - 6 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 5000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
1.2 USE CHARGES
A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect.
B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage, indicated by utility company meter readings, by all entities for construction operations.
C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used, indicated by utility company meter readings, by all entities for construction operations.
D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used, indicated by utility company meter readings, by all entities for construction operations.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.
B. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage.
1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work. 3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.
C. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan at Renovation Work: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 5000 - 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures.
D. Temporary Utility Reports: Make available on request, reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities.
E. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Make available on request a schedule indicating implementation and termination of each temporary utility.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 "Requirements for Demolition Operations", NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations".
1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.
B. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
C. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
D. Accessible Temporary Egress at Renovation Work: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
E. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to, the following:
1. Building Code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. 6. City ordinances and regulations.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 5000 - 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
B. Materials and equipment may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards.
C. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2 inch (50 mm) , 0.148 inch (3.8 mm) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8 inch (60 mm) OD line posts and 2-7/8 inch (73 mm) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8 inch (42 mm) OD top rails.
D. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2 inch (50 mm) , 0.148 inch (3.8 mm) thick, galvanized- steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8 inch (60 mm) OD line posts and 2-7/8 inch (73 mm) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8 inch (40 mm) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.
E. Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood, 8 feet (2.4 m) high, framed with four 2 by 4 inch (50 by 100 mm) rails, with preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart.
F. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10 mil (0.25 mm) minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.
G. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (900 by 1500 mm) .
H. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1. Furniture required for Project-site. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor. 5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination at desk height.
C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 5000 - 3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1. Store combustible materials apart from building.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure.
B. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.
C. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper cup supply.
D. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.
E. Air-Filtration Units for Renovation Work: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. Locate temporary utilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify utilities as required.
B. Provide each utility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until utilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent utilities.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 5000 - 4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
C. Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked-in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose.
D. Storm Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in a lawful manner.
1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge. 2. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by sewer department officials. 3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. 4. Provide temporary filter beds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices to purify effluent to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. Sterilize temporary water piping before use in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
1. Existing Toilets in Occupied Facilities: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted or allowed.
G. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
H. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas.
1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings.
a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas. b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 5000 - 5 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust- producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust- containment devices. 3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter- equipped vacuum equipment.
I. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.
J. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
K. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
L. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Provide telephone line(s) for each field office.
M. Electronic Communication Service: Provide internet access of not less than 15-Mbps download and 5-Mbps upload speed for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Parking: Coordinated parking with Owner’s requirements.
C. Project Signs: Coordinated signs with Owner’s requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
E. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Division 01 Section "Execution."
F. Existing Elevator Use in Occupied Facilities: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 5000 - 6 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
G. Existing Stair Usage in Occupied Facilities: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.
1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
C. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
E. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary, weathertight, enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, including, but not limited to, vertical and horizontal openings, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.
G. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side. 2. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6 mil (0.14 mm) polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6 mil (0.14 mm) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches (450 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated plywood.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 5000 - 7 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48 inches (1200 mm) between doors. Maintain walk-off mats in vestibule, for dust control.
3. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. 4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 5. Protect air-handling equipment. 6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.
H. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction; manage fire-prevention program.
3.5 MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of discoloration that may appear during construction.
B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure, protect as follows:
1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 5000 - 8 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 5000 - 9 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 5000 - 10 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 6000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, and equipment from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. Refer to Division 01 Section “Substitution Procedures”.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "Product Standard," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other manufacturers
D. Hazardous Substances Prohibited by Law: Including, but not limited to, any product, material, element, constituent, chemical, substance, compound, or mixture, which is defined in, included under, or regulated by any environmental laws.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 6000 - 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
E. Environmental Laws: Applicable local, state, and federal laws, rules, ordinances, codes, regulations, and requirements in effect at the time Contractor’s services are rendered, any amendments for Contractor’s services rendered after the effective date of any such amendments.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comparable Product: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
C. Contractor shall submit an affidavit on construction company letterhead signed by an officer of the company, notarized by a notary public, which certifies compliance with the environmental laws controlling hazardous substances for the construction of this Project.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
B. Compliance: Contractor shall take whatever measures deemed necessary to insure that all employees, suppliers, vendors, fabricators, subcontractors, or their assigns, to comply with hazardous substance requirements.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 6000 - 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product, required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner, and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Warranties: Prepare a written document, on manufacturer’s standard form, modified to include Project-specific information, that contains appropriate terms and identification, properly executed.
B. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Products and materials brought onto the Project Site, and products and materials incorporated into the Work, shall comply with environmental laws.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 6000 - 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
3. Products:
a. Restricted List (Acceptable Manufacturers/Fabricators and Products): Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List (Available Manufacturers/Fabricators and Products): Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Restricted List (Acceptable Manufacturers/Fabricators): Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List (Available Manufacturers/Fabricators): Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
5. Basis-of-Design Product (Product Standard): Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers, or unnamed manufacturer's product.
C. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product, or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product, material or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements.
D. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product or material is specified for a specific application.
1. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by the manufacturer's certification of performance.
E. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance with imposed code, standard or regulation, select product that complies with standards, codes or regulations specified.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 6000 - 4 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
F. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.
G. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture" or similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements.
1. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. 2. Custom Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "custom range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 3. Special Custom Range: Where Specifications include the phrase “special custom range of colors patterns, textures” or similar phrase, Architect will select a new color, pattern, or texture different from those normally produced by the manufacturer.
A. Allowances (If Applicable): Refer to provisions of individual Specification Sections and of Division 01 Section "Allowance" for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for processing such selections.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents; that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 6000 - 5 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RESTRICTION OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
A. Contractor agrees that it shall not knowingly after reasonable diligence and effort, incorporate into the Work any hazardous substance other than as may be lawfully contained within products, except in accordance with applicable environmental laws. Further, in performing any of its obligations hereunder, Contractor shall not cause any release of hazardous substances into, or contamination of, the environment, including soil, the atmosphere, any watercourse or ground water, except in accordance with applicable environmental laws. In the event that Contractor engages in any of the activities prohibited in this paragraph, to the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor hereby indemnifies and holds harmless Owner and its partners, members, officers, directors, agents, employees and consultants from and against any and all claims, damages, losses, causes of action, suits and liabilities of every kind, including, but not limited to, expenses of litigation, court costs, punitive damages and attorney’s fees, arising out of, incidental to or resulting from the activities prohibited.
B. In the event Contractor observes on the Project Site any substance which Contractor reasonably believes to be a hazardous substance, and which is being introduced into the Work, or exists on the Project Site, in a manner violative of any applicable environmental laws, Contractor shall immediately notify Owner and report the condition to Owner in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written authorization of Owner if in fact a hazardous substance has been encountered and has not been rendered harmless. In the event that Contractor fails to give Owner proper notification hereunder, upon knowingly observing a hazardous substance at the Project Site, to the fullest extent permitted by the law, Contractor hereby indemnifies and holds harmless Owner, and all of its partners, members, officers, directors, agents, employees and consultants from and against all claims, damages, losses, causes of action, suits and liabilities of every kind, including, but not limited to, expenses of litigation, court costs, punitive damages and attorneys’ fees, arising out of, incidental to, or resulting from Contractor’s failure to stop the Work.
C. If Owner believes that hazardous substances may have been located, generated, manufactured, used or disposed of on or about the Project Site by Contractor or any of its employees, agents, subcontractors, suppliers, or invitees, Owner may have environmental studies of the Project Site conducted as it deems appropriate, and Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of such studies to the extent that Contractor or any of its employees, agents, subcontractors, suppliers or invitees are responsible for the presence of any hazardous substances.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 6000 - 6 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 7300
EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Installation of the Work. 2. Cutting and patching. 3. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:
1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.
a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.
6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7300 - 1 EXECUTION
7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.
1. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 3. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
a. If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work listed below. If it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized, experienced, and specialized firm.
B. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements in Division 01 sustainable construction requirements Section.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7300 - 2 EXECUTION
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. Record observations.
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Respective manufacturer/fabricator’s written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents.
B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7300 - 3 EXECUTION
B. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Existing Utility Interruptions at Renovation Work: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated, unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7300 - 4 EXECUTION
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located, aligned, and coordinated with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Summary."
F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.
G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7300 - 5 EXECUTION
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. b. Patch fire rated assemblies with materials to match existing and maintain assembly fire rating.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even- plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A. Site Access: As applicable, provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.
B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.
1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7300 - 6 EXECUTION
agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.
3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C) . 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
a. Use containers specifically intended for holding types of waste materials indentified where applicable, e.g. blue colored containers with labeling and symbols for bio- waste.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills immediately. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." and Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal", whichever is the more restrictive.
H. Remove construction markings not required and graffiti immediately, repairing or replacing damaged material.
I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7300 - 7 EXECUTION
J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. As applicable, coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with commissioning requirements in Division 01 specification sections.
B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.
D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7300 - 8 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 7419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Salvaging and/or recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.
B. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Salvage / Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work.
B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Include the following information:
1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Total quantity of waste in tons (tonnes). 4. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons (tonnes). 5. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.
C. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7419 - 1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
D. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
E. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
F. Submittal: Letter signed by Contractor, tabulating total waste material, quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted, and statement that requirements have been met.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review and discuss waste management plan. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.
1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements of this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.
B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.
C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.
1. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 2. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 3. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials separation will be located.
D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Include the following:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7419 - 2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
1. Total quantity of waste. 2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of collection containers for each type of waste. 3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management). 4. Revenue from salvaged / recycled materials. 5. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. 6. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of waste. 7. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.
1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for operation, termination, and removal requirements.
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.
3.3 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7419 - 3 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7419 - 4 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 7700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
C. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
E. Field Report: For pest control inspection.
F. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7700 - 1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Owner’s signature for receipt of submittals.
5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request, in writing, reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
E. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.
1.4 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7700 - 2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list). Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.
4. Submit list of incomplete items in the format agreed upon by the Owner and Architect.
1.6 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within minimum number days, as required by the Contract, of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.
1. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7700 - 3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations, as applicable, before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7700 - 4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Remove all graffiti and construction writing. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.
D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." and Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal", whichever is the more restrictive and as follows:
1. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.
B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.
3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace all lamps and starters to comply with requirements for new fixtures.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7700 - 5 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
C. All Warranties remain in effect.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7700 - 6 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 7823
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Owner.
a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory. b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.
C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.
D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.
1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual prior to commencing demonstration and training.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7823 - 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect. 7. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 8. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7823 - 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.
2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7823 - 3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
2.4 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7823 - 4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7823 - 5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.
B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7823 - 6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.
E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents."
F. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7823 - 7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7823 - 8 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 7839
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:
1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:
a. Initial Submittal:
1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.
b. Final Submittal:
1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record.
B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record- keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
A. Electronic File of Project Record Documents: Provide Architect with an independent electronic archive of accepted project record documents using electronic project management software as defined in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination", in addition to the printed documents described elsewhere in this Section.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7839 - 1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
2.2 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
2.3 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7839 - 2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Specifications as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.
2.4 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Product Data as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.
1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked- up miscellaneous record submittals.
1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7839 - 3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7839 - 4 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 01 7900
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:
1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.
1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products.
B. Qualification Data: For instructor.
C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.
D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.
B. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7900 - 1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.
B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.
C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7900 - 2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
5. Adjustments: Include the following:
a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.
7. Maintenance: Include the following:
a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.
8. Repairs: Include the following:
a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Division 01 Section "Operations and Maintenance Data."
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7900 - 3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
3.2 INSTRUCTION
A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.
D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.
E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and remove from Project site. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
01 7900 - 4 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 02 4119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes selective removal and subsequent offsite disposal of portions of existing building indicated on drawings and as required to accommodate new construction.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner’s designated storage area.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
B. Proposed Dust-Control and Noise-Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate.
C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
02 4119 - 1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
D. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
E. Predemolition Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Comply with Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with applicable regulations, codes and ordinances.
D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
E. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Occupied Buildings:
1. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 2. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
B. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
C. Hazardous Materials: If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.
D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
02 4119 - 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.
F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
02 4119 - 3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
B. Occupied Buildings: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover.
C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange with Owner to shut off indicated utilities. 2. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. 2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
C. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
D. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
02 4119 - 4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
E. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS
A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.
1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. 2. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas.
B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. 3. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 4. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 5. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, verify condition and contents before starting flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 7. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 8. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 9. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 10. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 11. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 12. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
02 4119 - 5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations.
B. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.
1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing concrete or masonry that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE
A. Refer to the drawings.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
02 4119 - 6 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 03 3000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Product data for reinforcement, forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, specialty concrete topping/overlay system(s), waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, post-installed concrete anchors, and others as requested by Architect. 2. Shop drawings for fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcement. 3. Laboratory test reports or evaluation reports for concrete materials and concrete mix designs. 4. Written report to Architect for each proposed concrete mix at least 15 days prior to start of concreting. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by Architect. 5. Control joint spacing for slabs-on-ground and for slabs over extruded polystyrene. 6. Qualification Data for bonded overlay/repair products: Submit names and qualifications of technical representative(s) and trained installer(s) of bonded overlay/repair product installation(s).
a. Product technical representative shall be obtained to provide assistance with proportioning, batching, mixing, placing, consolidating and finishing of bonded overlay/repair products. b. Product trained installer, preferably with product manufacturer certification as certified installer, shall be obtained to install bonded overlay/repair products. If installer does not hold manufacturer’s certification, installer shall have 5 years minimum successful experience with product installation or similar product installation.
B. Quality Assurance: Comply with provisions of ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings," ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete," and CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice," except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a testing agency acceptable to Architect to perform materials evaluation testing and to design concrete mixes.
a. Materials certificates signed by concrete producer and Contractor may be submitted in lieu of materials laboratory testing when acceptable to Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Form Materials: Furnish form materials with sufficient stability to withstand pressure of placed concrete without bow or deflection.
1. Forms for Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Suitable panel-type material to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces.
B. Reinforcing Materials: As follows:
1. Deformed Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
03 3000 - 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
C. Concrete Materials: As follows:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or III. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F or C. 3. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, except local aggregates of proven durability may be used when acceptable to Architect. 4. Water: Potable.
D. Admixtures: Provide admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.
1. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 2. Water-Reducing, Retarding, and Accelerating Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494.
E. Related Materials: As follows:
1. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. 2. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or polyethylene-coated burlap, complying with ASTM C 171. 3. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type I, Class A, clear acrylic curing/sealing compound with 25 percent solid content (minimum); non-yellowing under ultraviolet light after 500 hours of test in accordance with ASTM D 4587; water based, VOC/AIM compliant. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Euclid Chemical Co. "Super Aqua Cure VOX" b. Lambert Corp. “UV Safe Seal”. c. L & M Const. Chemicals "Lumiseal 30WB" d. W.R. Meadows, Inc. “Vocomp - 30"
F. Concrete Accessories
1. Waterstops: Extruded "rope" form, between two protective papers, silicone treated for fast stripping; in standard cross-section of approximately 1.0 square inch, approximately 36 inches long; Primer as recommended by waterstop manufacturer. 2. Vapor Retarder: Five-ply nylon or polyester cord reinforced high density reinforced high- density polyethylene or 15-mil polyolefin. ASTM E 1745, Class B. Lap tape recommended by membrane manufacturer for compatibility with membrane. 3. Expansion Anchors for Bolted Connections to Concrete (Mechanical Anchor)
a. Only expansion anchors with ICC-ES approval and tested to meet the provisions of ACI 355.2 and ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria (AC) 193 are acceptable for use. b. Anchors shall be stud type threaded bolts with multi-section wedge, with nut, and washer and meet description in Federal Specification FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class I for concrete expansion anchors. c. Size and embedment: As indicated in Drawings. Where embedment is not indicated, submit proposed embedment prior to installation to Architect for approval. d. Material for Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:
1) Carbon Steel with Zinc-Plating in accordance with ASTM B 633, Type III, Fe/Zn 5: Use at interior environments free of moisture or other potentially corrosive conditions. 2) ASTM A 276 or ASTM A493, Type 316 Stainless Steel: Use at potentially corrosive environments.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
03 3000 - 2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
4. Screw Anchors for Bolted Connections to Concrete (Mechanical Anchor):
a. Only screw anchors with ICC-ES approval and tested to meet the provisions of ICC- ES Acceptance Criteria (AC) 193 are acceptable for use. b. Pre-drilling of hole requires standard ANSI drill bit with same diameter as anchor and installing anchor will be done with impact wrench. c. Anchors shall have diameter and length marked on head. d. Size and embedment: As indicated on Drawings. Where embedment is not indicated, submit proposed embedment prior to installation to Engineer for approval. e. Materials: Use carbon steel, heat treated with zinc-plating or mechanically galvanized at interior environments free of moisture or other potentially corrosive conditions. Screw anchors shall not be used in potentially corrosive environments, including but not limited to exterior exposed conditions, potentially wet environments, and attachments for exterior cladding materials. f. Screw anchors once tightened may be loosened maximum of one turn and re- tightened with torque wrench. Loosening or removal beyond this limitation will void screw anchor. g. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide following: 1) HILTI, Inc. – “Kwik HUS-EZ” (ICC ESR-3027) 2) SIMPSON Strong-Tie Company, Inc. – “Titen HD” (ICC ESR-2713) h. Where specific anchor manufacturer/type is shown on drawings, substitution of alternate anchor is subject to Engineer’s approval.
5. Adhesive Anchors for Bolted Connections to Concrete:
a. Only adhesive anchor systems with ICBO approval are approved for use. b. Shall consist of threaded steel rod, nut, washer, and adhesive capsule containing vinylester resin with dibenzoyl peroxide hardener. c. Material for Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:
1) Carbon steel conforming to ASTM A36 except as noted below. 2) ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316 Stainless Steel: Use at potentially corrosive environments.
d. Size and Embedment: As indicated in Drawings. Where embedment is not indicated, submit proposed embedment prior to installation to Architect for review.
6. Adhesive Anchors for Rebar Doweling:
a. Only adhesive anchor systems with ICBO approval are approved for use. b. Shall consist of deformed Grade 60 reinforcing bar and approved adhesive system formula. Adhesive system formula to consist of either vinylester resin or epoxy resin, with hardener. c. Size, length, and embedment of dowel as indicated in Drawings. Chisel point end preparation of dowel, if required by adhesive system manufacturer, shall be provided by Contractor.
G. Mix Proportions and Design: Proportion mixes complying with mix design procedures specified in ACI 301.
1. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of cement content by weight. 2. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties:
a. 4000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.50 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.45 maximum (air-entrained).
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
03 3000 - 3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
3. Limit maximum water-cement ratio of concrete exposed to freezing and thawing to 0.45. Limit maximum water-cement ratio of concrete exposed to deicing salts, brackish water, or seawater to 0.40. 4. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows:
a. Ramps, Slabs, and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. b. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3 inches. c. Other Concrete: Not more than 4 inches.
5. Adjust mix designs when material characteristics, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. Do not use revised concrete mixes until laboratory test data and strength results have been submitted to and reviewed by Architect.
H. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete, providing not less than 4.5 percent nor more than 7 percent entrained air for concrete exposed to freezing and thawing, and from 2 percent to 4 percent for other concrete.
I. Use water-reducing, accelerating, and retarding admixtures that have been tested and accepted in mix designs in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions.
J. Ready-Mix Concrete: ASTM C 94.
K. Latex Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II at exterior locations and where indicated, Type I at other locations.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:
Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Ad Bond (J-40). Euclid Chemical Company; FLEX-CON. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.; Acrylic Additive.
L. Self-Leveling Concrete Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product with aggregate that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 4,000 psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Ardex, Inc. "Ardex K-15" b. Euclid Chemical Co. "Flo-Top" c. Thoro "Thoro Underlayment Self-Leveling Grade" d. Master Builders Technologies "Underlayment 110"
M. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
N. Overlay and Repair Mortar for Floor Topping:
1. General: Use of overlay and repair mortar for floor topping shall be in accordance with manufacturer's application limitations, precautions, and directions for use, including but not limited to surface preparation, mixing, placing, curing, and compatibility with substrate conditions.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
03 3000 - 4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
2. Product types listed below are basis of design, however, it is recognized by Architect/Engineer that high performance cement based overlay/repair mortars are available which may be satisfactory to specific application. Intent is not to omit such products from consideration. Subject to Architect and Engineer's approval prior to use. 3. Epoxy Mortar:
a. Description: ASTM C 881, acceptable at interior applications only, unless otherwise directed by Engineer; appropriate applications include locations susceptible to high wear or high corrosion.
1) Type I: Acceptable at non-structural applications. 2) Type IV: Acceptable at structural applications.
b. Manufacturers: (Consult manufacturer for specific product and compatibility with substrate conditions. Subject to Engineer's review and approval.)
1) ARDEX Engineered Cements. 2) BASF 3) Euclid Chemical Company. 4) Sika Corporation.
4. Polymer Modified Cementitious Mortar:
a. Description: ASTM C 1059, Type II, acceptable at structural and non-structural applications, interior or exterior. b. Manufacturers: (Consult manufacturer for specific product and compatibility with substrate conditions. Subject to Engineer's review and approval.)
1) ARDEX Engineered Cements. 2) BASF 3) Euclid Chemical Company. 4) Sika Corporation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Formwork: Construct formwork so that concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Select form materials to obtain required finishes.
1. Maintain formwork tolerances and surface irregularities within ACI 347 limits, Class A tolerances for concrete exposed to view and Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces. 2. Provide openings in formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. 3. Clean and adjust forms prior to concrete placement. Apply form-release agents or wet forms as required. Retighten forms during concrete placement, if required, to eliminate mortar leaks.
B. Extruded Polystyrene Foam: Apply extruded polystyrene board insulation at locations indicated on drawings to receive extruded polystyrene used as a filler or form. Install boards in multiple layers as required to achieve specified grade. Offset joints at successive layers. Cut and shape to fit as required. Secure boards in place to avoid displacement during concreting. Tape joints to prevent fresh mortar from seeping between boards.
C. Vapor Retarders: Place vapor retarder membrane for slabs on grade, with joints lapped 6 inches and sealed.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
03 3000 - 5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
D. Reinforcement: Accurately position and support reinforcement, and secure against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement to maintain minimum cover with metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers as required. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
1. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable; lap at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire.
E. Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Locate and install construction, isolation, and control joints as indicated or required. Locate construction joints so they do not impair strength and appearance of structure. Place isolation and control joints in slabs-on-ground to stabilize differential settlement and prevent random cracking.
F. Joints in Slabs over Extruded Polystyrene: Install control joints in slabs over extruded polystyrene by either sawcuts or by continuous inserts to satisfy follow criteria:
1. Control joint spacing each direction: not to exceed 10 feet. 2. Slab panel placements shall be approximately rectangular with maximum slab panel size/area of 100 sf. 3. Control joint width: 1/8” minimum: ¼” maximum 4. Control joint depth: t/4 (where “t” denotes slab thickness)
G. Installation of Embedded Items: Set and build anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting diagrams, templates, and instructions provided by others for locating and setting.
1. Locate and support waterstops to prevent displacement.
H. Mechanical and Adhesive Anchors:
1. Verify following with anchor manufacturer’s printed instructions.
a. Drill type and drill bit type/size b. Required clean-out of drilled hole to receive anchor c. Adhesive injection procedure into hole (for adhesive anchor systems) d. Bolt, rod, or dowel insertion procedure into hole e. Adhesive cure time prior to loading (for adhesive anchor systems) f. Nut tightening to proper torque g. Ambient temperature limitations (for adhesive anchor systems)
2. Verify with anchor manufacturer if restrictions exist on type of drilling equipment to be used for project. 3. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling/coring holes for anchors. Exercise care in drilling/coring to avoid damaging existing reinforcing or embedded items. Notify Engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. 4. Verify installer qualifications/training.
I. Latex Bonding Agent, Type II: Mix with portland cement and scrub into concrete surface according to manufacturer's written instructions. If bonding agent dries, recoat before placing patching mortar or concrete.
J. Latex Bonding Agent, Type I: Apply to concrete by brush roller or spray. Allow to dry before placing patching mortar or concrete.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
03 3000 - 6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
K. Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," for placing concrete in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections. Do not begin concrete placement until other affected work is completed.
1. Consolidate placed concrete using mechanical vibrating equipment with hand rodding and tamping so that concrete is worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into forms. 2. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes during mixing, placing, and curing.
a. In cold weather comply with ACI 306. b. In hot weather comply with ACI 305.
L. Floor Toppings:
1. Bonded Toppings: Topping slabs less than 3 inches thick shall be considered to be bonded toppings unless indicated otherwise. Topping slabs 3 inches thick and greater which are intended as bonded toppings are noted as such on Drawings. Pre-plan and prepare for placement of bonded topping slabs as follows:
a. Finish surface of freshly placed concrete to consist of “scratch finish” obtained when base concrete is partially set by texturing with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce surface profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction. No trowelling permitted. b. Apply intentional roughening to concrete surfaces not having scratch finish. Roughen surface by sandblasting or other mechanical methods to achieve minimum surface amplitude of 1/8”, or as otherwise recommended by overlay installer and approved by Engineer. c. Roughening technique/equipment shall be a process selected by Contractor, however, high-impact techniques (including but not limited to scarifying, scabbling, and roto- milling) are known to result in “bruising” and/or “micro-cracking” thereby weakening tensile/bond strength of surface to receive bonded overlay. Where high impact techniques are used, follow with sandblasting or other approved method(s). d. Clean roughened surface by removing deteriorated concrete, dirt, oil, grease, dust and other bond-inhibiting materials from prepared roughened surface. e. Pre-Dampen surface with clean water to condition of “saturated surface dry”, having no standing or glistening water at time of topping placement. Where topping product manufacturer’s instructions do not require pre-dampening of prepared surface, omission of this step may be considered but only with approval of Engineer. f. Apply bonding compound as recommended by overlay product manufacturer’s written instructions.
g. Basis of Bonded Topping Design:
Topping Thickness (T) Product
T = ½” to 1” Polymer-Modified Cementitious (PMC) Mortar
1” < T < 3” PMC Mortar extended with 3/8” max. aggregate
T = 3” and greater Conventional concrete as specified in Drawings with bonding compound applied to base concrete. h. In lieu of PMC Mortar applications noted above, use of other pre-mixed cement based mortars suitable for thin overlay applications may be considered but only with approval of Engineer. No topping shall be less than ½ inch in total thickness.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
03 3000 - 7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
2. Un-bonded Toppings: Topping slabs 3 inches thick and greater shall be considered as un- bonded toppings unless indicated otherwise. Pre-plan and prepare for placement of un- bonded toppings as follows:
a. Broom and vacuum clean base surface to receive topping. b. Apply bond breaker compound to base surface when indicated on Drawings. c. Use conventional concrete as specified in Drawings.
M. Finish of Formed Surface: As follows:
1. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.
a. Locations: Concrete surfaces not exposed to view in finished Work or concealed by other construction.
N. Monolithic Slab Finishes: As follows:
1. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish when surface water has disappeared and when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating.
a. Check and level surface plane to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness). Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
2. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring.
a. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with surface leveled to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) 17 (floor levelness). Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.
3. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior exposed concrete slabs.
a. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
O. Curing: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, apply an evaporation-control compound according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling.
1. Contractor shall select curing method(s) which is compatible with requirements for subsequent material application on surface. 2. Begin initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from exposed surfaces.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
03 3000 - 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
3. Continue curing unformed concrete surfaces by water ponding, continuous fog spraying, continuously wetted absorptive cover, or by moisture-retaining cover curing. Cure formed surfaces by moist curing until forms are removed. Keep concrete continuously moist for not less than 72 hours for high- early strength concrete and 7 days for all other concrete. 4. Apply membrane-forming curing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as soon as final finishing operations are complete. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Apply second coat 24 hours after first coat. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application.
a. Limitations for use:
1) Do not use curing compounds which exhibit yellowing or moderate yellowing at surfaces to be permanently exposed in finished Work. 2) Do not use curing compounds on concrete surfaces scheduled or specified to receive surface-adhered treatment. 3) If curing compound is incorrectly used on concrete surfaces to receive other curing method(s), then mechanically or chemically remove curing compound in it’s entirety not later than 7 days after end of curing period by pre-approved method(s).
b. Locations:
1) Exterior and interior slabs, within limitations described above. 2) Apply another coat of curing compound on floors left to be exposed and /or whose scheduled finish is to be "sealed concrete" or "SC" or "SC-1." Apply this coat after concrete has cured 30 days.
P. Surface Defects: Repair and patch surface defects when such conditions are exposed to view, and when durability, serviceability, and/or structural integrity of structure is affected by defect.
Q. Patching Mortar: Unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, apply as follows:
1. Wet substrate thoroughly and then remove standing water. Scrub a slurry of neat patching mortar into substrate, filling pores and voids. 2. Place patching mortar by troweling toward edges of patch to force intimate contact with edge surfaces. For large patches, fill edges first and then work toward center, always troweling toward edges of patch. At fully exposed reinforcing bars, force patching mortar to fill space behind bars by compacting with trowel from sides of bars. 3. For vertical patching, place material in lifts of not more than 1 inch nor less than 1/4 inch. Do not feather edge. 4. For overhead patching, place material in lifts of not more than 1/2 inch nor less than 1/8 inch. Do not feather edge. 5. After each lift is placed, consolidate material and screed surface. 6. Where multiple lifts are used, score surface of lifts to provide a rough surface for application of subsequent lifts. Allow each lift to reach final set before placing subsequent lifts. 7. Allow surfaces of lifts that are to remain exposed to become firm and then finish to match adjacent surface. 8. Wet-cure cementitious patching materials, including polymer-modified, cementitious patching materials, for not less than seven days by water-fog spray or water-saturated absorptive cover.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
03 3000 - 9 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
R. Underlayment: Mix and apply self leveling underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. 2. Apply to produce uniform, level surface. 3. Add aggregate for thicker areas as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Apply a final layer without aggregate if required to produce smooth surface. 5. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 6. Cure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.
S. Field Quality Control: Perform sampling and testing during concrete placement, as follows:
T. Field Quality Control: The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test reports. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the following, as directed by Architect.
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.
a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens. d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required. e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. yd. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. 4. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 5. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, ready-mix producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. 6. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
03 3000 - 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
7. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. 8. Flatness and Levelness Inspection of Floor Slabs: A qualified independent testing agency (Inspector) will perform testing for floor flatness. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
03 3000 - 11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
03 3000 - 12 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 05 5000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Metal fabrications and supplementary items necessary for installation.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Unprotected Areas: Exterior areas directly that are exposed to the elements such as rain, snow, or ice.
B. Protected Areas: Interior and exterior areas that are not directly exposed to the elements such as rain, snow, or ice.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer/fabricator’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer/fabricator's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components and attachments to other work. Distinguish between shop and field-assembled work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding Certifications: Certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
B. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements.
C. Manufacturer/Fabricator's Project Acceptance Document: Certification that products are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or required.
D. Qualification Data:
1. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
05 5000 - 1 METAL FABRICATIONS
1. Experience: Installer's personnel with not less than 5 years of experience in the successful performance of Work similar to scope of this Project. 2. Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor at Project while the Work is in progress, and who has not less than 5 years of experience installing products and systems similar to scope of this Project.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel". 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel". 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel". 4. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum".
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where products and systems are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, provide product by one of manufacturers listed. If not listed, submit as substitution according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures".
B. Basis of Design (Product Standard): Contract Documents are based on products and systems specified to establish a standard of quality. Other available manufacturers/fabricators offering products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and comply with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer/fabricator. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator of primary materials.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
05 5000 - 2 METAL FABRICATIONS
2.3 FERROUS METAL MATERIALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, blemishes, or other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. Do not use steel sheet with variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.
B. Steel:
1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. 3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 4. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. 5. Finish:
a. Unprotected Areas: Galvanized metal. b. Protected Areas: Uncoated ferrous metal.
C. Stainless Steel:
1. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. 2. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. 3. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 NON-FERROUS METAL MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209/B 209M, Alloy 6061-T6.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221/B 221M, Alloy 6063-T6.
C. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
D. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. Fastener Type and Material: Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring fabrications to other types of construction indicated.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307/F 568M, Grade A/ ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563/A 563M; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593/F 738M; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594/F 836M; and, where indicated, flat washers; and as follows:
1. Protected Areas:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
05 5000 - 3 METAL FABRICATIONS
a. Alloy Group 1 (A1) for Type 304.
2. Unprotected Areas:
a. Alloy Group 1 (A1) for Type 304.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563/ A 563M; and, where indicated, flat washers. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
E. Plain Washers: Round carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1/ASME B18.22M.
F. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1/ASME B18.21.2M.
G. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
H. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3/B18.6.7M.
I. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1/B18.2.3.8M.
J. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1, flat head, carbon steel.
2.6 ANCHORS
A. General: Provide anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Bolts, washers, and shims as needed, either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM F 2329.
C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1. Protected Areas:
a. Steel: Carbon steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. b. Stainless Steel: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593/F 738M; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594/F 836M; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A1) for Type 304. c. Locations: Where specified or where indicated on drawings.
2. Unprotected Areas: Stainless steel bolts, ASTM F 593/F 738M, and nuts, ASTM F 594/F 836M; and as follows:
a. Alloy Group 1 (A1) for Type 304.
3. Post-Tensioned Concrete Locations: Anchors shall not exceed 1 in (25 mm ) embedment. Obtain Structural Engineer’s written approval for all proposed anchors in post-tensioned concrete prior to installation.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
05 5000 - 4 METAL FABRICATIONS
2.7 PAINT MATERIALS
A. Paint for Steel Fabrications: As specified in Division 09 Section "Painting".
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint for Steel Fabrications in Unprotected Areas: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
C. Bituminous Paint for Aluminum Fabrications: ASTM D 1187, cold-applied asphalt emulsion.
2.8 ACCESSORY ITEMS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
B. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi (210.92 k/cm ), unless otherwise indicated.
C. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.
2.9 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Fabricate metal fabrications, including clips, brackets, and other components necessary to support and anchor fabrications to supporting structure, and to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage.
1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.
B. Shop Assembly: Assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C. Fabrication Requirements:
1. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 in (0.8 mm ) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 2. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. 3. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. 4. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
5. Unprotected Areas:
a. Allow for thermal movement resulting from 120 deg F (49 deg C) change (range) in ambient and 180 deg F (82 deg C) surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
05 5000 - 5 METAL FABRICATIONS
b. Fabricate hot-dip galvanized fabrications so that field assembly will be by bolted connections and not welding. c. Fabricate joints exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
D. Assembly Requirements:
1. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 2. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 3. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/4 in by 1-1/4 in (6 mm by 31 mm ), with a minimum 6 in (150 mm ) embedment and 2 in (50 mm ) hook, not less than 8 in (200 mm ) from ends and corners of units and 24 in (600 mm ) on center, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Complete fabrication prior to shop painting or hot-dip galvanizing.
E. Shop-Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. Weld corners and seams continuously to develop full strength of member to comply with following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural framework as necessary to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors 1-1/4 in (32 mm ) wide by 1/4 in (6 mm ) thick by 8 in (200 mm ) long at 24 in (600 mm ) on center, unless otherwise indicated.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
05 5000 - 6 METAL FABRICATIONS
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 6 in (150 mm ) from each end, 6 in (150 mm ) from corners, and 24 in (600 mm ) on center, unless otherwise indicated.
2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Finish Quality Standard: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.
2.13 STEEL FINISHES
A. Steel Fabrications:
B. Unprotected Areas:
1. Galvanized Finish: Hot-dip galvanize according to following. For surfaces to be painted, do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
a. Steel and Iron Products: ASTM A 123. b. Steel and Iron Hardware: ASTM A 153.
2. Cleaning: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean surfaces of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
C. Protected Areas:
1. Shop Priming: Comply with Division 09 Section “Painting” and as follows:
a. Preparation of Uncoated Surfaces: Prepare uncoated surfaces to comply with requirements of coating product to be used, but not less than minimum requirements of SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed fabrications. b. Application: SSPC-PA 1; apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
D. Field-Applied Coatings: As specified in Division 09 Section “Painting”. Paint all steel fabrications unless noted otherwise.
2.14 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES
A. Stainless Steel Fabrications: As-fabricated finish.
2.15 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
05 5000 - 7 METAL FABRICATIONS
B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive metal fabrications and associated Work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting Work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Respective manufacturer/fabricator’s written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents.
B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer/fabricator’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
C. Connections at Unprotected Areas: Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of units that have been coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections or other means without further cutting or fitting.
D. Field Welding: Weld connections continuously to develop full strength of member to comply with following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
05 5000 - 8 METAL FABRICATIONS
3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
E. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed aluminum surfaces that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with heavy coat of bituminous paint.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturer/fabricators' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 mil (0.05 mm ) dry film thickness.
B. Galvanized Surfaces at Unprotected Areas: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
05 5000 - 9 METAL FABRICATIONS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
05 5000 - 10 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 06 1053
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Miscellaneous rough carpentry and supplementary items necessary for installation.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 in nominal (38 mm actual ) or greater, but less than 5 in nominal (114 mm actual ) in least dimension.
B. Lumber Grading Agencies:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance. 2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Include data for wood preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 3. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials, both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures when tested according to ASTM D 5664. 4. Waterborne-Treated Wood: For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Warranties: Include copies from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Building Code Evaluation Reports: Published reports from model code organization, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that following evidences compliance with building code in effect for the Project.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 1053 - 1 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
B. Qualification Data:
1. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where products and systems are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Engineer products and systems to withstand loads within limits of allowable working stresses of the materials involved under conditions indicated and without permanent deformation or failure of materials.
B. Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry within Roofing System Assemblies: Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in connection with roofing system assembly and flashings shall be fabricated and installed to withstand specified uplift pressures and thermally induced movement without contributing to failure of roofing system or flashings.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 1053 - 2 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
C. Surface Burning Characteristics for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Products and construction identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 84/NFPA 255/UL 723 and included under Category BPVV published in Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) "Fire Resistance Directory"; or listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Flame Spread: Class A - no greater than 25. 2. Smoke Developed: No greater than 450.
2.3 WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Dimension Lumber:
1. Material Quality Standards: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under rules indicated. 2. Grade: Provide No. 2 grade, of any of following species:
a. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. b. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA. c. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. d. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. e. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. f. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. g. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA. h. Douglas fir-south; WWPA. i. Northern species; NLGA. j. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA. k. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
3. Grade Marking: Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 4. Sizes: Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 5. Finish: Provide dressed lumber, sanded four sides, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Maximum Moisture Content:
a. Provide kiln-dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2 in nominal (38 mm actual ) thickness or less, for concealed conditions. b. Provide kiln-dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2 in nominal (38 mm actual ) thickness or less, for exposed conditions.
B. Plywood:
1. Material Quality Standard: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1. 2. Grades: Furnish the grades below according to installation location:
a. A-C; when exposed at occupied interior locations. b. B-C; when exposed at mechanical and electrical equipment rooms.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 1053 - 3 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
3. Grade Marking: Factory mark each piece of plywood with grade stamp of grading agency. 4. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 in (12 mm ), unless indicated otherwise.
2.4 TREATED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Preservative-Treated Wood:
1. Product Quality Standard: AWPA, Use Category UC4a, for species, product, preservative, and end use. Use preservative treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Description: Wood products impregnated with chemicals by pressure process acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, according to the following:
a. Listed in Section 4 of AWPA U1. b. Containing no arsenic or chromium.
3. Field Preservative-Treatment for Cut Surfaces: Apply one of the following depending upon conditions listed below, in accordance with AWPA M4:
a. Continuously Protected from Liquid Water: Inorganic boron. b. Not Continuously Protected from Liquid Water: Copper naphthenate.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood:
1. Product Quality Standards: Provide materials that comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Use fire-retardant treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
a. Concealed Wood Blocking: Chemical formulations for fire retardant treatment to contain a compatible, non-bleed, light fast, colored dye to identify and indicate treatment.
2. Description: Wood products impregnated with chemicals by pressure process, or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, having following characteristics:
a. Fire-retardant-treated materials shall comply with performance requirements specified above after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. b. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664, for lumber and ASTM D 5516, for plywood. c. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated.
C. Moisture Content: Kiln-dry wood after treatment to following maximum moisture content:
1. 19 percent for lumber. 2. 15 percent for plywood.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 1053 - 4 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
D. Quality Marking: Identify with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. Fastener Types and Materials: Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. Unless otherwise indicated, furnish Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 / F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, within roofing system assemblies.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC-ES NER-272.
D. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: ANSI A10.3; low velocity, powder-actuated fasteners; drive pins and washers fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials; powder loads suitable for application indicated; and capable of sustaining, without failure, an ultimate load capacity not less than 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency.
E. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1, flat head, carbon steel.
F. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: As specified in the following locations.
1. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Steel Framing". 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies".
G. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1/ASME B18.2.3.8M.
H. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A / ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6; with ASTM A 563 / ASTM A 563M hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.6 ANCHORS
A. Anchors: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Bolts, washers, and shims as needed, either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 / A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27 / A 27M cast steel; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM F 2329.
C. Post-Installed Anchors:
1. Generic Type: Torque-controlled expansion anchors. 2. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 / F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Material for Exterior Locations and where Stainless Steel is indicated: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 1053 - 5 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products, fabrications, and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Respective manufacturer written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents.
B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
C. General Requirements:
1. Securely attach Work to substrate according to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Select fasteners of appropriate size, type, and length that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood while installing fasteners. Do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. 4. Do not use material with the following conditions:
a. Material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. b. Materials with defects that interfere with function of member. c. Pieces which are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
5. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, and level. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. 6. Apply field preservative-treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated wood. 7. Where preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
D. Schedule of Applications:
1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Use preservative-treated wood for the following applications.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 1053 - 6 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing systems. b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.
2. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Use fire-retardant-treated wood for the following applications:
a. Concealed wood blocking within interior partitions. b. Exposed plywood backing panels supporting equipment at interior locations.
3. Untreated Wood: Not allowed.
3.3 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Securely attach items to substrates to support applied loading.
3.4 PLYWOOD INSTALLATION
A. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels.
B. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. General: Protect untreated wood, and wood that has been treated with chemicals that can leach, from deterioration due to weather.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 1053 - 7 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 1053 - 8 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 06 4023
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Shop-finished interior architectural woodwork and supplementary items necessary for installation.
B. Simulated Stone Countertops: Refer to Division 12 Section "Simulated Stone Countertops" for solid surfacing, quartz agglomerate, or cultured marble countertops incorporated into work specified in this Section. Simulated stone trim is specified in this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
B. Exposed Surfaces, Semi-Exposed Surfaces, Concealed Surfaces, Types of Cabinet Construction, and other related terms are defined in referenced quality standards.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components and attachments to other work. Distinguish between shop and field-assembled work.
1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Items with Plastic Laminate Finish:
a. Plastic laminates, 8 in by 10 in (200 mm by 250 mm ), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 4023 - 1 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
A. Manufacturer's Project Acceptance Document: Certification by the manufacturer that its product(s) are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or required, and that a warranty will be issued.
B. Qualification Data:
1. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Experience: Installer's personnel with not less than 5 years of experience in the successful performance of Work similar to scope of this Project. 2. Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor at Project while the Work is in progress, and who has not less than 5 years of experience installing products and systems similar to scope of this Project. 3. Certification: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program or licensee of WI's Certified Compliance Program.
B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with "Architecural Woodwork Standards" for standards and for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finish, installation and other requirements:
1. Provide manufacturer certification indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of referenced quality standards. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.
C. Mock-ups: Prior to fabrication and installation, build mock-up for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mock-up using materials indicated for the completed Work.
1. Build mock-up in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Contractor shall provide structural support framework.
a. Show typical components, attachments to building structure, and requirements of installation.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when mock-up will be installed. 3. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before starting fabrication or installation. 4. Acceptance of mock-ups does not constitute acceptance of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mock-ups unless such deviations are specifically noted by Contractor and accepted by Architect in writing. 5. Demolish and remove mock-ups when directed by Architect unless accepted to become part of the completed Work.
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 4023 - 2 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where products and systems are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.
B. Coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, provide product by one of manufacturers listed. If not listed, submit as substitution according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures".
B. Basis of Design (Product Standard): Contract Documents are based on products and systems specified to establish a standard of quality. Other manufacturers offering products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and comply with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
B. Provide materials that comply with requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Standards" quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Wood Products for Cabinets:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 4023 - 3 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD Exterior Glue, made with binder containing no added urea formaldehyde. 2. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no added urea formaldehyde. 3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Fire-Rated Laminates: Where indicated or scheduled; NEMA LD 3, grades as follows:
a. Vertical Surfaces: General Purpose Type 604 (VGF), 0.032 in (0.79 mm ) thick. b. Horizontal Surfaces: General Purpose Type 605 (HGF) 0.048 in (1.2 mm ) thick.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Formica Corporation. b. International Paper. c. Lamin-Art, Inc. d. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. e. Pioneer Plastics Corp. f. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div. g. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes:
a. Selections: As scheduled or as indicated in Design Selections.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
C. Adhesives:
1. General: As recommended by woodwork fabricator to suit application. 2. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) unless indicated otherwise:
a. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. b. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.
3. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate Faces and Edges: PVA as recommended by woodwork fabricator to suit application.
D. Hanging Clips: Provide manufacturer’s standard nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized zee hanging clips.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 4023 - 4 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium Grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.
C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:
1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 in (19 mm ) Thick or Less: 1/16 in (1.5 mm ). 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 in (19 mm ) Thick: 1/8 in (3 mm ).
D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.
E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS
A. Grade: Premium.
B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay unless indicated otherwise.
C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements:
1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGP, .038 in (1 mm ) thick. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP, .038 in (1 mm ) thick. 3. Doors and Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS, .028 in (0.7 mm ) thick. 4. Edges: PVC Edge Banding, 0.12 in (3 mm ) thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
D. Semi-exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade CLS, .020 in (0.5 mm ) thick.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 4023 - 5 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
2. Edges: PVC Edge Banding, .038 in (1 mm ) thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
E. Body Members (Ends, Divisions, Bottoms and Sub-Tops): Medium-density fiberboard, 3/4 in (19 mm ) minimum thickness.
F. Face Frames, Rails, Kicks and Bases: Solid-hardwood lumber or hardwood plywood, 3/4 in (19 mm ) thick minimum thickness .
G. Shelves: Hardwood plywood with veneer core with the following thickness:
1. For Spans Up To 32 in (800 mm ): 3/4 in (19 mm ). 2. For Spans Up To 42 in (1050 mm ): 1 in (25 mm ).
H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL, .020 in (0.5 mm ) thick.
I. Concealed Edges of Base Cabinet Panels: Including but not limited to floors, vertical edges, splashes and countertops; Clear Catalyzed Polyurethane.
2.7 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
A. Refer to Division 12 Section "Simulated Stone Countertops".
2.8 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOPS AND SHELVING
A. Stainless-Steel: 0.0625 in (1.5 mm ) thick, stainless-steel sheet, ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 satin finish.
B. Countertops: Weld shop-made joints, and grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional, textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
1. Sound-deaden entire undersurface with heavy-build mastic coating. 2. Extend top down to provide a 1 in (25 mm ) thickness and a 1/2 in (12 mm ) return flange under frame. 3. Form backsplash coved to and integral with top surface. 4. Provide raised marine edge around perimeter of tops containing sinks; pitch two ways to sink to provide drainage without channeling or grooving.
C. Fixed Shelving: Fold front and side edges down to provide 1-inch (25 mm) thickness. Fold rear edge up 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) to form a mounting flange. Weld corners. Construct integral wall mounting brackets of 0.0781 inch (2 mm) stainless steel with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) flange at wall and completely welded to underside of shelf.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 4023 - 6 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive interior architectural woodwork and associated work to which interior architectural woodwork will be applied for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Quality standards. (The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.) 2. Respective manufacturer/fabricator’s written installation instructions. 3. Accepted submittals. 4. Contract Documents.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
B. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 in per 96 in (3 mm per 2400 mm ).
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 4023 - 7 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
E. Cabinets, General: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 in per 96 in (3 mm per 2400 mm ) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.
F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.
1. Where possible make field jointing in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. 2. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. 3. Simulated Stone Countertops: Refer to Division 12 Section "Simulated Stone Countertops". 4. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 in per 96 in (3 mm per 2400 mm ) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 5. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 in (400 mm ) on center and to walls with adhesive. 6. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".
G. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
06 4023 - 8 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 07 2100
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Thermal insulation products and systems and supplementary items necessary for installation.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Mineral Fiber: Insulation composed principally of fibers manufactured from rock, slag or glass, with or without binders.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data:
1. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects
B. Manufacturer’s Project Acceptance Document: Certification by the manufacturer that its product(s) are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or required.
1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
07 2100 - 1 THERMAL INSULATION
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, provide product by one of manufacturers listed. If not listed, submit as substitution according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures".
B. Basis of Design (Product Standard): Contract Documents are based on products and systems specified to establish a standard of quality. Other manufacturers offering products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and comply with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
B. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and referenced standards in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer’s standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass mineral fiber (fiberglass) insulation to be installed within ceiling plenums rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or by comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Erosion Test Results: No visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500 fpm (13 m/s) air velocity. 2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: No evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Fire Resistance Ratings: Materials and construction identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 119/NFPA 251/UL 263 and included under Categories listed below that are published in Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) "Fire Resistance Directory"; or listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
07 2100 - 2 THERMAL INSULATION
a. Polystyrene Insulation: Category CCVW. b. Mineral Fiber Insulation: Category BZJZ
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Materials and construction identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 84/NFPA 255/UL 723 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction listed below. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 3. Fire Rated Assembly Design: Selected from Product Category BXUV published in UL’s "Fire Resistance Directory", or design of other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Combustion Characteristics: Materials and construction identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 136 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
2.4 GLASS MINERAL FIBER (FIBERGLASS) BATT INSULATION
A. Unfaced Insulation:
1. Description: ASTM C 665, Type I, ASTM C553, Type II. Unfaced blankets produced by bonding inorganic glass mineral fibers with a thermosetting binder; free of formaldehyde. 2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; CertaPro Sustainable Insulation. b. Johns Manville; Unfaced Batts for Metal Framing. c. Knauf Insulation; EcoBatt with ECOSE Technology. d. Owens-Corning; EcoTouch Thermal Batts for Metal Frame Construction.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics per ASTM E 84:
a. Flame spread: 25 or less. b. Smoke developed: 50 or less.
4. Thickness: Full depth of metal stud cavity.
B. Faced Insulation:
1. Description: ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A, Category 1, ASTM C553, Type II. Faced blankets produced by bonding inorganic glass mineral fibers with a thermosetting binder, faced with foil-scrim-kraft, vapor-retarder membrane; free of formaldehyde. 2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; CertaPro Sustainable Insulation FSK-25. b. Johns Manville; FSK-25. c. Knauf Insulation; EcoBatt with ECOSE Technology, FSK Faced. d. Owens-Corning; EcoTouch Flame Spread 25.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics per ASTM E 84:
a. Flame spread: 25 or less. b. Smoke developed: 50 or less.
4. Thickness: Full depth of metal stud cavity. 5. Accessories:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
07 2100 - 3 THERMAL INSULATION
a. Adhesive or Sealing Tape: Product provided or recommended by manufacturer with demonstrated capability to bond foil-faced vapor-retarder membrane securely to substrates indicated. b. Seaming Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape provided or recommended by manufacturer for seaming and bonding joints and penetrations in foil-laced vapor-retarder membrane.
2.5 SPRAYED FOAM INSULATING GAP FILLER
A. As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".
2.6 INSULATION MOUNTING ANCHOR SYSTEM
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors:
1. Description: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements:
a. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 in (0.75 mm) thick by 2 in (50 mm) square. b. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 in (2.62 mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners. c. Gemco; Spindle Type.
B. Insulation Retaining Washers:
1. Description: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016 in (0.4 mm) thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 in (38 mm) square or in diameter. 2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150. b. AGM Industries, Inc.; SC150. c. Gemco; Dome-Cap. d. Gemco; R-150. e. Gemco; S-150
C. Insulation Standoff.
1. Description: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of 1 in (25 mm) between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached. 2. Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: Gemco; Clutch Clip.
D. Anchor Adhesive:
1. Description: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
07 2100 - 4 THERMAL INSULATION
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type S Adhesive. c. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to which thermal insulation will be applied for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting Work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents.
B. General Requirements:
1. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, or snow. 2. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. 3. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. 4. Apply a single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION SYSTEMS
A. Unfaced Glass Mineral Fiber (Fiberglass) Semi-Rigid and Batt Insulation: Install insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to following:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. Where more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
07 2100 - 5 THERMAL INSULATION
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Where partition will be covered by gypsum board on only one side, apply adhesive to backside of gypsum board that is installed and press insulation in place to form bond to prevent insulation from sagging within cavity.
B. Unfaced Glass Mineral Fiber (Fiberglass) Semi-Rigid and Batt Insulation over Structural Substrates: Install insulation on substrates by using insulation mounting anchor system as follows:
1. Fasten anchors to substrates with anchor adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated. 2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between substrate and insulation. 3. After adhesive has dried, install insulation by pressing into position over spindles and securing tightly in place with insulation retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness. 4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles. 5. Where spindles will be exposed to human contact after installation, protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap.
C. Foil-Faced Glass Mineral Fiber (Fiberglass) Batt Insulation: Install insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to following:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. Where more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Set foil-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction in winter, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 4. Where partition will be covered by gypsum board on only one side, apply adhesive to backside of gypsum board that is installed and press insulation in place to form bond to prevent insulation from sagging within cavity. 5. Firmly attach and seal foil-faced vapor-retarder to metal framing and solid substrates with adhesive per manufacturer’s written instructions. 6. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating foil-faced vapor-retarder with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor-retarder. 7. Repair tears or punctures in foil-faced vapor-retarder with vapor-retarder tape immediately before concealment by other work.
D. Sprayed Foam Insulating Gap Filler: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
07 2100 - 6 THERMAL INSULATION
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
07 2100 - 7 THERMAL INSULATION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
07 2100 - 8 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 07 9200
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Joint sealants, backing materials, and supplementary items necessary for installation.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Experience: Installer's personnel with not less than 5 years of experience in the successful performance of Work similar to scope of this Project. 2. Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor at Project while the Work is in progress, and who has not less than 5 years of experience installing products and systems similar to scope of this Project. 3. Manufacturer Acceptance: Installer shall be certified, approved, licensed, or acceptable to manufacturer to install products. 4. General Requirements: Test materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 5. Test Method: Manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 6. Specimen Quantity: Provide not fewer than number of pieces required of each kind of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 7. Reports: Interpret test results and certify reports indicating requirements for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion or for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Conditions: Install joint sealants within range of ambient and substrate temperatures and moisture conditions as recommended by manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect performance.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
07 9200- 1 JOINT SEALANTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, provide product by one of manufacturers listed. If not listed, submit as substitution according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures".
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
B. Compatibility: Joint sealants, backings, and other related materials shall be compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and primers for use inside weatherproofing system shall comply with following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1. Elastomeric Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Primers for Non-Porous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for joints in repeated contact with food.
E. Sealant Color: As scheduled or as indicated in Design Selections.
2.3 INTERIOR ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. Interior Non-sag Silicone Sealant:
1. Product Quality Standard: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 2. Description: Single component, non-sag, moisture curing, silicone sealant specially formulated with fungicide for use in sanitary non-porous applications. 3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Dow Corning; 786 Silicone Sealant. b. Momentive Performance Materials, GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. c. Pecora Corp.; 898. d. Sika Corp., Construction Products Div.; Sikasil GP e. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Tremsil 200.
B. Interior Non-sag Acrylic Latex Sealant:
1. Product Quality Standard: ASTM C 834, Type and Grade as required by conditions. 2. Description: Single component, non-sag, moisture curing, general purpose, paintable, siliconized acrylic latex sealant. 3. Joint Movement Capability: Plus 7.5 percent, minus 7.5 percent 4. Manufacturers and Products:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
07 9200- 2 JOINT SEALANTS
a. Pecora Corp.; AC 20+. b. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Tremflex 834.
C. Sprayed Foam Insulating Gap Filler:
1. Description: Low pressure, one-component, expanding, open-cell latex-based insulating foam gap filler; applied with professional hand-held dispensing gun; CFC and HCFC free. 2. Performance Requirements: Class 1 Fire-Retardant per ASTM E 84. 3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Convenience Products; Touch N’ Foam, Easy Fill Latex Foam Sealant. b. DAP Products, Inc.; DAPtex Plus.
D. Acoustical Sealants: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies".
2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
1. Use open cell (Type O) sealant backing rod at interior line of sealant for double sealed condition unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings:
1. Product Quality Standard: ASTM C 1330, Type C, Type O, or Type B; as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated. 2. Description: Extruded polyethylene, polyurethane, or polyolefin in either closed cell structure (Type C), open cell structure (Type O), or bicellular structure with surface skin (Type B) as defined by ASTM Terminology C 717. 3. Size: Diameter approximately 25 percent larger than joint width, unless otherwise directed by manufacturer. 4. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Type C:
1) BASF; MasterSeal 920 (Formerly Sonneborn, Closed-Cell Backer Rod). 2) Nomaco Inc.; Green Rod or HBR.
b. Type O:
1) Backer Rod Mfg. Inc.; Denver Foam. 2) Nomaco Inc.; Foam-Pak II.
c. Type B:
1) BASF; MasterSeal 921 (Formerly Sonneborn, Soft Backer Rod). 2) Nomaco Inc.; Dual-Rod or Sof-Rod.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials, or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
07 9200- 3 JOINT SEALANTS
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Cleaners for Non-porous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent non-porous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
B. Masking Tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrate surfaces to receive products and systems and associated Work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting Work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
B. Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint backings and sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and following requirements:
1. Remove foreign material that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including, but not limited to, dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean non-porous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. 5. Substrate material allowed by sealant's ASTM C 920 Use Classification.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
07 9200- 4 JOINT SEALANTS
C. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer, or as indicated by prior experience, or as required by pre-construction compatibility and adhesion testing. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Joint Sealant Backings: Install type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet or damaged before sealant application and replace with dry materials. 4. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.
B. Joint Sealants: Install at same time as backings using proven techniques that comply with following:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 4. Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
a. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. b. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. c. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
5. Install joint sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 as applicable to materials, applications, conditions indicated, and with the following profile configurations:
a. Fillet: Figure 5. b. Bridge: Figure 6. c. Butt: Figure 8A (concave tooling), generally hour-glass shape with 2:1 width-to-depth ratio.
C. Sprayed Foam Insulating Gap Filler: Apply sprayed foam insulating gap filler within exterior wall assemblies using professional hand-held dispensing gun in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
07 9200- 5 JOINT SEALANTS
1. Prior to installation of wall finish systems, apply sprayed foam insulating gap filler to gaps, cracks, cavities, openings, and voids in exterior wall back-up, including annular space around piping, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets to seal off potential air drafts. 2. After sprayed foam sealant is applied, make flush with face of adjacent wall by using method recommended by manufacturer.
3.5 CLEANING
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Remove excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. General Requirements: Protect during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original Work.
3.7 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Interior Elastomeric Sealant Applications:
1. Interior Non-sag Silicone Sealant:
a. Non-moving joints in moist or damp areas which are susceptible to mildew. b. Non-moving joints in toilet rooms. c. Non-moving joints in kitchens. d. Non-moving joints in repeated contact with food.
2. Interior Non-sag Acrylic Latex Sealant:
a. Non-moving joints where another type of sealant is not otherwise specified or scheduled. b. Minimal moving joints due to temperature change.
B. Sprayed Foam Insulating Gap Filler Applications:
1. Exterior non-moving gaps around windows, glazed aluminum walls, doors, and penetrations beneath weather-resistant coverings. 2. Interior non-moving gaps around windows, glazed aluminum walls, doors, and penetrations.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
07 9200- 6 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 08 1113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Custom hollow metal doors and frames and supplementary items necessary for installation.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Custom Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components and attachments to other work. Distinguish between shop and field-assembled work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements.
B. Qualification Data:
1. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 5 years of experience in the successful production and in-service performance of products and systems similar to scope of this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. Experience: Installer's personnel with not less than 5 years of experience in the successful performance of Work similar to scope of this Project. 2. Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor at Project while the Work is in progress, and who has not less than 5 years of experience installing products and systems similar to scope of this Project.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 1113 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
B. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4 in (100 mm ) high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1. Provide minimum 1/4 in (6 mm ) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where products and systems are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Engineer products and systems to withstand loads within limits of allowable working stresses of the materials involved under conditions indicated and without permanent deformation or failure of materials.
2.3 COMPONENT MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008 / A 1008M, Designation CS (Commercial Steel), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011 / A 1011M, Designation CS (Commercial Steel), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 1113 - 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 / A 653M, Designation CS (Commercial Steel), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180 ) or A60 (ZF180 ) metallic coating. Thickness indicated is for uncoated steel.
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591 / A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G ) coating designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 / A 1008M or ASTM A 1011 / A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153 / A 153M, Class B.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Device type and size required, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153 / A 153M, Class B.
F. Fasteners into Concrete:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, ANSI A 10.3; low velocity, powder-actuated fasteners; drive pins and clip angles fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching frames into concrete substrate. 2. Available Manufacturers:
a. Construction Materials, Inc. b. Heckman Building Products, Inc. c. Hilti Corp. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. Powers Fasteners. f. Simpson Strong Tie Anchor Systems.
3. Post-Tensioned Concrete: For post-tensioned concrete, fasteners shall not exceed 1 in (25 mm ) embedment. Obtain Structural Engineer's written approval for all proposed fasteners in post-tensioned concrete prior to installation.
G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation for Installations in Sound-Rated Partitions: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6 to 12 lb/cu ft (96 to 192 kg/cu m ) density; with following characteristics:
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 maximum. 2. Smoke Development Index: 50 maximum. 3. Combustion Characteristics: Passing ASTM E 136.
H. Glazing: Comply with Division 08 Section "Glazing".
I. Primer: Fast-curing, corrosion-inhibiting, lead and chromate free, universal primer complying with ANSI A224.1 acceptance criteria; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system specified in Division 09 Section “Painting”.
J. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Fabrication Quality Standard: ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 1113 - 3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
B. General Requirements: Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit, and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.
C. Accessories: Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
1. Locate hardware according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections.
2.5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Fabrication Provisions: Fabricate doors not less than 1-3/4 in (44 mm ) thick, of seamless hollow construction unless otherwise indicated. Construct doors with smooth surfaces without visible joints or seams on exposed faces.
1. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.
B. Door Face Sheets:
1. Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum 0.053 in (1.3 mm ) (16 gage) thick for doors in the following locations:
a. Interior doors.
C. Core Construction:
1. Steel-Stiffened Core: 0.026 in (0.7 mm ) (22 gage) thick, steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 in (150 mm ) apart, spot welded to face sheets a maximum of 5 in (125 mm ) on centers. Spaces filled between stiffeners with mineral-fiber insulation.
D. Vertical Edges:
1. Single Acting Doors: Beveled 1/8 in in 2 in (3 mm in 50 mm ). 2. Double Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8 in (53 mm ) radius.
E. Top and Bottom Channels: Closed with continuous channels, minimum 0.053 in (1.3 mm ) (16 gage) thick, of same material as face sheets and spot welded to both face sheets.
1. Spot weld metal channel not more than 6 inches (150 mm) on center.
F. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate from same material as door. Minimum thickness of steel reinforcing plates for following hardware:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 1113 - 4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
1. Hinges and Pivots: 0.167 in (4.2 mm ) (7 gage) thick by 1-1/2 in wide by 6 in (38 mm by 150 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds. 2. Strikes, Flush Bolts, and Closers: 0.093 in (2.3 mm) (12 gage). 3. Surface-Mounted Hold-Open Arms and Panic Devices: 0.093 in (2.3 mm ) (12 gage).
2.6 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Fabrication Provisions:
1. Fabricate frames of construction indicated below. 2. Close contact edges of corner joints tight with faces mitered and full-profile continuously welded.
a. “Knock-down” frame construction is not acceptable and shall not be used.
3. Close contact edges of stops butted or mitered. 4. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
B. Joinery:
1. Fabrication Quality Standard: Head-to-jamb joints according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 820 for either of following fabrication techniques with:
a. Saw-mitered corners, full-profile continuously welded. b. Machine-mitered corners, full-profile continuously welded.
2. Externally or internally weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and seamless. 3. Internally weld rabbet and soffits continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth. 4. Use of gusset or splice plates as substitute for fully welding is not permitted.
C. Materials and Thickness:
1. Metallic-coated steel sheet, 0.067 in (1.7 mm ) (14 gage) thick for frames in the following locations:
a. Interior frames.
2. Thickness for Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet Frames:
a. 48 in (1200 mm ) Wide or Less: 0.053 in (1.3 mm ) (16 gage) thick. b. More than 48 in (1200 mm ) Wide: 0.067 inch (1.7 mm ) (14 gage) thick.
D. Stops and Moldings:
1. Form corners with butted or mitered hairline joints. 2. Provide around glazed lites where indicated.
a. Fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior doors and frames and on secure side of interior doors and frames. b. Loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work so that glass can be removed independently.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 1113 - 5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated.
E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate from same material as frame. Minimum thickness of steel reinforcing plates for following hardware:
1. Hinges and Pivots: 0.167 in (4.2 mm ) (7 gage) thick by 1-1/2 in wide by 6 in (38 mm by 150 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds. 2. Strikes, Flush Bolts, and Closers: 0.093 in (2.3 mm) (12 gage). 3. Surface-Mounted Hold-Open Arms and Panic Devices: 0.093 in (2.3 mm) (12 gage).
F. Head Reinforcement: Provide minimum 0.093 in (2.3 mm ) (12 gage) thick, steel channel or angle stiffener for opening widths more than 48 in (1200 mm ).
G. Jamb Anchors:
1. Types: Fabricated of same material as frame:
a. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 in (1.10 mm ) (18 gage) thick. b. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 in (1.10 mm ) (18 gage) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 in (50 mm ) wide by 10 in (250 mm ) long. c. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Countersunk, flat or oval head exposed screws and bolts with expansion shields or inserts, minimum 3/8 in (10 mm ) diameter bolts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
2. Quantity and Location:
a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 in (450 mm ) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 in (800 mm ) on centers and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 in (1500 mm ) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 in (1500 to 2250 mm ) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 in (2250 to 2400 mm ) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 in (600 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 in (2400 mm ) high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 in (1050 mm ) wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.
b. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 in (450 mm ) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 in (800 mm ) on centers and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 in (1500 mm ) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 in (1500 to 2250 mm ) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 in (2250 to 3000 mm ) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 in (600 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 in (3000 mm ) high.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 1113 - 6 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
c. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Locate anchors not more than 6 in (150 mm ) from top and bottom of frame and not more than 26 in (650 mm ) on centers.
H. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames welded to bottom of jambs and mullions with not less than 4 spot welds, not less than 0.0428 in (1.10 mm ) (18 gage) thick, and as follows, terminating bottom of frames at finish floor surface:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2 in (50 mm ) height adjustment.
I. Shipping Spreader Bars: Attach two removable metal spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
J. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped doors, drill holes to receive door silencers furnished under Division 08 Section “Door Hardware”. Keep holes clear during construction.
1. Single-Door Frames: Strike jamb for 3 door silencers. 2. Double-Door Frames: Head jamb for 2 door silencers.
2.7 STEEL FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for cleaning, treating, priming, and when specified, finishing.
B. Finish products specified in this Section after fabrication.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with non-petroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to primer to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
D. Prime Coat Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
E. Field-Applied Coatings: As specified in Division 09 Section “Painting”.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 1113 - 7 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 840. 2. NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors and frames. 3. NFPA 105 for smoke control doors and frames. 4. DHI A115.IG. 5. Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 6. Accepted submittals. 7. Contract Documents.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
B. Pre-Installation Tolerances: Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to following:
1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm ), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm ), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm ), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm ), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.
C. Hardware Preparation: Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated.
1. Setting: Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and welded-in shipping spreader bars. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 1113 - 8 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. b. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors or powder actuated fasteners. 3. In-Place Masonry or Concrete Construction: Secure frames in place with post-installed expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to following:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm ), measured at rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm ), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm ), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm ), measured at jambs at floor.
B. Hollow Metal Doors: Provide insulated doors at exterior and non-insulated at interior locations. Fit accurately in frames, within following clearances:
1. Jambs and Head: 1/8 in (3 mm ) plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm ). 2. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 in (3 mm ) plus or minus 1/16 in (1.5 mm ). 3. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 in (10 mm ). 4. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor Covering or Top of Structure (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 in (19 mm ).
3.5 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Final Adjustments: Remove and replace defective hollow metal work, including work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of primer compatible with paint specified in Division 09 Section “Painting”.
C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed hollow metal work with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Field-Applied Coatings: As specified in Division 09 Section “Painting”.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 1113 - 9 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 1113 - 10 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 08 3113
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Access doors and frames and supplementary items necessary for installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components and attachments to other work. Distinguish between shop and field-assembled work.
C. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.
B. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, provide product by one of manufacturers listed. If not listed, submit as substitution according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Section “Substitution Procedures”.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 3113 - 1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
1. Metal Doors and Frames:
a. Acudor Products, Inc. b. Babcock-Davis. c. Dur-Red Products. d. J. L. Industries, Inc. e. Karp Associates, Inc. f. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. g. Maxam Metal Products, Ltd. h. Milcor Inc. i. Nystrom, Inc. j. Williams Brothers Corporation of America.
B. Basis of Design (Product Standard): Contract Documents are based on products and systems specified to establish a standard of quality. Other manufacturers offering products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and comply with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
2.3 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36 / A 36M.
1. ASTM A 123 / A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153 / A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008 / A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
C. Metallic-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet : ASTM A 653 / A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS) with A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 (Z180) mill-phosphatized zinc coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified thickness according to ASTM A 924 / A 924M.
D. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning", to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning", or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling". 2. Surface Preparation for Metallic-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet : Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
a. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
3. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 3113 - 2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
E. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299 in (0.7 mm) zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.
2.4 STAINLESS-STEEL MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 316. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
1. Finish: Directional No. 4 Satin Finish.
2.5 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Non-rated Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim :
1. Locations:
a. Ceramic tile wall surfaces.
2. Fabricated from one of the following as scheduled at the end of this Section.
a. Stainless-steel sheet.
3. Door: Minimum 0.075 in (1.9 mm) thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame. 4. Frame: Minimum 0.060 in (1.5 mm) thick sheet metal with 1-1/4 in (32 mm) wide, surface-mounted trim. 5. Hinges: Continuous piano. 6. Lock: Key-operated cylinder. 7. Size: 12 in by 12 in (300 mm by 300 mm); unless otherwise indicated. 8. Basis of Design: Nystrom Building Products, Model NT.
B. Non-rated Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames :
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces as scheduled.
a. Gypsum board wall surfaces. b. Plaster wall and ceiling surfaces.
2. Fabricated from one of the following as scheduled at the end of this Section.
a. Steel sheet b. Metallic-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
3. Door: Minimum 0.075 in (1.9 mm) thick sheet metal, set flush with surrounding finish surfaces. 4. Frame: Minimum 0.060 in (1.5 mm) thick sheet metal with drywall bead flange. 5. Hinges: Continuous piano. 6. Lock: Key-operated cylinder. 7. Size: 12 in by 12 in (300 mm by 300 mm); unless otherwise indicated. 8. Basis of Design: Nystrom Building Products, Model NW or NP as applicable.
C. Non-rated Recessed Access Doors and Trimless Frames:
1. Locations:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 3113 - 3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
a. Gypsum board ceiling surfaces. b. Plaster wall and ceiling surfaces.
2. Fabricated from one of the following as scheduled at the end of this Section.
a. Steel sheet b. Metallic-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
3. Door: Minimum 0.060 in (1.5 mm) thick sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed 5/8 in (15 mm) for infill. 4. Frame: Minimum 0.060 in (1.5 mm) thick sheet metal with finishing bead and only frame edge exposed. 5. Hinges: Concealed piano hinge or spring-loaded, concealed-pin type pivoting rod hinge. 6. Lock: Key-operated cylinder with plastic grommet for access through pan recess. 7. Size: 12 in by 12 in (300 mm by 300 mm); unless otherwise indicated. 8. Basis of Design:
a. Gypsum Board Infill : Nystrom Building Products, Model RW.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated.
1. Gypsum Board Locations : For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely attached to perimeter of frames. 2. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal framing. 3. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.
D. Recessed Access Doors : Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.
1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 3113 - 4 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
B. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
3.6 ACCESS DOOR SCHEDULE
A. Provide access doors where indicated on the drawings and as follows:
1. Steel Access Doors:
a. Concealed valves and controls for plumbing and HVAC. b. Fire dampers above non-accessible ceilings. c. Motor operated doors and grilles above non-accessible ceilings.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 3113 - 5 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
2. Stainless Steel Access Doors:
a. Ceramic tile and other damp locations.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 3113 - 6 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 08 7100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Items commercially known as finish or door hardware required for operation of doors, and accessories necessary to complete installation.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each item of door hardware indicated, specified, or required.
1. Including material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, and installation instructions. 2. Index product data sheets according to hardware schedule by use of numbers or letters, or combination.
B. Hardware Set Schedules: Prepared by suppliers AHC detailing fabrications and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate hardware sets with doors, frames, and related Work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of item.
1. Format: Use same numbering shown on Drawings and Schedules.
a. Content: Organize into hardware sets indicating designations of each item required for each door or opening. Include following information:
1) Type, style, function, size, and finish of each item. 2) Manufacturer and product number of each item. 3) Fastenings and other pertinent attachment information. 4) Location of each set cross referenced to room name and number in which door serves. 5) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 6) Mounting locations for hardware. 7) Door and frame sizes and materials.
b. Additional Specific Information: Include type of strike plates; length of spindle, hand, backset and bevel of locks; hand and degree opening for closers; length of kickplates; length of rods for flush bolts; type of door stop; and other functions of mechanisms.
2. Keying Schedule: Submit indicating Owner's instructions for keying of locks.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Written reports for extended cycle testing based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer or other qualified testing facility and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for locksets, exit devices and closers.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 7100 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE
B. Manufacturers Project Acceptance Document: Certification that products are approved, acceptable, or suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or required, and that warranty will be issued.
1.4 CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For inclusion in operation and maintenance manual required by Division 01, submit manufacturer’s instructions for operation and maintenance of installed Work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use. Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier Qualifications:
1. Experience: Architectural door hardware supplier that has record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project. 2. Staff Hardware Expertise: Experienced professional currently certified by DHI as AHC, CDC, and EHC, and experienced in door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to this Project that will be responsible for following activities:
a. Preparation of submittals, including hardware set schedules. b. Available for consultation to Owner, Architect, and Contractor during course of Work. c. Finalizing keying requirements with Owner.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. Experience: Company with not less than 10 years experience in performing specified Work similar to scope of this Project; with a record of successful in-service performance; and sufficient capability, facilities and personnel, to produce required Work. 2. Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project during times specified Work is in progress, and, who is experienced in installing systems similar to type and scope required for Project. 3. Manufacturer Training: Technical representatives of manufacturer of locksets, exit devices and closers shall train Installer’s installation personnel (supervisor and installers), either at Project or at manufacturers facility, on following:
a. Proper installation of products. b. Proper sequence of installation of Work. c. Situations that require special attention or care during installation. d. Situations and conditions that should be avoided. e. Other topics relevant to installation.
C. Keying Conference: Before beginning Work of this Section, conduct conference at Project to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule.
D. Pre-Installation Conference: Before beginning Work of this Section, conduct conference at Project to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 7100 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Special Warranty: Furnish labor and material warranty for following time periods from date of substantial completion agreeing to repair or replace defects, faulty Work and failures, signed by authorized representative using manufacturer’s standard form.
1. Mortise Locksets: 5 years on mechanical components with 2 years on electrical components. 2. Cylindrical Locksets: 5 years on mechanical components with 2 years on electrical components. 3. Overhead Manual Closers: 10 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Contract Documents are based on products specified in PART 3 “Door Hardware Sets” Article below to establish a standard of quality. Other manufacturers with products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and does not change intent of Contract Documents as judged by Architect.
2.2 HARDWARE, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of hardware unit from single manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Hardware units shall not have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire rated labels; manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
C. Base Metals: Hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard.
D. Fasteners: Hardware units manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Concealed Fasteners: Hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is only means of securely attaching hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For following fire rated applications:
a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. c. Closers to doors and frames.
3. Steel Through Bolts: For following fire rated applications unless door blocking is provided:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 7100 - 3 DOOR HARDWARE
a. Surface hinges to doors. b. Closers to doors and frames. c. Surface mounted exit devices.
4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors. 5. Fasteners for Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.2.
E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 2. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 in (1000 mm) or less above sill.
F. Accessibility Requirements: Hardware units and installation shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), ANSI A 117.1, and state and local accessibility standards.
2.3 BUTT HINGES
A. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.1, Grade 1, 2 or 3.
B. Description:
1. Generic Type: Full-mortise, concealed bearings. 2. Weight:
a. Doors with Closers: Heavy anti-friction bearing. b. Doors without Closers: Standard plain bearing.
3. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, hinge pins as follows:
a. Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins (NRP) or safety stud. b. Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Non-removable pins (NRP) or safety stud. c. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. d. Top Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital tip (HT) indicated. e. Bottom Tips: Hole in bottom for easy pin removal.
C. Templates: Except for hinges to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and wood frames, provide only template-produced units.
D. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws with heads to match surface of hinges.
1. Metal Doors and Metal Frames: Machine screws installed into drilled and tapped holes.
E. Basis of Design, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Hager Companies (HAG). 2. Ives Hardware; an Allegion Company (formerly Ingersol Rand) (IVE). 3. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (MCK).
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 7100 - 4 DOOR HARDWARE
4. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Division of The Stanley Works (STH).
2.4 CYLINDERS
A. Conventional and Restricted Lock Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A 156.5, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated.
B. Description: Tumbler type, not less than 6 pins.
2.5 KEYING
A. Keying System: Factory registered incorporating decisions made in keying conference.
1. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.28, Appendix A. 2. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.
2.6 MORTISE LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Product Quality Standards:
1. ANSI/BHMA A 156.13, Grade 1 Operational and Security, except extended cycle performance testing shall be 6 million cycles minimum.
B. Description:
1. Mortise Box Construction:
a. Heavy duty construction with minimum wrought case thickness of not less than 0.093 in (2.3 mm ) thickness . b. 8 in (200 mm ) by 1-1/4 in (32 mm ) front adjustable to 1/8 in (3 mm ) in 2 in (50 mm ). c. 2-3/4 in (69 mm ) backset. d. Minimum 3/4 in (19 mm ) latchbolt throw, or as required for fire rated doors. e. Minimum 1 in (25 mm ) deadbolt throw. f. Split hubs for split spindles. g. Lever handles supported by internal spring. h. Square, split spindles (with all-thread connector), set-screw receiver/retainer notch.
2. Strikes: Metal strike plate with extended lip to protect frame, and with metal or plastic strike box.
a. Single Swing Doors: Minimum lip projection necessary to project from trim. b. Pairs of Doors: With or without astragal, lip projection not beyond face of lock style of inactive leaf.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:
1. Best Access Systems; Division of The Stanley Works (BAS); 45 H Series. 2. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (CR); ML2200 Series. 3. Sargent Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SGT); 8200 Series. 4. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Allegion Company (formerly Ingersol Rand) (SCH); L9000 Series.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 7100 - 5 DOOR HARDWARE
2.7 BORED LOCKSETS AND LATCHES
A. Product Quality Standards: ANSI/BHMA A 156.2, Grade 1, except cycle testing shall be 2 million cycles minimum.
1. NFPA 101 in means of egress. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire rated doors.
B. Description:
1. Bored Box Construction:
a. Interlocking construction between lockbody and latchbolt tube. b. 2-3/4 in (69 mm ) backset. c. 2-1/4 in (56 mm ) by 1 in (25 mm ) front. d. Minimum 1/2 in (12 mm ) latchbolt throw, or as required for fire rated doors. e. Provision to prevent lever from sagging.
2. Strikes: Metal strike plate with metal or plastic strike box with extended lip to protect frame.
a. Single Swing Doors: Minimum lip projection necessary to project from trim. b. Pairs of Doors: With or without astragal, lip projection not beyond face of lock style of inactive leaf.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:
1. Best Access Systems; Division of The Stanley Works (BAS); 9K Series. 2. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (CR); CL3300 Series. 3. Sargent Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SGT); 10 Line Series. 4. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Allegion Company (formerly Ingersol Rand) (SCH); ND Series.
2.8 CLOSERS
A. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.4, Grade 1, except cycle testing shall be 6 million cycles minimum.
B. Description: Manual overhead surface and concealed closers.
C. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use.
D. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible, provide adjustable units complying with accessibility requirements for door opening force and delayed action closing.
E. Surface Closers Acceptable Manufacturer and Model Series:
1. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (CR); DC 8000 Series.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 7100 - 6 DOOR HARDWARE
2. LCN Closers; an Allegion Company (formerly Ingersol Rand) (LCN); 4040 Series. 3. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (RIX); M2020 Series. 4. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SGT); 281 Series. 5. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (CR); DC4600 Series. 6. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH); 8900 Series. 7. Dor-O-Matic; an Allegion Company (formerly Ingersol Rand) (DOR); SC70 Series. 8. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (NOR); 7500/8500 Series. 9. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (RIX); M2220 Series. 10. Sargent Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SGT); 351 Series.
2.9 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Product Quality Standard for Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A 156.16, Grade 1.
B. Product Quality Standard for Overhead Stays: ANSI/BHMA A 156.16, Grade 1.
C. Product Quality Standard for Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A 156.15; coordinate with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm system for fire rated doors.
D. Product Quality Standard for Door Silencers: ANSI/BHMA A 156.16.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE
A. Auxiliary Hardware:
1. Product Quality Standard: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. 2. Basis of Design, Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 3. Available Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies (HAG). b. IVES Hardware; an Allegion Company (formerly Ingersol Rand) (IVE). c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Division of The Stanley Works (STH). e. Trimco (TBM).
B. Silicone Sealant: Exterior non-sag silicone sealant as specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.”
2.11 FINISHES
A. Protection: Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 7100 - 7 DOOR HARDWARE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine doors and frames to receive door hardware and associated Work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting Work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Respective manufacturer written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents. 4. ANSI/DHI A 115.IG.
B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
B. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series.
C. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI A 250.6.
D. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
B. Hardware Installation:
1. Set hardware items level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. 3. Do not install surface-mounted hardware items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 7100 - 8 DOOR HARDWARE
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Manufacturer's qualified technical representative shall periodically inspect Work to ensure installation is proceeding in accordance with manufacturer's designs, recommendations, instructions, and warranty requirements. Representative shall submit written reports of each visit indicating observations, findings, and conclusions of inspection.
1. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: Direct employee of technical services department of manufacturer with experience in providing recommendations, observations, evaluations, and problem diagnostics.
3.6 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Post-Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately 6 months after date of substantial completion, qualified technicians of supplier or installer, accompanied by manufacturers technical representatives of locksets, exit devices, closers, and other hardware manufacturers as required, shall perform following Work:
1. Examine and adjust each item of hardware as necessary to restore proper function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. 2. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faculty design, materials, or installation.
B. Maintenance Service:
1. First Year Maintenance Service: Beginning at date of substantial completion, supplier or installer shall provide 12 months maintenance service by qualified technicians.
a. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper hardware operation. b. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in manufacture and installation of original products.
3.7 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Refer to drawings.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 7100 - 9 DOOR HARDWARE
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
08 7100 - 10 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 09 2900
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Metal framing systems, interior gypsum board faced walls, partitions, and ceiling assemblies, and supplementary items necessary for installation.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms not defined in this Section or in other referenced quality standards.
B. Damage: Stored or installed gypsum board materials shall be classified as defective and nonconforming Work if they have been exposed to wetness or dampness at any time prior to Substantial Completion or if they exhibit evidence of active or dormant mold or mildew.
C. Concentrated Loads: Wall or partition mounted equipment, wall finishes, stone facings, lead lined doors and frames, or ornamentation exceeding 15 lbs/sf uniform load, 75 lb. point load, or 50 lb/ lf lineal load.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements.
B. Preconstruction Test Reports for Acoustical Sealant: Compatibility test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility with sealants; include sealant manufacturer's certification of test results for sealant compatibility and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion and prevent corrosion of substrate.
C. Field Quality Control Reports: Written report of testing and inspection required by "Field Quality Control".
D. Manufacturer’s Project Acceptance Document: Certification by the manufacturer that its product(s) are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or required.
E. Qualification Data:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
1. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 5 years of experience in the successful production and in-service performance of products and systems similar to scope of this Project.
B. Sound (STC) Resistance Rated Assembly Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by independent and testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or respective gypsum board manufacturer’s written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Field Measurements: Where products and systems are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, provide product by one of manufacturers listed. If not listed, submit as substitution according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures".
B. Basis of Design (Product Standard): Contract Documents are based on products and systems specified to establish a standard of quality. Other manufacturers offering products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and comply with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Provide products and systems to withstand loads within limits of allowable working stresses of the materials involved under conditions indicated and without permanent deformation or failure of materials.
B. Design Loads: Provide products and systems to withstand design loads including but not limited to gravity, wind, seismic, and erection design loads established by authorities having jurisdiction, applicable local building codes, and as indicated.
1. Structural Movement: Provide products and systems to withstand movements of structure including, but not limited to, drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. Contractor shall obtain required design data and identify movements accommodated on submittal drawings.
a. Accommodate plus or minus 3/8 in (10 mm) differential vertical deflection of floors.
C. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide products and systems to accommodate dimensional tolerances of framing members and adjacent construction.
2.4 SUSPENDED GRID SYSTEM FOR INTERIOR CEILINGS
A. Suspension System:
1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 645, heavy-duty rating. 2. Description: Manufacturer's standard direct-hung suspended grid system composed of main beams and cross furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network for application of gypsum board. 3. Protective Coating - Standard Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized coating, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Main Beams: Inverted T-shaped profile of single or double mounting flange; minimum 1-1/2 in (38 mm) profile height with top bulb and minimum 1-3/8 in (35 mm) wide knurled mounting flange; factory punched for hanger wire, and to receive cross furring members. 5. Cross Furring Members:
a. Tees: Inverted T-shaped profile of single or double mounting flange; 1-1/2 in (38 mm) profile height with top bulb and minimum 1-3/8 in (35 mm) wide knurled mounting flange; with ends formed for positive interlocking with main beam. b. Channels: Inverted hat shaped profile; minimum 7/8 in (21 mm) profile height and minimum 1-3/8 in (35 mm) wide knurled mounting flange; with ends formed for positive interlocking with main beam.
6. Wall Angle: Angle shaped profile with each leg not less than 1-1/4 in (32 mm) . 7. Curved Members: Where curved ceilings are indicated, members shall be rolled by manufacturer; field fabricated curved members not permitted. 8. Accessories: Specifically designed as an integral part of suspended grid system. 9. Manufacturers and Products:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 3 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
a. Armstrong World Industries Inc.; Drywall Grid System. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 650-C/670-C Fire-Rated Drywall Grid System. c. United States Gypsum Company (USG Interiors, Inc.); Drywall Suspension System.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency.
a. Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete. b. Post-installed chemical anchor. c. Post-installed expansion anchor.
2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, ANSI A 10.3; low velocity, powder-actuated fasteners; drive pins and clip angles fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, an ultimate load capacity not less than 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. Manufacturers:
a. Construction Materials, Inc. b. Heckman Building Products, Inc. c. Hilti Corp. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. Powers Fasteners. f. Simpson Strong Tie Anchor Systems.
C. Wire:
1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM A 641 / A 641M, Class 1, zinc-coated, soft annealed, mild steel wire. 2. Tie Wire Minimum Size: Single 0.0625 in (16 gage) (1.6 mm) diameter strand, or double 0.0475 in (18 gage) (1.2 mm) diameter strands. Preformed furring channel clips are acceptable. 3. Hanger Wire Minimum Size: 0.1620 in (8 gage) (4.12 mm) diameter.
D. Rod Hangers: ASTM A 1008 / A 1008M, 7/32 in (0.56 mm) diameter mild carbon steel rod, with primer painted finish.
E. Flat Hangers: ASTM A 1008 / A 1008M, 1 in by 3/16 in (25 mm by 5 mm) by length indicated or required, with primer painted finish.
F. Angle Hangers: ASTM A 36 / A 36M, rolled steel angle, 2 in by 2 in (50 mm by 50 mm), with primer painted finish.
2.5 METAL FRAMING COMPONENTS
A. Project Framing Analysis: Analyze each framing condition for design loads indicated in performance requirements.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
1. Provide framing products in sizes and thicknesses required to meet or exceed the criteria based on project loads, spans and in-service conditions.
B. Material Quality Standard: Provide components of sizes indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Sheet Steel: ASTM C 645 for metal. 2. Protective Coating - Standard Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized coating, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Metal Studs and Floor Track (Runners):
1. Standard Metal Framing Components for Typical Partitions:
a. Stud Description: C-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel with 1 1/4 in (32 mm) flange edges bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 13/64 in (5 mm) wide minimum return lip; of web depth indicated on Drawings and uncoated base metal thickness indicated in “Metal Framing Schedule” at end of this Section; with web punchouts.
1) Alternative Jamb Stud Members - Contractor’s Option: "Heavy Duty" or "King" studs; C-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel with 3 in (75 mm) flange width; of web depth indicated on Drawings and uncoated base metal thickness indicated in "Metal Framing Schedule" at end of this Section.
b. Track (Runner) Description: U-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel with depth compatible with studs and flange dimension indicated to hold studs by friction; of same web size and uncoated base metal thickness as studs.
1) Floor Track (Runner): 1-1/4in (32 mm) . 2) Top of Wall Track (Runner): 3 in (75 mm) .
2. Metal Framing for Shaftwall Partitions:
a. Stud Description: C-H, double E, C-T, or I-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel; of web depth indicated on Drawings and uncoated base metal thickness indicated in "Metal Framing Schedule" at end of this Section; with web punchouts. b. Track (Runner) and Jamb Description: J-shaped track or jamb members formed from galvanized sheet steel with depth compatible with studs and flange dimension indicated to hold studs by friction; of same web size and uncoated base metal thickness as studs.
3. Optional Equivalent Products - Deformed Metal Studs and Tracks (Runners):
a. Evaluation Criteria: Product test reports and certifications from independent testing agency indicating products comply with requirements and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Material Quality Standard: ASTM A 1003 / A 1003M sheet steel with galvanized coating.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 5 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
c. Stud Description: C-shaped members formed from deformed surface galvanized sheet steel with 1-1/4 in (32 mm) flange edges bent back 90 degrees and bent again to form 3/16 in (5 mm) wide minimum return lip; of web depth indicated on Drawings and uncoated base metal thickness indicated in "Metal Framing Schedule" at end of this Section; with web punchouts. d. Track (Runner) Description: U-shaped members formed from deformed surface galvanized sheet steel with depth compatible with studs and flange dimension indicated to hold studs by friction; of same web size and uncoated base metal thickness as studs. e. Manufacturer and Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems; ProSTUD.
D. Flat Straps and Back-Up Plates: Galvanized sheet steel for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated, of same uncoated base metal thickness as adjacent metal studs.
E. Bridging:
1. Channel: U-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel not less than 0.0566 in (16 gage) (1.44 mm) minimum uncoated base metal thickness, with 1/2 in (12 mm) flanges and depth fitting stud punchouts. 2. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 in by 1-1/2 in (38 mm by 38 mm) L-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel not less than 0.0713 in (14 gage) (1.81 mm) uncoated base metal thickness.
F. Rigid Furring Channels: Hat-shaped members formed from galvanized sheet steel not less than 0.0312 in (20 gage) (0.78 mm) minimum uncoated base metal thickness; 7/8 in (21 mm) depth and minimum 1-3/8 in (35 mm) wide knurled mounting flange.
G. Framing Accessories for Spanning Multiple Floors: Framing manufacturers standard connectors, bracings, brackets, clips, gussets, and other framing devices as required by conditions, formed from galvanized sheet steel complying with requirements of main support system.
H. Manufacturers:
1. Building Products Division of Consolidated Fabricators Corp. 2. California Expanded Metal Products Co. (CEMCO). 3. ClarkDietrich Building Systems 4. Marino Ware; Division of Ware Industries. 5. MBA Metal Framing. 6. Scafco Corp.
2.6 PRE-ENGINEERED METAL FRAMING COMPONENTS
A. Deflection and Firestop Track (Runner):
1. Description: Proprietary track (runner) formed from galvanized sheet steel manufactured to accommodate movement of building structure without transferring stress to partition (to prevent cracking of gypsum board resulting from deflection of building structure above) while maintaining continuity of fire resistance rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 2. Manufacturers:
a. Metal Stud Framing Manufacturer. b. Fire Trak Corp. c. The Steel Network.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 6 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
B. Headers:
1. Description: Proprietary header assembly formed from galvanized sheet steel manufactured to bear partition load above openings without transferring stress to partition (to prevent cracking of gypsum board); in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 2. Manufacturers:
a. Metal Stud Framing Manufacturer. b. Brady Construction Innovations, Inc.
2.7 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A. Sizes: Maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize short edge-to-short edge butt joints and to correspond to support system indicated.
B. Typical Paper-Faced Gypsum Board Products:
1. Paper-Faced Type X Gypsum Board:
a. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1396 / C 1396M, Type X. b. Description: Noncombustible fire resistant gypsum core with paper surfacing on face, back, and long edges; tapered long edges; 5/8 in (15 mm) thick. c. Manufacturers and Products:
1) American Gypsum Company; FireBloc Type X Gypsum Board. 2) CertainTeed Corporation; Type X Gypsum Board. 3) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; ToughRock Fireguard Gypsum Board. 4) National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Fire-Shield Gypsum board. 5) United States Gypsum Company (USG); Sheetrock Firecode Core.
2. Sustainable Paper-Faced Type X Gypsum Board: At Contractor’s option, provide sustainable paper-faced Type X gypsum board or typical paper-faced Type X gypsum board.
a. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1396 / C 1396M, Type X. b. Description: Noncombustible fire resistant gypsum core with paper surfacing on face, back, and long edges; tapered long edges; 5/8 in (15 mm) thick. UL Type Designation “ULIX”.
1) ISO 14040 Environmental Management, Life Cycle Assessment, Principles and Framework:
a) Carbon emissions per Gypsum Association; Industry Standard Type III EPD for North American Type X wallboard with a manufacturing Global Warming Potential of 317.4 kg CO2-eq./1000MSF. b) Water reduction per Gypsum Association; Industry Standard Type III EPD for North American Type X wallboard having net use of fresh water value of 1.329 m3/1000 ft2. c) Primary Energy from non-renewable resources per Gypsum Association; Industry Standard Type III EPD for North American Type X wallboard have a value of 5,291 MJ/1000 ft2.
c. Basis of Design:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 7 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
1) United States Gypsum Company, LLC, USG Sheetrock Brand EcoSmart Panels Firecode X.
C. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board Products:
1. Moisture-Resistant Paper-Faced Gypsum Board:
a. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1396 / C 1396M, Type X. b. Description: Enhanced moisture-resistant, noncombustible gypsum core, with moisture-resistant paper surfacing on face, back and long edges; tapered long edges; score of 10 according to ASTM D 3273; 5/8 in (15 mm) thick. c. Manufacturers and Products:
1) American Gypsum Company; M-Bloc Mold and Moisture Resistant Type X Gypsum Board. 2) CertainTeed Corporation; M2Tech Moisture and Mold Resistant Type X Gypsum Board. 3) National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond XP Gypsum Board. 4) United States Gypsum Company (USG); Sheetrock Mold Tough Firecode Gypsum Board.
2. Moisture-Resistant Paperless Glass-Mat Gypsum Board:
a. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1658 / C 1658M. b. Description: Enhanced moisture-resistant, noncombustible gypsum core with inorganic, embedded fiberglass mat on both faces; square edges; score or 10 according to ASTM D 3273; 5/8 in (15 mm) thick. c. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensArmor Plus Fireguard Interior Guard. 2) National Gypsum Company; eXP Interior Extreme Gypsum Panels.
3. Moisture-Resistant Coated Glass-Mat Gypsum Board Products:
a. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1178 / C 1178M. b. Description: Enhanced moisture-resistant, noncombustible, gypsum core with inorganic, embedded fiberglass mat on both sides; outside face coated with heat-cured copolymer water-resistant coating; square edges; score or 10 according to ASTM D 3273; 5/8 in (15 mm) thick. c. Manufacturers and Products:
1) CertainTeed Corporation; Diamondback Tile Backer. 2) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer. 3) National Gypsum Company; eXP Tile Backer.
2.8 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Typical Drywall Trim Accessories:
1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1047. 2. Description: Trim profile fabricated of galvanized steel sheet; of size suitable for gypsum board thickness; with recessed, perforated flange formed to receive joint compound. 3. Trim Products:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 8 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
a. Cornerbead:
1) Purpose: For protecting outside (external) corners. 2) Basis of Design: United States Gypsum Company (USG); Dur-A-Bead Corner Bead, 103.
b. Optional Equivalent Products – Structural Laminate Cornerbead System: At Contractor’s option, provide high strength tapered co-polymer core cornerbead with tight fibered paperboard facing and joint tape paper backing.
1) Purpose: For protecting outside (external) corners. 2) Basis of Design: Structus Building Technologies; No-Coat Structural Laminate Drywall Corner System.
c. LC-Bead (J-Bead):
1) Purpose: For protecting exposed edges of gypsum board where back flange can be used. 2) Basis of Design: United States Gypsum Company (USG); J-Trim, 200-A.
d. L-Bead:
1) Purpose: For protecting exposed edges of gypsum board where back flange cannot be used. 2) Basis of Design: United States Gypsum Company (USG); L-Trim, 200-B.
e. J-Stop:
1) Purpose: For protecting edges of gypsum board that does not require finishing. 2) Basis of Design: United States Gypsum Company (USG); J-Stop, 402.
f. Control Joint:
1) Description: One-piece trim formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening. 2) Purpose: For conditions requiring expansion and contraction stresses of large areas of gypsum board to be relieved. 3) Basis of Design: United States Gypsum Company (USG); Control Joint, 093.
g. Other Trim or Special Shapes: Products as required by condition.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Dietrich Industries, Inc.; Unimast. b. Fry Reglet Architectural Metals. c. Marino Ware; Division of Ware Industries. d. Niles Building Products Co. e. Superior Metal Trim; Division of Delta Star, Inc. f. United States Gypsum Company (USG).
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 9 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2.9 FASTENERS
A. Limitations: Nails and staples are not permitted.
B. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Framing to Concrete Structure:
1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency.
a. Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete. b. Post-installed chemical anchor. c. Post-installed expansion anchor.
2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, ANSI A 10.3; low velocity, powder-actuated fasteners; drive pins and clip angles fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, an ultimate load capacity not less than 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. Manufacturers:
a. Construction Materials, Inc. b. Heckman Building Products, Inc. c. Hilti Corp. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. Powers Fasteners. f. Simpson Strong Tie Anchor Systems.
C. Metal Framing Screws: Screw fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten metal framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated.
D. Gypsum Board Screws:
1. Material Quality Standards:
a. Metal Framing Members less than 0.03 in (0.75 mm) Thick: ASTM C 1002, Type S. b. Metal Framing Members from 0.033 in to 0.112 in (0.79 mm to 2.9 mm) Thick: ASTM C 954, Type S-12.
2. Product Description - Standard Applications: Bugle head, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel screws with Phillips-head recess of size, holding power, and other properties recommended by respective gypsum board manufacturer; minimum 1 in (25 mm) long; with corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
E. Miscellaneous Fasteners: For conditions not indicated, fasteners shall be type, finish, size, and holding power recommended by respective gypsum board manufacturer and conditions.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 10 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2.10 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 475 / C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Paper Tape: Nominal 2 in (50 mm) wide cross-fibered paper tape with finish suitable for bonding, creased in center for easy folding, and compatible with joint compound. 2. Mesh Tape: Nominal 2 in (50 mm) wide self-adhering 10-by-10 fiberglass mesh tape.
C. Joint Compound:
1. Setting-Type: Job-mixed powder for mixing with water, chemical-hardening compound; includes taping types. 2. Drying-Type: Ready-mixed or job-mixed powder for mixing with water, air-drying, vinyl based compounds; includes taping, topping, and all-purpose types.
2.11 RELATED MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced quality standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.
B. Firestopping Products at Penetrations: As specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping".
C. Fiberglass Sound Attenuation Blankets:
1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 665, Type I. 2. Description: Unfaced blankets produced by bonding inorganic glass fibers with a thermosetting binder; free of formaldehyde. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: According to ASTM E 84/NFPA 255/UL 723:
a. Flame Spread: Class A - no greater than 25. b. Smoke Developed: No greater than 50.
4. Thickness: Not less than 2-1/2 in (62 mm) , unless otherwise indicated.
5. Basis of Design: Johns Manville; Sound Control Batts, Formaldehyde Free.
D. Mineral Wool Sound Attenuation Blankets:
1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 665, Type I. 2. Description: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of rock or slag with thermosetting resins. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: According to ASTM E 84/NFPA 255/UL 723:
a. Flame Spread: Class A - no greater than 25. b. Smoke Developed: No greater than 50.
4. Thickness: Not less than 3 in (75 mm) , unless otherwise indicated. 5. Density: Not less than nominal 2.5 pounds per cubic foot. 6. Manufacturers:
a. Fibrex Insulations, Inc.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
b. Rock Wool Manufacturing Co. c. Roxul. d. Thermafiber LLC.
E. Acoustical Sealant for Non-Fire Resistance Rated Joints:
1. Description: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining sealant complying with ASTM C 834 or ASTM C 920. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90 or other acceptable test method.
a. Preconstruction Compatibility Testing: Test sealant for compatibility with copper substrates. Testing will not be required if data submitted on previous testing of current sealant products matches those submitted. b. Do not use acrylic, neoprene, and nitrile based sealants that are not recommended for use with copper substrates.
F. Sealants: Sealant as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Respective Manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents. 4. Gypsum Association GA 216. 5. United States Gypsum Company (USG); Gypsum Construction Handbook, if no other installation quality standard applies to condition.
B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 12 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
B. Suspended Gypsum Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hanger wires at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Resistance Rated Partitions: Construct fire resistance rated, smoke resistance rated, and sound resistance rated partitions according to respective assembly test reports. Ensure every material used within an assembly shall comply with manufacturers listed and product qualities indicated in respective assembly test report.
C. Penetrations and Openings: Construct within gypsum board assemblies work as required to properly form penetration or opening to receive firestopping materials specified in following Sections:
1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping". 2. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Firestopping".
D. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect and according to the following:
1. Spaced not more than 30 feet in either direction for uninterrupted straight planes of ceilings and walls. 2. Where different substrates occur at ceilings and walls. 3. Where control joints occur in substrates at ceilings and walls. 4. Where L, U, or T shaped ceiling configurations are joined. 5. At less-than-ceiling-height cased opening frames and gypsum board openings over 60 inches in width; extend control joints from both corners at top of frame or opening up to ceiling. 6. Where less-than-ceiling-height door frames occur on walls more than 30 feet in length; extend control joints from top of frame up to ceiling at corner of hinge side of door 7. Where less-than-ceiling-height borrowed lites occur on walls more than 30 feet in length; extend control joints from top of frame up to ceiling and from bottom of frame to floor at both corners.
E. Isolation from Building Structure: Isolate gypsum board assemblies from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
1. Provide isolation joints as indicated or required by installation quality standards. 2. Isolate ceiling assemblies abutting or penetrated by building structure. 3. Isolate partition framing and wall furring abutting or penetrated by building structure, except at floor.
F. Supplemental Accessories: Install supplementary framing, blocking, reinforcing, and bracing in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, hand rails, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and recommendations of installation quality standards or manufacturer.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 13 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENDED GRID SYSTEM FOR INTERIOR CEILINGS
A. Installation Quality Standard: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform suspended ceiling work according to following, unless otherwise specified in this Section:
1. ASTM C 636 / C 636M. 2. CISCA - "Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Ceilings - Seismic Zones 3 - 4", except as may be modified by building code.
B. Pattern: Lay out spaces and arrange suspension system in a regular pattern, parallel or perpendicular to surrounding walls.
C. Hangers for Ceiling System: Suspend hangers from building structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with mechanical and electrical equipment, insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural frame or ceiling suspension system. Within limitations allowed by installation quality standards, splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers required to support suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by installation quality standards. 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Secure the appropriate hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Install metal framing components for suspended ceilings so that members are level to within 1/8 in in 12 ft (3 mm in 3.6 m) as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. 6. Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Do not connect or suspend any ceiling components from ducts, pipes or conduit.
D. Perimeters: Using gypsum board screws through gypsum board into metal studs, attach perimeter wall angle where suspended grid system meets vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated; cut main beams and cross furring members to fit into wall angle.
E. Main Beams:
1. Suspend main beams spaced 48 in (1200 mm) on center from structure with wire hangers spaced not greater than 48 in (1200 mm) on center. 2. Install main beams level within 1/8 in in 12 ft (3 mm in 3.6 m) with hanger wire taut and tightly wrapped to prevent vertical movement or rotation. 3. Do not make local kinks or bends in hanger wires as a means of leveling.
F. Cross Furring Members:
1. Install cross furring members at right angles to main beams, spaced as required and join to main beams with positive interlock.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 14 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2. Install cross furring members to within 1/32 in (0.8 mm) of their required location and within 0.015 in (0.38 mm) of same horizontal plane as main beam, and never below continuous member. 3. Install additional cross furring members at right angles to beams and cross furring members to support ends of recessed light fixtures, diffusers or grilles.
G. Seismic Conditions: Install bracing wires, compression struts, and other components as required by installation quality standard.
3.6 INSTALLING METAL FRAMING COMPONENTS
A. Priority: Assemble various assemblies giving priority to partitions with higher rating; extend partition with higher rating intact through partition with lower rating.
B. Joinery and Connections: Install various metal framing components according to details indicated; for situations and conditions not indicated, comply with installation quality standards and with respective manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. General Requirements: Construct partition framing of studs, tracks, and headers using screws of number and spacing required.
1. Install studs of uncoated base metal thickness as determined by Metal Framing Schedule at end of this Section. 2. Extend partition framing full height to underside of structure above, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at, or immediately above, suspended ceilings. 3. Continue framing over door frames and openings to provide support for gypsum board. 4. Space studs as indicated on Metal Framing Schedule at end of this section. 5. Cut studs 1 in (25 mm) short of full height to provide deflection relief at head of wall conditions. 6. Install studs so that flanges point in same direction. 7. Attach with screws through each stud flange and track (runner) flange, except top deflection track assemblies. 8. For fire resistance rated, smoke resistance rated, and sound resistance rated assemblies that are required to extend to underside of structure above to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor slabs or roof decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and make partitions continuous from floor to underside of structure above. 9. Do not lap studs. 10. At intersections and corners, locate studs no more than 2 in (50 mm) from partition intersections and corners and secure with screws through both flanges of studs and tracks.
D. Metal Track (Runner) Requirements:
1. Floors: Install tracks (runners) using appropriate fasteners spaced not more than 16 in (400 mm) on centers. 2. Head of Wall: Where indicated, install proprietary deflection and firestop track (runner) using appropriate fasteners for the substrate and installation conditions.
E. Support for Wall Mounted Accessories or Equipment: Install back-up plate or track (runner) turned on its side, using screws as indicated or as required, to studs to properly transfer accessory or equipment load to metal framing.
F. Openings: Frame single door, double door, above ceiling openings, and below ceiling openings using studs, tracks (runners), clip angles, and headers.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 15 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
1. Install 2 studs on each side of each opening in configuration indicated, including strap plates; extend from floor to underside of structure above; do not cut these studs under any circumstances. Include sound attenuation blankets within cavity when partition is scheduled to have a sound resistance rating. 2. Construct header of appropriate configuration for type of opening to be spanned and secure with clip angles; include sound attenuation blankets within cavity when partition is scheduled to have a sound resistance rating. 3. Install short intermediate studs 16 in (400 mm) on center between top track and header. 4. At partitions indicated to terminate immediately above ceiling, install diagonal bracing at not less than spacing as indicated.
G. Supplementary Framing: Install around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by metal framing.
H. Penetrations: Maintain fire-resistance rating of assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.
I. Chase Partitions:
1. Position double row of studs vertically in tracks (runners), opposite each other in pairs with flanges pointing in same direction. 2. Attach with screws through each stud flange and track (runner) flange. 3. Cross brace between rows of studs with one of following at 48 in (1200 mm) on center maximum vertically, attached to stud webs with screws:
a. Coated glass-mat gypsum board, 12 in (300 mm) high by chase width. b. Metal studs turned on side, webs back-to-back.
J. Furred Walls:
1. Erect furring channels vertically, spaced 16 in (400 mm) on centers maximum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Attach with appropriate fasteners, staggered on flanges. 3. Splice ends by nesting channels 8 in (200 mm) and securely anchoring to surface. 4. Miter 24 in (600 mm) long horizontal furring channels at corners and space 24 in (600 mm) on centers vertically. 5. Locate furring channels around perimeter of openings and secure to surfaces.
K. Control Joints:
1. Construct metal framing as indicated by installation quality standard to allow gypsum board control joints to function as intended. 2. For control joints located in fire resistance rated walls and partitions, construct of metal studs and mineral wool, full height of partition, according to assembly fire test reports.
L. Metal Framing Spanning Multiple Floors: Construct metal framing as required using longest length metal studs possible and attach to building structure with floor bypass clips.
M. Installation Tolerances: Install each metal stud metal framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 in (3 mm) from plane formed by faces of framing members.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
3.7 INSTALLING GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A. General Requirements:
1. Install type of gypsum board at location indicated by gypsum board schedule at end of this Section. 2. Do not install damaged gypsum boards. 3. Install gypsum boards with finishable face side out. 4. Butt gypsum boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 in (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. 5. Do not force gypsum boards into place. 6. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. 7. Locate panel joints so that no joint will align with the edge of an opening unless control joints are installed at these locations.
B. Isolation from Building Structure:
1. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments or surfaces where movement is anticipated. Provide 1/4 in to 1/2 in (6 mm in 12 mm) wide spaces at these locations or as indicated below:
a. At top of wall or where partitions intersect open building structure members projecting below underside of floor slabs and roof decks, cut to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, beams, and other structural members; form proper annular joint to receive firestopping at rated partitions and form 3/4 in (20 mm) joint at top of wall at non-rated partitions.
2. Trim edges with edge trim where edges of gypsum boards are exposed. 3. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with firestopping at rated locations and acoustical sealant at non-rated locations.
C. Single-Layer Board Assemblies:
1. At typical conditions, install gypsum board vertically (long dimension parallel to metal framing), to minimize short end-to-short end joints unless otherwise indicated or required by assembly fire test reports. 2. At interior of stairwells and other high walls, install gypsum boards horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by assembly fire test reports. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of gypsum boards.
D. Multi-Layer Board Assemblies: Apply base layers and face layers vertically (long dimension parallel to metal framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face layer joints offset at least one stud space from base layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by assembly fire test reports. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
E. Ceiling Applications:
1. Apply gypsum board at right angles to main beams of suspension framing to minimize number of abutting end joints and avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. 2. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. 3. Locate both edge or end joints of gypsum boards over intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking where metal framing is not present.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 17 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
F. Typical Wall Applications:
1. Attach gypsum boards to metal studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. 2. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. 4. Attach gypsum boards to framing provided at doors, openings and cutouts. Install gypsum boards over door heads and extend to not less than one stud space - 16 in (400 mm) at each side of door or opening. 5. Cover both faces of metal framing with gypsum boards as indicated, except in chase walls that are braced internally. 6. Cut and fit gypsum boards around ducts, pipes, conduits, and other penetrations to form proper annular joint to receive firestopping at rated partitions.
a. At non-rated partitions, annual space around ducts, pipes, conduit or other penetrations to be properly sized to receive sealant; 3/4 in (20 mm) maximum. b. “Blow–out” patches are not allowed.
7. Support both edge and end joints of gypsum boards over metal framing.
G. Screw Attachments:
1. Attach gypsum board to metal framing with screw fasteners of type appropriate for gypsum board materials and installation conditions:
a. Length shall be as required by condition and penetrating metal framing not less than 3/8 in (10 mm) . b. Spacing shall be as recommended by installation quality standard, gypsum board manufacturer, or respective assembly test report. c. Use properly adjusted, positive-clutch electric power tool equipped with adjustable screw-depth head and a Phillips bit. Nails and staples are not permitted.
2. Drive screws to slightly dimple surface without breaking face paper, fracturing core, or stripping metal framing member around screw shank. 3. Space screws for non-fire resistance rated partitions and ceilings as recommended by installation quality standards. 4. Space screws for fire resistance rated partitions as required by assembly fire test reports. 5. Start field screwing near center and work towards edges. 6. Space screws not less than 3/8 in (10 mm) from gypsum boards edges. 7. Do not attach gypsum boards to top runner where wall or partition extends to building structure unless required by fire test reports.
H. Control Joints: Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated with required space between edges of adjoining gypsum boards.
I. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Install blankets within stud cavities set so that they are held in place by friction with metal studs; ensure blankets are secure within cavity and will not become displaced when second gypsum board side is closed.
J. Sealant:
1. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturers written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 18 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2. Seal wall assemblies at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of sealant material according to following:
a. Fire Resistance Sealant: Joints within fire resistance rated assemblies. b. Water Resistance Sealant: Joints within non-fire resistance rated assemblies exposed to possible water infiltration. c. Acoustical Sealant: All other joints.
3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: Fasten trim accessories continuously according to accessory manufacturer's instructions using gypsum board screws; installation by clinch-on tool and staples not permitted.
B. Interior Trim Accessories: Install in the following locations:
1. Corner Beads: Install trim at external corners; use screws at each flange at 9 in (225 mm) on centers, opposite each other. 2. Edge Trim: Install trim where gypsum boards abut dissimilar material, and where edge of gypsum boards would otherwise be exposed; use screws at flange at 9 in (225 mm) on centers.
a. LC-Bead (J-Bead): Install trim at exposed conditions where back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate before gypsum board installation. b. L-Bead: Install trim at exposed conditions where trim can only be installed after gypsum board installation. c. J-Stop: Install trim at concealed conditions where trim can only be installed after gypsum board installation.
3. Control Joints: Install trim at appropriate locations, ensuring gypsum board is not continuous over joint; use screws at each flange at 6 in (150 mm) on centers.
a. Control joints to extend 4 in (100 mm) above finished ceiling at non-rated conditions and extend to structure at rated wall conditions.
C. Accent Trim Accessories: Install at locations indicated, mitering corners and intersections to form tight, flush and uniform joints; use screws at each flange at 9 in (225 mm) on centers.
3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A. General: Treat board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare surfaces for decoration.
B. Joint Tape: Finish joints according to following:
1. Typical Paper-Faced Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Moisture-Resistant Paper-Faced Gypsum Board: Mesh tape.
C. Finishing: Finish boards and units to achieve specified level of finish as indicated in schedule at end of Section:
1. Typical Paper-Faced Gypsum Board: Either or combination of the following as recommended by manufacturer:
a. Setting-type joint compounds.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 19 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
b. Drying-type joint compounds.
2. Moisture-Resistant Paper-Faced Gypsum Board: Setting-type joint compounds.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Manufacturer's qualified technical representative shall periodically inspect Work to ensure installation is proceeding in accordance with manufacturer's designs, recommendations, instructions, and warranty requirements. Representative shall submit written reports of each visit indicating observations, findings, and conclusions of inspection.
1. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: Direct employee of technical services department of manufacturer with experience in providing recommendations, observations, evaluations, and problem diagnostics
3.11 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Damaged Materials: Stored or installed gypsum board materials shall be classified as damaged, defective, and nonconforming Work if they have been exposed to wetness or dampness at any time prior to Substantial Completion or if they exhibit evidence of active or dormant mold or mildew. Damaged materials and assemblies shall be replaced with new and dry materials and assemblies.
3.12 PROTECTION
A. Procedures: Protect products and systems from damage during installation and remainder of construction period according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.13 METAL FRAMING SCHEDULE
A. Metal Stud Framing Schedule:
1. Stud Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Spacing: Maximum 16 in (400 mm) on centers, unless otherwise indicated, or as required to comply with respective assembly test report. 3. Minimum Performance Requirements - unless otherwise indicated:
a. Typical Partitions: L/240 at 5 lb/sq ft (239 Pa) lateral load. b. Partitions with Tile Facing: L/360 at 7.5 lb/sq ft (359 Pa) lateral load. c. Partitions supporting all other Concentrated Loads: Provide delegated engineering to comply with L/360 at 10 lb/sq ft (479 Pa) lateral load
4. Minimum Uncoated Base Metal Thickness:
a. Typical Gypsum Board Assemblies: As determined by manufacturer’s limiting height engineering data unless otherwise indicated.
1) 25 Gage or 25 Gage Equivalent Studs: Not acceptable. 2) 22 Gage Studs: Typical partitions unless otherwise indicated. 3) 20 Gage or 20 Gage Equivalent Studs:
a) Partitions supporting ceramic or stone tile. b) Partitions with gypsum board on one side only.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 20 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
c) At door jambs. d) Partitions supporting wall hung cabinets or shelving.
b. Gypsum Board Assemblies required to Withstand Seismic Loads: As required by delegated engineering professional but not less than minimum uncoated base metal thickness indicated above.
3.14 GYPSUM BOARD SCHEDULE
A. Gypsum Board Schedule, General: Install the designated gypsum board product based on exposure classification to water and / or moisture and applied finish system as follows, unless otherwise indicated or scheduled on the Drawings.
B. No Exposure: Surfaces not normally exposed to water and / or moisture sources including but not limited to the following:
1. Typical walls and ceilings.
a. Paint and Wall Coverings Only: Typical paper-faced gypsum board. b. Tile and Adhered Sheet/Panel Coverings: Moisture-resistant coated-glass-mat gypsum board.
C. Incidental Exposure: Surfaces immediately adjacent to water and / or moisture sources including, but not limited to, the following locations:
1. Walls and ceilings in mechanical equipment rooms and janitor closets. 2. Walls within 24 inches of centerline of drinking fountains, isolated wall-hung lavatories, and countertop sinks and other similar water sources. 3. Interior face of exterior walls. 4. Acceptable gypsum board products for the above listed conditions:
a. Paint and Wall Coverings: Moisture-resistant paper-faced or moisture-resistant paperless glass-mat gypsum board. b. Tile and Adhered Sheet/Panel Coverings: Moisture-resistant coated-glass-mat gypsum board.
5. Top of walls above ceilings adjacent to mechanical equipment in corridors.
a. Moisture-resistant paperless glass-mat gypsum board.
D. Direct Exposure: Surfaces normally soaked, saturated, or regularly and frequently exposed to water and / or moisture including, but not limited to, the following locations:
1. Walls and ceilings in toilet rooms and bathrooms including bathtubs and showers:
a. Paint and Wall Coverings: Moisture-resistant paper-faced or moisture-resistant paperless glass-mat gypsum board. b. Tile and Adhered Sheet/Panel Coverings: Moisture-resistant coated-glass-mat gypsum board.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 21 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
3.15 GYPSUM BOARD FINISHING SCHEDULE
A. Gypsum Board Finishing Schedule, General: Finish panels to Levels of Finish indicated below. Apply joint tape over panel joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. Sand between coats and after last coat to produce a surface free of defects and ready for applied finish system.
1. Levels of Finish: According to ASTM C 840.
B. Preparation: Apply joint compound at open joints, panel edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Level 1: At following locations, embed tape at joints in joint compound unless a higher level of finish is required for fire resistance rated assemblies. Trim accessories to be installed but not embedded in joint compound unless required for fire rating:
1. Ceiling plenum areas above ceilings. 2. Concealed areas.
D. Level 2: At following locations, embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges:
1. Substrate for tiling.
E. Level 3: At following locations, embed tape and apply separate first and second coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges:
1. Mechanical, electrical, data and elevator equipment rooms.
F. Level 4: At following locations, embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges:
1. Areas to receive paint.
G. Level 5: At following locations, embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound or Level 5 Primer and Surfacer over entire surface:
1. Not used.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 2900 - 22 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 09 3000
TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Modular tiles, membrane underlayments, setting materials, grouting materials, accessories, and supplementary items necessary for installation.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.
B. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
C. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
D. Ceramic (Mosaic) Tile: Tile formed by either the dust-pressed or plastic method, usually 1/4 in to 3/8 in (6 mm to 10 mm) thick, and having a facial area of less than 6 sq in (3900 mm²) . Ceramic mosaic tile may be of either porcelain or natural clay composition and they may be either plain or with an abrasive mixture throughout.
E. Paver Tile: Glazed or unglazed porcelain or natural clay tile formed by dust-pressed method having a facial area of 6 sq in (3900 mm²) or more.
F. Porcelain Tile: A ceramic tile or paver tile that is generally made by the dust-pressed method of a composition resulting in a tile that is dense, impervious, fine grained, and smooth with sharply formed face.
G. Wall Tile: A glazed tile with a body that is suitable for interior use and which is usually non-vitreous and is not required nor expected to withstand excessive impact or be subject to freezing and thawing conditions.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components and attachments to other work. Distinguish between shop and field- assembled work.
1. Include plans of rooms and elevations of walls showing tile and patterns; include sections showing underlayments, setting materials, and grouting materials. 2. Include details showing widths and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 1 TILING
C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit samples for each item listed below of size and construction indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
1. Tile: Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required, at least 12 in (300 mm) square, mounted on rigid panel, and with grouted joints using product complying with specified requirements and in color approved for completed work. 2. Tile Trim and Accessories: Full-size units of each type and for each color required. 3. Metal Edge Strips: 6 in (150 mm) lengths of specified profile.
D. List of Materials for Layered Mock-Up for Construction Quality Purposes:
1. Product, material, and equipment names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information required to identify items used. 2. Receipt of list does not constitute acceptance of deviations from Contract Documents, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing.
E. Master Grade Certificates: Submit for each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and installer.
F. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements.
G. Field Quality Control Reports: Written report of testing and inspection required by “Field Quality Control”.
H. Manufacturer’s Project Acceptance Document: Certification by the manufacturer that its product(s) are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or required, and that a warranty will be issued.
I. Qualification Data: For installer.
1. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
J. Maintenance Instructions: Include in operation and maintenance manual required by Division 01 Section “Closeout Requirements”. Submit manufacturer’s instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use. Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance.
K. Warranty: Sample of warranty.
1. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty covering materials and installation (labor) stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Experience: Installer with not less than 5 years experience in performing specified Work similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 2 TILING
2. Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project site during times specified Work is in progress that is experienced in installing systems similar to type and scope required for Project. 3. Manufacturer Acceptance: Installer shall be certified, approved, licensed, or acceptable to manufacturer to install products.
B. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative Qualifications: Direct employee of technical services department of manufacturer with minimum of 5 years experience in providing recommendations, observations, evaluations, and problem diagnostics. Sales representatives are not acceptable.
C. Mock-ups: Prior to fabrication and installation, build mock-up for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mock-up to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mock-up in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Contractor shall provide structural support framework.
a. Show typical components, attachments to building structure, and requirements of installation. b. Build mock-ups in a layered fashion omitting tile in particular areas to reveal underlayment membranes and setting bed installation including but not limited to the following:
1) Tiled floor conditions at thin-set setting beds. 2) Tiled floor conditions at medium-set setting beds. 3) Tiled floor conditions at thick-set setting beds. 4) Movement joints at tiled floor conditions. 5) Tiled shower stall including three walls, floor, curb, and threshold. 6) Tiled wall conditions, including one interior corner.
2. Clean exposed faces of mock-up. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when mock-up will be installed. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Protect accepted mock-up from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 6. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before starting fabrication. 7. Maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for review of the completed Work. 8. Acceptance of mock-ups does not constitute acceptance of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mock-ups unless such deviations are specifically noted by Contractor, submitted to Architect in writing, and accepted by Architect in writing. 9. Demolish and remove mock-ups when directed by Architect unless accepted to become part of the completed Work.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 3 TILING
1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.
1. Required Attendees:
a. Owner. b. Architect. c. Contractor, including superintendent. d. Installer, including project manager and supervisor. e. Manufacturer’s qualified Technical Representative. f. Installers of other construction interfaced with Work.
2. Minimum Agenda: Installer shall demonstrate understanding of the Work required by describing detailed procedures for preparing, installing, and cleaning the Work. Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, following topics:
a. Tour representative areas of Work, inspect and discuss condition of substrate, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. b. Review Work requirements (Drawings, Specifications, and other Contract Documents). c. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. d. Review and finalize construction schedule related to Work and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. e. Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting procedures. f. Review environmental conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. g. Resolve deviations or differences between Contract Documents and the manufacturer’s specifications.
3. Contractor shall record discussions of conference, including decisions and agreements reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. If substantial disagreements exist at conclusion of conference, determine how disagreements will be resolved and set date for reconvening conference.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.
D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 4 TILING
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Install tile only when construction in room is completed and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer’s written instructions.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Installer’s Warranty: Furnish installer’s written workmanship warranty signed by an authorized representative using installer’s standard form agreeing to provide labor required to repair or replace work which exhibits workmanship defects. “Defects” is defined to include but not limited to deterioration or failure to perform as required.
1. Warranty Period: Installer shall warrant the installation to be free from workmanship Defects for a period of 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Furnish the following extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents:
1. Furnish quantity of full-size tile and trim units equal to 2 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size. 2. Furnish quantity of grout equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, provide product by one of manufacturers listed. If not listed, submit as substitution according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Section “Substitution Procedures”.
B. Basis of Design (Product Standard): Contract Documents are based on products and systems specified to establish a standard of quality. Other available manufacturers offering products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and comply with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect.
1. Selections: As indicated in Interior Design Selections.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 5 TILING
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
1. Tile: For each tile, obtain of same color, finish, composition, and type, from same source and production run. 2. Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of uniform quality for each mortar and grout component from single manufacturer.
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Accessibility Requirements for Floor Tile:
1. Standards: Products and installation shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), ANSI A117.1, and state and local accessibility standards. 2. Floor Tile Slip Resistance: Products and installation shall result in a static coefficient of friction according to ASTM C 1028, without use of abrasive grain, as follows:
a. Level Floor Surface: Minimum 0.6. b. Ramps: Minimum 0.8. c. Steps: Minimum 0.6.
2.4 CERAMIC TILE PRODUCTS
A. Material Quality Standard: ANSI A137.1 “Specifications for Ceramic Tiling” for types, compositions, and grades of tiling indicated.
1. Furnish tiling complying with “Standard Grade” requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Ceramic Tile, General: Thin ceramic surfacing unit made from clay, porcelain, or mixture of ceramic materials, glazed or unglazed, fired above red heat to temperature sufficient to produce specific physical properties and characteristics specified.
C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, blend tile in factory and package so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples.
D. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is used, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer. Where tile is intended for installation in wet exposure areas, do not use factory mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer states that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated.
2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENTS FOR INTERIOR APPLICATIONS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use as shower pan waterproofing, as selected from one of the following available options. Include primer, pre-fabricated corners, seaming cement, detail tape, sealant, and other standard accessory products required for application provided by membrane manufacturer.
B. Unfaced Plastic Waterproof Membrane Underlayments:
1. Unfaced Chlorinated-Polyethylene (CPE):
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 6 TILING
a. Description: ASTM D 4068, non-plasticized, chlorinated polyethylene; minimum 0.040 in (1.0 mm ) nominal thickness. b. Manufacturer and Product: The Noble Company; Chloraloy.
2. Unfaced Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC):
a. Description: ASTM D 4551, flexible polyvinyl chloride sheet; minimum 0.040 in (1.0 mm ) nominal thickness. b. Manufacturer and Product: Compotite Corporation; Composeal Blue Vinyl 40.
3. Locations: Thick-set shower pan installations.
C. Faced Plastic Waterproof Membrane Underlayments:
1. Faced Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE):
a. Description: Non-plasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with high- strength, nonwoven polyester fabric; minimum 0.030 in (0.75 mm ) nominal thickness. b. Manufacturers and Products:
1) The Noble Company; Nobleseal TS. 2) Laticrete; Hydro Ban Sheet Membrane.
2. Faced Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC):
a. Description: ASTM D 4551, multiple layers of polyvinyl chloride sheet heat-fused together and to facings of bondable nonwoven polyester; minimum 0.040 in (1.0 mm ) nominal thickness. b. Manufacturer and Product: Compotite Corporation; Composeal Gold.
3. Locations: Thin-set installations at floors, walls, and ceiling; including thin-set shower pan floor installations.
2.6 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENTS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 as selected from one of the following available options. Include primer, pre-fabricated corners, seaming cement, detail tape, sealant, and other standard accessory products required for application provided by membrane manufacturer.
B. Fluid-Applied Crack Isolation Membrane Underlayment: Not permitted or allowed within shower and bathtub areas.
1. Description: Manufacturer’s proprietary system consisting of liquid applied component and synthetic fabric sheet reinforcement. 2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Custom Building Products; Redgard. b. Laticrete International Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. c. Laticrete International Inc.; Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane. d. Mapei Corp.; Mapelastic HPG.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 7 TILING
C. Faced Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE) Crack Isolation Membrane Underlayment:
1. Description: Non-plasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with high-strength, nonwoven polyester fabric; minimum 0.030 in (0.75 mm) nominal thickness. 2. Manufacturer and Product: The Noble Company; NobleSeal CIS.
2.7 SETTING (MORTAR AND GROUT) MATERIALS
A. Material Quality Standards: ANSI A118 Series as indicated.
B. Thick-Set Portland Cement Mortar:
1. Material Quality Standard: ANSI A118.1, with the following physical properties:
a. Cleavage Membrane: One of the following:
1) Any membrane underlayment product listed and designated by manufacturer to be suitable for thick-set applications. 2) Polyethylene Sheeting: ASTM D 4397, minimum 4.0 mils (0.10 mm) thick.
b. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, grey color. Use white color with light colored stone, translucent marble or light color grout as recommended by manufacturer. c. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S or ASTM C 207, Type S. d. Aggregate: ASTM C 144, washed clean and graded natural sand passing 16-mesh sieve. e. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2x2 W0.3/0.3 (2 in by 2 in, 16/16 wire) (50 mm by 50 mm MW2.0/2.0) ; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size. f. Suitable for use in thick set mortar beds up to 2 in (50 mm) thick.
C. Medium-Set Latex-Portland Cement Mortar:
1. Material Quality Standard: ANSI A118.4, with the following physical properties:
a. Manufacturer’s premium polymer modified Medium-set product; gray color. Use white color with light colored stone, translucent marble or light color grout as recommended by manufacturer. b. Integral antimicrobial product added during manufacturing to resist mold and mildew growth. c. Non-sag capability. d. Suitable for use in medium set mortar beds up to 3/4 in (19 mm) thick.
2. Manufacturers and Products - Floor Tiling:
a. Custom Building Products; Medium Bed Mortar. b. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete 255 MultiMax. c. Mapei Corp.; Ultraflex LFT Mortar.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 8 TILING
D. Thin-Set Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (For All Tile Types Except Glass):
1. Material Quality Standard: ANSI A118.4, with the following physical properties:
a. Manufacturer’s premium polymer modified thin-set product; gray color. Use white color with light colored stone, translucent marble or light color grout as recommended by manufacturer. b. Integral antimicrobial product added during manufacturing to resist mold and mildew growth. c. Non-sag capability. d. Suitable for use in thin set mortar beds up to 1/4 in (6 mm) thick.
2. Manufacturers and Products - Floor Tiling:
a. Custom Building Products; Flexbond Fortified Thin-Set Mortar. b. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete 254 Platinum Thin-Set Mortar. c. Mapei Corp.; Ultraflex 3 Mortar.
3. Manufacturers and Products - Wall Tiling:
a. Custom Building Products; MagaLite Crack Prevention Mortar. b. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete 255 MultiMax Multipurpose Thin-Set Mortar. c. Mapei Corp.; Ultralite Mortar.
E. Latex-Portland Cement Sanded Grout for Tile Joints Greater than 1/8 in (3 mm) Wide:
1. Material Quality Standard: ANSI A118.7, with following physical properties:
a. Manufacturer’s premium polymer modified sanded grout product. b. Integral antimicrobial product added during manufacturing to resist mold and mildew growth.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Custom Building Products; Prism Surecolor Grout. b. Laticrete International, Inc.; 1500 Sanded Grout with 1776 Grout Enhancer. c. Mapei Corp.; Ultracolor.
F. Latex-Portland Cement Unsanded Grout for Tile Joints Less than 1/8 in (3 mm) Wide::
1. Material Quality Standard: ANSI A118.7, with following physical properties:
a. Manufacturer’s premium polymer modified unsanded grout product. b. Integral antimicrobial product added during manufacturing to resist mold and mildew growth.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Custom Building Products; Prism Surecolor Grout. b. Laticrete International, Inc.; 1600 Unsanded Grout with 1776 Grout Enhancer. c. Mapei Corp.; Keracolor U.
2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. Sealant Colors: Match color of adjacent grout unless otherwise indicated.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 9 TILING
B. Mildew-Resistant Floor or Wall Joint Sealant:
1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, with following physical properties:
a. Integral antimicrobial product added during manufacturing to resist mold and mildew growth. b. Intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates. c. Resistant to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes.
2. Description: One-part mildew-resistant silicone sealant. 3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals; Sonneborn OmniPlus. b. Dow Corning Corp.; 786. c. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil. d. Pecora Corp.; 898. e. Tremco Inc.; Tremsil 200.
C. Backer Rods:
1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1330, Type B. 2. Description: Non-gassing (when punctured), bi-cellular polyethylene or polyolefin foam rod with a surface skin, of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals; Sonneborn Soft Backer Rod. b. Nomaco Inc.; Sof Rod.
D. Backer Tape: Bond-breaking polyethylene or other plastic tape, self-adhesive where applicable, recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure.
2.9 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Underlayments: Trowelable or self-leveling as required by conditions; pre-mixed, latex-modified, Portland cement based formulation provided by or specifically approved by setting material manufacturer; include primers if required for concrete substrate condition.
B. Patching Compounds: Trowelable pre-mixed, latex-modified, Portland cement based formulation provided by or specifically approved by setting material manufacturer; include primers if required for concrete substrate condition.
C. Metal Transition Strips (Tile to Adjacent Flooring Material): Schluter Systems LP; Schiene, stainless steel.
D. Glass-Fiber Tape: Self-adhering, alkali-resistant, glass-fiber tape, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads per 1 in (25 mm) .; minimum 2 in (50 mm) wide.
E. Tile Cleaner: Neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, provided by or specifically approved by tile and grout manufacturers.
F. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 10 TILING
2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. General Procedures:
1. Mix to comply with referenced quality standards and manufacturers’ written instructions. 2. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. 3. Use type of mixing equipment, speeds, containers, time, and other procedures to produce uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrate surfaces to which tile will be installed for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with the Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance.
1. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 2. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standard: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform tile work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents. 4. ANSI A108 installation method indicated. 5. TCNA installation method indicated.
B. General Requirements:
1. Extend tile into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 3. Accurately form intersections and returns. 4. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. 5. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints, to form smooth edges. 6. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile by not less than 1/8 in (3 mm) .
C. Jointing Pattern:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, lay tile in grid pattern. 2. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. 3. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 11 TILING
4. Provide uniform joint widths of size recommended by tile and grout manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 5. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so that extent of each sheet is not apparent in finished work.
D. Wainscots: Lay out tile to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated, and finish with bullnose shape.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
B. Substrate Cleaning: Remove curing compounds, coatings, laitance, efflorescence, concrete dust, dirt, oil, gypsum board dust, paint, and other residue that would adversely affect or reduce bonding.
C. Concrete Floor Preparation:
1. Prepare concrete floor substrates to comply with flatness tolerance of 1/4 in in 10 ft (6 mm in 3 m) as follows:
a. Fill cracks, holes and depressions with trowelable cementitious underlayments and patching compounds. b. Remove concrete protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
2. If substrate does not have fine broom finish, mechanically scarify concrete substrates to not less than ICRI CSP 4 finish. 3. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 in per foot (1:50) toward drains.
D. Substrate Joints, Gaps, Penetrations, and Different Substrates within Shower and Tub Enclosures: Prior to installing tile, seal the following joints, gaps, and spaces between differing materials as follows:
1. Base of Wall Joints within Shower and Tub Enclosures: Apply wall joint sealant at joint between Coated Glass-Mat Water Resistant Board (specified in Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies”) and Tub Enclosure or Prefabricated Shower Receptor, Thick-set Mortar Bed, or floor slab to create water resistant barrier in accordance with TCNA Installation B420. 2. Penetrations: Apply wall joint sealant at penetrations through wall substrates to create water resistant barrier; especially at piping and valve penetrations. 3. Toilet Accessories: Apply wall joint sealant at fastener penetrations and around perimeter of backing plates to create water resistant barrier. 4. Joints and Corners: Apply glass-fiber tape to joints and corners of substrates within Showers and Tub Enclosures with thin-set mortar.
E. Blending: Verify tile has been factory blended and packaged as specified; if not, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at site before installing.
F. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, pre-coat with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 12 TILING
3.4 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Installation Quality Standard: ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
B. General Requirements:
1. If required by manufacturer, prime concrete substrate. 2. Install to produce a continuous waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate, without wrinkles, bubbles, buckles or kinks. 3. For sheets, overlap and seal seams. 4. Turn membrane up wall at locations where tile is scheduled for wall or base. 5. Roll installed sheet if required by manufacturer. 6. Install tile after waterproofing has cured and been tested determined it is watertight.
3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements:
1. If required by manufacturer, prime concrete substrate. 2. Install to produce a continuous crack isolation membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate, without wrinkles, bubbles, buckles, or kinks. 3. For sheets, overlap and seal seams. 4. For liquid applied products, brush or roll liquid uniformly over area in number of coats required and install reinforcing fabric. 5. Roll installed sheet if required by manufacturer. 6. After installation of tile, install floor joint sealant in tile joints recommended by manufacturer to coordinate with membrane strips.
3.6 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
B. Installation Quality Standard: Install tile according to following standards:
1. Thick-set Mortar: ANSI A108.1 and A108.5; for recessed subfloor and floor tiles larger than 12 in by 12 in (300 mm by 300 mm) . 2. Medium-set Mortar: ANSI A108.5; for floor tiles 8 in by 8 in (200 mm by 200 mm) to 12 in by 12 in (300 mm by 300 mm) where subfloor is not recessed. 3. Thin-set Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5; for floor tiles less than 8 in by 8 in (200 mm by 200 mm) and smaller where subfloor is not recessed and for interior wall tiles. 4. Latex-Portland Grout: ANSI A108.10, typical unless indicated otherwise.
C. Back Buttering: For following installations, obtain minimum 95 percent mortar coverage as in referenced ANSI A108 series of installation standards:
1. Tile floors in wet and limited water exposures. 2. Tile floors composed of tiles 12 in by 12 in (300 mm by 300 mm) or larger. 3. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 13 TILING
D. Grout Joint Widths: Install the respective types of tile with the following grout joint widths, unless otherwise recommended by tiling and grout manufacturers.
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile - Less than 6 sq in (3900 mm²) : 1/16 in (1.5 mm) . 2. Paver Tile - 6 sq in (3900 mm²) or More: 1/4 in (6 mm) . 3. Stone Tile: 1/8 in (3 mm) .
E. Metal Trim: Install at locations indicated and where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
F. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
3.7 MOVEMENT JOINTS
A. Movement Joints, General: Installation Quality Standard: In accordance with TCNA Movement Joint Design Essentials EJ171 and as specified below.
B. Wall Joints: The following conditions shall not be grouted; install wall joint sealant and backer rod or backer tape:
1. Gypsum board assembly control joints. 2. Building expansion joints, unless scheduled for expansion joint cover. 3. Interior corners of tiled walls, including shower and bathtub walls. 4. Around substrates and tile at penetrations through tiled substrates. 5. At one side of changes in direction or plane of wall. 6. At joint closest and parallel to changes in substrates supporting tile between wall and floor.
C. Floor Joints:
1. General Requirements:
a. Continue construction, contraction (control), and expansion joints in building structure through tile work. b. Isolate tile work that abuts a restraining structure or assembly. c. When metal trim or sealant/backer is used for joint, width shall not be less than width of joint in building structure. d. Tile shall not be placed over building expansion joints.
2. Schedule of Sealant Products and Locations:
a. Latex-Portland Cement Grouted Floors: Install floor joint sealant with backer rod at horizontal joints in mortar and grout setting conditions. b. Epoxy Grouted Floors: Install chemical resistant floor joint sealant full depth without backer rod at horizontal joints in epoxy grout setting conditions.
3. Interior Movement Joint Spacing: As indicated on Drawings and as specified below:
a. Tile Exposed to Direct Sunlight or Moisture: 8 ft to 12 ft (2.4 m to 3.6 m) on center each way. b. Tile Not Exposed to Sunlight: 20 ft to 25 ft (6 m to 7.5 m) on center each way.
D. Interior Floor Joint Installation Schedule: Seal interior floor movement joints, as defined by TCNA, according to following schedule:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 14 TILING
1. Construction Joints: Floor joint sealant and backer rod. 2. Contraction (Control) Joints: Floor joint sealant and backer rod. 3. Isolation Joints: Floor joint sealant and backer rod. 4. Tile Expansion Joints: Floor joint sealant and backer rod. 5. Perimeter Joints between Wall and Floors: Floor joint sealant with backer tape.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Manufacturer’s qualified technical representative shall inspect first day’s Work and periodically inspect Work to ensure installation is proceeding in accordance with manufacturer’s designs, recommendations, instructions, and warranty requirements. Representative shall submit written reports of each visit indicating observations, findings, and conclusions of inspection.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Cleaning:
1. Acids are not permitted, nor will they be allowed. 2. Clean tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 3. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 4. No sooner than 10 days after installation, clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. 5. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. 6. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 7. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Cleaning and Maintenance Training: Provide instruction to Owner's personnel for cleaning and maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use; include precautions against cleaning materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Coverings: When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
B. Traffic Restrictions: Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.
3.12 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Floors, Concrete Substrate - Recessed:
1. TCNA Installation Method F121 (Waterproof Membrane): Thick-set reinforced Portland cement mortar bed over waterproof membrane over concrete subfloor; Latex-Portland Cement Grout.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 15 TILING
B. Floors, Concrete Substrate:
1. TCNA Installation Method F125 (Crack Isolation Membrane): Thin-set Latex-Portland cement mortar over crack isolation membrane over concrete subfloor; Latex-Portland Cement Grout. 2. TCNA Installation Method F122 (Waterproof Membrane): Thin-set Latex-Portland cement mortar over waterproof membrane over concrete subfloor; Latex-Portland Cement Grout.
C. Walls, Gypsum Board Substrate:
1. TCNA Installation Method W243: Thin-set Latex-Portland cement mortar over coated-glass- mat gypsum board; Latex-Portland Cement Grout.
D. Walls, Gypsum Board Substrate, Bathtub / Shower Surfaces:
1. Walls, Including Tub Unit or Pre-Fabricated Shower Receptors: TCNA Installation Method B419 (Waterproof Membrane): Thin-set Latex-Portland cement mortar over waterproof membrane over coated-glass-mat gypsum board; Latex-Portland Cement Grout. 2. Shower Receptors: TCNA Installation Method B420 (Waterproof Membrane): Thin-set Latex-Portland cement mortar over waterproof membrane over coated-glass-mat gypsum board walls and concrete subfloors; Latex-Portland Cement Grout.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 3000 - 16 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 09 6513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Resilient wall base, and supplementary items necessary for installation.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
B. Samples for Verification Purposes: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 12 in (300 mm) sample of each different color and pattern of resilient product specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data:
1. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects.
B. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Extra Materials: Furnish the following extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents:
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear ft (3 linear m) for each 500 linear ft (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each different type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 6513 - 1 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
1. Critical Radiant Flux: Class I, 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 662.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by product manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless otherwise recommended by product manufacturer.
B. Maintain resilient products prior to installation at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during installation and for time period after installation recommended by manufacturer.
D. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design (Product Standard): Contract Documents are based on products and systems specified to establish a standard of quality. Other manufacturers offering products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and comply with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect.
1. Selections: As scheduled or as indicated in Design Selections.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 6513 - 2 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
2.3 RESILIENT MATERIALS
A. Rubber Wall Base:
1. Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or TP (rubber, thermoplastic), Group 1 and 2. 2. Thickness: Nominal 1/8 in (3 mm). 3. Lengths: Provide longest length(s) available per manufacturer. Provide coils if available in profile(s) indicated. 4. Outside and Inside Corners:
a. Job-formed.
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by product manufacturer suitable for products, applications, and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Wall Base: Not more than 50 g/L.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Respective manufacturer's written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 6513 - 3 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E. Masonry Wall Surfaces: On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
F. Job-Formed Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.
1. Outside Corners: Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes from exposed surfaces using cleaner recommended by manufacturer. 2. Sweep or vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Do not wash resilient products until after time period recommended by manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
B. Protect resilient products against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by resilient product manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 6513 - 4 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 09 9100
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Surface preparation and field painting of exposed interior items, and surfaces.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where indicated that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.
C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels, unless indicated otherwise.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a. Prefinished wood doors. b. Acoustical materials. c. Prefinished Architectural woodwork and cabinets. d. Elevator equipment. e. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. f. Light fixtures. g. Distribution cabinets. h. Baked enamel coated items. i. Fluorocarbon coated items. j. Integral colored plaster. k. Integral colored PVC.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:
a. Furred areas. b. Ceiling plenums. c. Pipe spaces. d. Duct shafts. e. Elevator shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 9100 - 1 PAINTING
a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper and copper alloys. e. Bronze and brass.
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
a. Embossed UL labels may be used and painted where acceptable to authority having jurisdiction
D. Related Sections:
1. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum board assemblies.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Levels: MPI Gloss and Sheen Standard values are measured per ASTM D523, Method D and are as follows:
1. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees. 2. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 3. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 4. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees. 5. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees. 6. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees. 7. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 9100 - 2 PAINTING
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 in (200 mm ) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L ) of each material and color applied.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" and "MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Install mockup in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
a. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.
1) Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) . 2) Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 3) Demonstrate repair procedures for damaged surfaces.
b. Apply samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. c. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
1) If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when mock-up will be installed. 3. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before starting fabrication or installation. 4. Acceptance of mock-ups does not constitute acceptance of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mock-ups unless such deviations are specifically noted by Contractor and accepted by Architect in writing.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 9100 - 3 PAINTING
5. Demolish and remove mock-ups when directed by Architect unless accepted to become part of the completed Work.
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C) .
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between minimum and maximum range recommended by manufacturer.
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C ) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, provide product by one of manufacturers listed. If not listed, submit as substitution according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures".
1. Behr. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. Dunn-Edwards Corporation. 4. Kelly-Moore Paints. 5. PPG Paints. 6. Pratt & Lambert Paints. 7. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
B. Color and Gloss: As scheduled or as indicated in Design Selections.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 9100 - 4 PAINTING
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and field applied primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to shop applicators to ensure use of compatible primers.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform work according to the following, unless otherwise specified in this Section:
1. Respective manufacturer's written installation instructions. 2. Approved submittals. 3. Contract Documents. 4. MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" or "MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual", as applicable.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" and "MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
C. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 9100 - 5 PAINTING
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates, unless expressly permitted by authorities having jurisdiction for labels intended to be painted.
D. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.
E. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items, equipment, and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items, equipment, or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 5. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. 6. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 7. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 8. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. Tint per manufacturer's technical data for each type of primer or undercoat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
3.5 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Painting of Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work to be done when exposed in the following locations:
1. Occupied Spaces.
B. Equipment includes, but is not limited to, the following:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 9100 - 6 PAINTING
1. Equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
C. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. Paint with a flat, nonspecular black paint.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces to match approved samples.
3.7 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Gypsum Board and Plaster (Gypsum and Portland Cement) Substrates:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.2B.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer, MPI #50, VOC 100 g/L max. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138, VOC 50 g/L max. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139, VOC 50 g/L max. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140, VOC 50 g/L max. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141, VOC 50 g/L max. g. Gloss and Sheen: As scheduled or as indicated in Design Selections.
2. Water-Based Epoxy Coating System: MPI INT 9.2F.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer, MPI #50, VOC 100g/L. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy-Modified Latex, Interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Epoxy-Modified Latex, Interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #215, VOC 100 g/L max. d. Topcoat: Epoxy-Modified Latex, Interior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6), MPI #115, VOC 100 g/L max. e. Gloss and Sheen: As scheduled or as indicated in Design Selections.
B. Steel Substrates:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.1R.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 9100 - 7 PAINTING
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer (shop primed), MPI #76, VOC 350g/L max. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138, VOC 50 g/L max. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139, VOC 50 g/L max. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140, VOC 50 g/L max. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141, VOC 50 g/L max. g. Gloss and Sheen: As scheduled or as indicated in Design Selections.
C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.3M.
a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer, MPI #134, VOC 100 g/L max. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138, VOC 50 g/L max. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #139, VOC 50 g/L max. e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140, VOC 50 g/L max. f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141, VOC 50 g/L max. g. Gloss and Sheen: As scheduled or as indicated in Design Selections.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
09 9100 - 8 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 10 2113
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work for this section includes standard, manufactured toilet compartments and supplementary items necessary to complete work required for their installation.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. Include details of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of anchors, hardware, and fastenings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
C. Samples for Verification: Of each compartment or screen color and finish required, prepared on 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" for toilet compartments designated as accessible.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where products and systems are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2113 - 1 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, provide product by one of manufacturers listed. If not listed, submit as substitution according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures".
1. Steel Units:
a. Accurate Partitions Corporation. b. All American Metal Corp. c. American Sanitary Partition Corporation. d. Ampco, Inc. e. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. f. Flush Metal Partition Corp. g. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. h. Global Steel Products Corp. i. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc. j. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. k. Metpar Corp. l. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing company.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable.
B. Steel Sheets for Color-Coated Finish: Provide mill-phosphatized steel sheet that is leveled to stretcher-leveled flatness complying with the requirements of standards indicated below:
1. Electrolytically Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591 (ASTM A 591M), Class C, of the following minimum thicknesses:
a. Pilasters:
1) Overhead Braced Units: 0.0359 in (0.9 mm) . 2) Unbraced Units: 0.0478 in (1.2 mm) .
b. Panels and Screens: 0.0359 in (0.9 mm ). c. Doors: 0.0299 in (0.7 mm ). d. Tapping Reinforcement: 0.0747 in (1.9 mm) .
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized or Galvannealed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M), in manufacturer's standard coating designation and of the following minimum thicknesses:
a. Pilasters:
1) Overhead Braced Units: 0.040 in (1.0 mm) . 2) Unbraced Units: 0.052 in (1.3 mm) .
b. Panels and Screens: 0.040 in (1.0 mm ).
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2113 - 2 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
c. Doors: 0.034 in (0.8 mm) . d. Tapping Reinforcement: 0.079 in (2.0 mm ).
C. Core Material for Metal-Faced Units: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 in (25 mm ) minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 1-1/4 in (32 mm ) minimum for pilasters.
D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, not less than 0.0312 in (0.78 mm) thick and 3 in (75 mm ) high, finished to match hardware.
E. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard Chrome-plated, nonferrous, case zinc alloy (zamac) or clear-anodized aluminum ear or U-brackets for attaching panels to walls and pilasters.
F. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear-anodized aluminum operating hardware and accessories.
G. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile in manufacturer's standard finish.
H. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.
1. Floor Mounted Units: Anchorages and fasteners in contact with or in close proximity to floor shall be stainless steel
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars.
B. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
C. Wall-Hung Screens: Provide units in sizes indicated of same construction and finish as compartment panels, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 30 in (750 mm) wide clear opening in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36 in (900 mm ) wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32 in (800 mm) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2113 - 3 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging doors. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible.
2.4 BAKED ENAMEL STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying finishes.
B. Color-Coated Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with coating manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
1. Colors: As scheduled or as indicated in Design Selections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 in (12 mm ) between pilasters and panels and not more than 1 in (25 mm ) between panels and walls. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
1. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.
C. Screens: Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2113 - 4 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2113 - 5 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2113 - 6 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 10 2613
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Scope: Impact-resistant wall protection systems, wall and corner guards, and supplementary items necessary for installation.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, physical characteristics such as durability, resistance to fading, and flame resistance, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance
B. Plastic Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit for following products showing full range of color and texture variations expected in each wall protection system component:
1. Corner Guards: 12 inch (300 mm) long samples of each type of component indicated; include examples of joinery.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data:
1. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: Include for each wall protection system component to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include recommended methods and frequency for maintaining optimum condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions, and precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to plastic finishes and performance.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Extra Materials: Furnish as described below packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Full-size units of maximum length, including plastic cover and aluminum retainer, equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of each type of unit installed, but not less than 2 units. 2. Accessory components from same production run as materials installed.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2613 - 1 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Experience: Installer's personnel with not less than 5 years of experience in the successful performance of Work similar to scope of this Project. 2. Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor at Project while the Work is in progress, and who has not less than 5 years of experience installing products and systems similar to scope of this Project.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall protection system components with surface-burning characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical materials according to ASTM E 84 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify wall protection system components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F (21 deg C) for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design (Product Standard): Contract Documents are based on products and systems specified to establish a standard of quality. Other manufacturers offering products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and comply with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect.
1. Product Selections: As scheduled or as indicated in Design Selections
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2613 - 2 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Engineered PETG (Polyethylene Terepthalate Glycol) Material: Textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant co-polymer plastic with integral color throughout; PVC-free with no PBTs or BPA, extruded and sheet material, thickness as indicated.
1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m) of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A. 2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543 or ASTM D 1308. 3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635. 4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for Alloy 6063-T5.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.
D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view.
E. Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.4 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
A. Basis of Design (Product Standard): Contract Documents are based on products and systems specified to establish a standard of quality. Other manufacturers/fabricators offering products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and comply with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect.
1. Manufacturers and Products: As scheduled or as indicated in Design Selections.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General Requirements: Fabricate wall protection system components to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.
1. Preassemble components in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. 2. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2613 - 3 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Respective manufacturer/fabricator’s written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
3.4 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrate surfaces to which wall protection system components will be installed for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.
1. Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation.
a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet (6.1 m), splice aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches (300 mm). c. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2613 - 4 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
3.6 CLEANING
A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.
B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2613 - 5 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2613 - 6 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 10 2813
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Toilet accessories and supplementary items necessary for installation.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each product indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, dimensions, and profiles of individual components. 2. Include details for cutouts required in other Work; include templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices.
B. Accessory Schedule: Organized by rooms, indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations of each accessory, using drawing designations and room names and numbers as indicated on Drawings.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data:
1. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects.
B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering materials and installation (labor) stating obligations, remedies, limitations and exclusions.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For inclusion in operation and maintenance manual as required by Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data". Include manufacturer's instructions for maintenance of installed Work, including methods and frequency for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use. Include precautions against cleaning products and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance.
1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site.
1. Participants:
a. Architect.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2813 - 1 TOILET ACCESSORIES
b. Contractor, including superintendent. c. Installer, including project manager and supervisor. d. If requested, Manufacturer's qualified technical representative. e. Installers of other construction interfaced with Work.
2. Minimum Agenda: Installer shall demonstrate understanding of the Work required by describing detailed procedures for preparing, installing, and cleaning the Work. Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, following topics:
a. Tour representative areas of Work, inspect and discuss condition of substrate, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. b. Review Contract Document requirements. c. Review approved submittals. d. Review inspection and testing requirements. e. Review environmental conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. f. Resolve deviations or differences between Contract Documents and the manufacturer's specifications.
3. Record discussions, including decisions and agreements, and prepare report.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Mirror Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish warranty for a period of 15 years from date of Substantial Completion agreeing to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects, signed by an authorized representative using manufacturer's standard form.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, provide product by one of manufacturers listed. If not listed, submit as substitution according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures".
1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corp. 5. Brey Krause Manufacturing. 6. GAMCO, a Division of Bobrick.
B. Shower Curtain Products Only:
1. Barjan Manufacturing Ltd. 2. Brite Inc. 3. Gary Manufacturing.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2813 - 2 TOILET ACCESSORIES
C. Basis of Design: Contract Documents are based on products specified to establish a standard of quality. Other manufacturers with products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and do not change intended aesthetic, functional and performance requirements as judged by Architect.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL (BACK OF HOUSE)
A. Refer to Interiors Finish Selections for guestroom accessories.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
C. General Requirements:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded construction, with corners and returns as indicated, tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. 2. Fabricate frames drawn and leveled, one-piece seamless construction. 3. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, stainless-steel hinges. 4. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
D. Manufacturer Names or Labels: Not permitted on exposed faces of accessories. Provide printed label or stamped metal nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number on an easily noticeable interior surface or on back surface of each accessory.
E. Keys: Provide minimum of 6 universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
F. Accessibility Requirements: Products and installation shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), ANSI A 117.1, and state and local accessibility standards.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 satin finish; minimum 0.0312 in (0.8 mm) (22 gage) nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 1/4 in (6 mm) thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating.
C. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
D. ABS Plastic: Moldable acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.
E. HDPE Plastic: Moldable high-density polyethylene resin formulation.
F. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
G. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of non-corrosive metal when concealed.
H. Sealant: Silicone mildew resistant sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".
2.4 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS
A. Drawing Designation A1 - Surface-Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2813 - 3 TOILET ACCESSORIES
1. Description: Fabricated of stainless steel; with hinged front equipped with full length stainless steel piano hinge and tumbler lock; pierced slots at sides as refill indicators; and sized to dispense not less than 400 C-fold or 525 multi-fold paper towels without special adapters. 2. Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Model B-262.
2.5 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS
A. Drawing Designation B9 - Surface-Mounted Twin Jumbo Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser:
1. Description: Fabricated of stainless steel, cabinet of 0.040 in (1.0 mm) (20 gage) thick, door of 0.050 in (1.25 mm) (18 gage) thick; door with viewing slot, continuous piano hinge and tumbler lock; sized to store two 10 in (250 mm) diameter, 3 in (75 mm) diameter core type, tissue roll; spindles convertible to standard size toilet tissue rolls. 2. Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Model B-2892.
2.6 GRAB BARS
A. Drawing Designation E15 - Straight Surface-Mounted Satin Finish Grab Bar with Slip-Resistant Gripping Surface:
1. Description: Fabricated of stainless steel tube; with minimum 0.050 in (1.25 mm) (18 gage) wall thickness and 1-1/2 in (38 mm) outside diameter, with 1-1/2 in (38 mm) clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar.
a. Gripping Surfaces: Satin texture with peened gripping surfaces. b. Shapes: Either as indicated, or as required by condition requiring grab bar. c. Mounting: Concealed flanged steel plate welded to end of bar, as required by mounting condition, with snap-on cover; engineered to support minimum 300 lbs (136 kg).
2. Basis of Design:
a. E15: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Model B-6806.99 x 18; 18 in (450 mm).
B. Drawing Designation E7, E16 - Configured Surface-Mounted Satin Finish Grab Bar with Slip-Resistant Gripping Surface:
1. Description: Fabricated of stainless steel tube; with minimum 0.050 in (1.25 mm) (18 gage) wall thickness and 1-1/2 in (38 mm) outside diameter, with 1-1/2 in (38 mm) clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar.
a. Gripping Surfaces: Satin texture with peened gripping surfaces. b. Shapes: Either as indicated, or as required by condition requiring the grab bar. c. Mounting: Concealed flanged steel plate welded to end of bar, as required by mounting condition, with snap-on cover; engineered to support minimum 300 lbs (136 kg).
2. Basis of Design:
a. E7: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Model B-6861.99 16 in x 31 in (400 mm x 775 mm) unit. b. E16: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Model B-68616.99, modified for 42 in x 54 in (1050 mm x 1350 mm) unit.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2813 - 4 TOILET ACCESSORIES
2.7 SOAP DISPENSERS
A. Drawing Designation J1 - Surface-Mounted Soap Dispenser:
1. Description: Fabricated of stainless steel; with stainless steel cover with unbreakable clear acrylic refill indicator window; minimum 40 fl oz (1.2 L) capacity liquid soap dispenser, with stainless steel piston, springs, and internal parts designed to dispense in measured quantity by pump action. 2. Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Model B-2112.
2.8 SHOWER CURTAIN ROD, HOOKS, AND CURTAIN
A. Drawing Designation L1 - Extra-Heavy-Duty Shower Curtain Rod, Hooks, and Curtain:
1. Rod: As specified below:
a. Description: Fabricated of stainless steel tube; 1-1/4 in (30 mm) outside diameter, 0.050 in (1.2 mm) (18 gage), satin finish; with die-formed nominal 2-1/2 in (62 mm) square minimum 0.0375 in (0.9 mm) (20 gage) stainless steel flanges with satin finish, and designed for exposed fasteners; length to accommodate opening width. b. Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Model B-6047.
2. Hooks: As specified below:
a. Description: Fabricated of stainless steel; 0.09 in (2 mm) diameter spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod size; one hook per curtain grommet. b. Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Part 204-1. 3. Curtain: As specified below:
a. Description: Custom fabricated of white nylon with sides and bottom hemmed, with hemmed reinforced top header containing corrosion-resistant grommets; containing anti-static, anti-bacterial and flame-retardant agents, minimum 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick. b. Manufacturers:
1) Barjan Manufacturing Ltd. 2) Brite Inc. 3) Gary Manufacturing.
2.9 SOAP DISHES
A. Drawing Designation M1 - Surface-Mounted Soap Dish:
1. Description: Fabricated of stainless steel; one-piece with drain holes; welded to support arm anchored to wall with 0.050 in (1.25 mm) (18 gage) concealed mounting bracket. 2. Basis of Design: Gamco, Model 76807.
2.10 FOLDING SHOWER SEATS
A. Drawing Designation N1 - Surface-Mounted Folding Shower Seat:
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2813 - 5 TOILET ACCESSORIES
1. Description: Fabricated of stainless steel minimum 0.0625 in (1.6 mm) (16 gage) square tubing and with 0.050 in (1.25 mm) (18 gage) round tubing; reversible L-shaped hinged seat made of phenolic or polymeric composite of either slat type or one-piece construction, with support braces, hinges, and frame designed to fold up against wall when not in use; color as selected by Architect from selections available. Shower seat shall comply with barrier-free accessibility guidelines. 2. Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Model B-5181.
2.11 MOP AND BROOM HOLDERS
A. Drawing Designation P1 - Surface-Mounted Mop and Broom Holder with Utility Shelf:
1. Description: Fabricated of stainless steel, minimum 0.050 in (1.25 mm) (18 gage) thick shelf with returned edges, and support brackets for wall mounting; with three 0.0625 in (1.6 mm) (16 gage) stainless steel rag hooks on front of shelf, together with four spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam-type mop/broom holders; 1/4 in (6 mm) diameter stainless steel drying rod suspended beneath shelf; 36 in (900 mm) long. 2. Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Model B-224 X 36.
2.12 MIRRORS
A. Drawing Designation R1 - Surface-Mounted Stainless Steel Framed Mirror (without Shelf):
1. Description: Fabricated of stainless steel; exposed frame with angle shapes not less than 0.050 in (1.25 mm) (18 gage) thick, with square corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth, and to accommodate glass edge protection material; with galvanized steel backing sheet, minimum 0.034 in (0.8 mm) (22 gage) in thick and full mirror size, with non-absorptive filler material (corrugated cardboard not acceptable), and with hanging brackets; glass mirror. 2. Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Model B-290 2436.
B. Drawing Designation R2 - Surface-Mounted Stainless Steel Framed Mirror with Shelf:
1. Description: Fabricated of stainless steel; exposed frame with angle shapes not less than 0.050 in (1.25 mm) (18 gage) thick, with square corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth, and to accommodate glass edge protection material; shelf fabricated of stainless steel, minimum 0.050 in (1.25 mm) (18 gage) thick with returned edges, and welded to bottom of frame, approximately 5 in (125 mm) deep by width of mirror; with galvanized steel backing sheet, minimum 0.034 in (0.8 mm) (22 gage) in thick and full mirror size, with non-absorptive filler material (corrugated cardboard not acceptable), and with hanging brackets; glass mirror. 2. Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Model B-292 2436.
2.13 ROBE HOOKS
A. Drawing Designation V1 - Surface-Mounted Single Robe Hook:
1. Description: Fabricated of stainless steel; rectangular profiled pin welded to backplate, with cover anchored with set-screws; project nominal 1-1/2 in (38 mm) from wall surface. 2. Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Model B-76717.
B. Drawing Designation V2 - Surface-Mounted Double Robe Hook:
1. Description: Fabricated of stainless steel; rectangular profiled pin welded to backplate, with cover anchored with set-screws; project nominal 2 in (50 mm) from wall surface.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2813 - 6 TOILET ACCESSORIES
2. Basis of Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Model B-76727.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, install toilet accessories according to the following, unless otherwise specified in this Section:
1. Respective manufacturer's written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements: Install toilet accessories level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. Use fasteners that are appropriate to substrate indicated and as recommended by respective product manufacturer.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand downward load of minimum 250 lbf (1.10 kN) according to ASTM F 446.
C. Accessories within Shower and Tub Alcoves: Set flanges of accessories in sealant, install sealant in screw holes prior setting screws, and cover screw head prior to snapping on cover, to prevent water infiltration.
D. Mirrors: Secure to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2813 - 7 TOILET ACCESSORIES
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 2813 - 8 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 10 4400
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work required for this section includes fire protection specialties (fire extinguishers, accessories) and supplementary items necessary to complete their installation.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect, provide product by one of manufacturers listed. If not listed, submit as substitution according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures".
1. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 3. Potter Roemer LLC.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 4400 - 1 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other locations indicated.
B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type; typical unless otherwise indicated or specified: UL-rated 2A:10B:C, 5-lb nominal capacity, in enameled steel container.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of sizes required for types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.
B. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location.
1. Bracket-Mounted Extinguishers: Identify with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to wall surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Respective manufacturer written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 4400 - 2 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 4400 - 3 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
10 4400 - 4 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS BLUFFDALE, UTAH
SECTION 12 3661
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: The following simulated stone countertops along with supplementary items necessary for installation:
1. Solid surfacing countertops.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.
1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components and attachments to other work. Distinguish between shop and field-assembled work. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, accessories and other items installed in countertops.
C. Samples for Verification Purposes: For simulated stone material, 6 in (150 mm) square, showing color and pattern selected.
D. Manufacturer’s Project Acceptance Document: Certification by the manufacturer that its product(s) are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or required, and that a warranty will be issued.
E. Qualification Data: For installer.
1. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
F. Warranty: Sample of warranty.
1. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty covering materials and installation (labor) stating obligations, remedies, limitations and exclusions.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Experience: Installer with not less than 5 years experience in performing specified Work similar to scope of this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance and completion of projects for a period of not less than 5 years, and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
12 3661 - 1 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
2. Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project during times specified Work is in progress, and, who is experienced in installing systems similar to type and scope required for Project.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and products with specified fire-test- response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where products and systems are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Furnish manufacturer’s written material and labor warranty signed by an authorized representative using manufacturer’s standard form agreeing to furnish materials and labor required to repair or replace work which exhibits material defects caused by manufacture or design and installation of product. “Defects” is defined to include but not limited to deterioration or failure to perform as required.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer shall warrant the products to be free from material and labor Defects for a period of 10 years from date of Substantial Completion
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design (Product Standard) : Contract Documents are based on products and systems specified to establish a standard of quality. Other manufacturers/fabricators offering products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and comply with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect.
1. Color(s) : As indicated in Design Selections on drawings.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer/fabricator. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator of primary materials.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
12 3661 - 2 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
2.3 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Solid Surface Material : Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1.
1. Panel Thickness: Minimum 1/2 in (12 mm) or as indicated on drawings.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded and other requirements as specified in Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry".
B. Adhesives: Manufacturers recommended adhesive.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Not more than 250 g/L.
C. Lavatory Bowls:
1. Under-slung or Self-Rimming Lavatory Bowls: Where indicated, provide as specified in Division 22 Plumbing Sections.
D. Backsplash: Preformed 4 in (100 mm) high coved backsplash, to match countertop.
E. Front Edge Trim: Preformed 1-1/2 in (38 mm) , to match countertops.
F. Accessories: Provide joint seam adhesives and other items required for a complete installation as recommended in writing by simulated stone manufacturer.
G. Sealant: Mildew resistant silicone sealant as specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”.
2.5 FABRICATION OF SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
A. Accurately cut holes and drill countertop panels to receive plumbing, fixtures, soap dispensers and other accessories. Obtain field measurements prior to fabrication and maintain minimum clearance at walls.
B. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with simulated stone manufacturer’s written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
12 3661 - 3 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:
1. Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/16 in per 48 in (1.5 mm per 1200 mm) .
B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 in per 96 in (3 mm per 2400 mm) , 1/4 in (6 mm) maximum.
C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/4 of nominal joint width.
D. Variation in Plane at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64 in (0.4 mm) difference between planes of adjacent units.
E. Variation in Line of Edge at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64 in (0.4 mm) difference between edges of adjacent units, where edge line continues across joint.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
A. Install countertops over plywood sub-tops secured to sub-framing supports with full spread of silicone adhesive in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Set countertops to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Shim and adjust to locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.
C. Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.
D. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
E. Secure backsplashes to tops and walls with adhesive.
F. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”.
G. Prepare ends and edges of simulated stone pieces to be joined according to the manufacturer’s/fabricator's recommendations for position and angle of butted joint. Lightly sand
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
12 3661 - 4 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
and thoroughly clean to remove dirt and grease. Join pieces with adhesive clamped until fully cured. Buff and sand to produce a smooth uniform seamless surface.
H. Apply sealant and compress to form bond with simulated stone material and adjacent surfaces and tool sealant surface to clean, straight lines.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Promptly clean simulated stone as work progresses to minimize final cleaning. Do not leave adhesive or sealant to dry on simulated stone faces.
B. Final clean and protect installed countertops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
12 3661 - 5 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
HKS 22564.000 2019-01-11
12 3661 - 6 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 23 0100
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONDITIONS
A. The General Conditions of the Contract, with the amendments, supplements, forms and requirements in Division 1, and herewith made a part of this Division.
B. All sections of Division 23 shall comply with the Mechanical General Requirements. The standards established in this section as to quality of materials and equipment, the type and quality of workmanship, mode of operations, safety rules, code requirements, etc., shall apply to all sections of this Division as though they were repeated in each Division.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The project described herein is Camp Williams, Buildings #4101 and #4141 Renovation, located in Camp Williams, UT. This work shall include all labor, materials, equipment, fixtures, and devices for the entire mechanical work and a complete operating and tested installation as required for this project.
Section 230100 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Section 230150 BALANCING, MAINTENANCE MANUALS, AND IDENTIFICATION Section 230200 INSULATION Section 230300 PIPING SYSTEMS, SPECIALTIES AND VALVES Section 230400 PLUMBING SYSTEMS Section 230800 AIR DISTRIBUTION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 230900 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A. Remove existing plumbing fixtures, associated piping, mechanical equipment, associated ductwork, controls and appurtenances, unless noted otherwise on plans. Existing penetrations thru envelope shall be re-used or capped and sealed weather-tight, as shown and described on the plans. New plumbing fixtures shall be provided and installed as shown on the plans.
B. Existing mechanical and plumbing equipment within each building’s mechanical room shall remain and be re-used, unless noted otherwise on plans. A complete plumbing system including gas and water meters at each building, domestic water, waste, vent, and natural gas piping shall be installed. Plumbing waste piping shall extend to utility piping at the street, as shown on plans.
C. Structural engineering requirements for mechanical equipment shall be the responsibility of the mechanical contractor. The mechanical contractor shall identify system parts requiring structural engineering and meet structural engineering requirements.
D. Building #4101 shall be equipped with natural gas heating. Existing natural gas furnace and associated controls and appurtenances shall remain and be re-used. The existing cooling equipment shall be removed entirely including outdoor unit, line-sets, indoor A-Coil, and associated wiring and conduit. The furnace shall be set to its highest speed tap and cooling mode shall be disabled. Existing HVAC controls shall be recovered and re-used. Natural gas
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0100 - 1 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
fired duct heater to be added in ceiling space. Existing exhaust fan, associated ductwork, controls and appurtenances shall be demolished and replaced with new. A complete and balanced system of exhaust and supply ductwork, grilles, and diffusers shall be provided and installed.
E. Building #4141 shall be equipped with natural gas heating. Existing natural gas make-up air unit, equipment pad & stand, associated controls & conduit, gas piping, and appurtenances shall be removed and replaced with new. New make-up air unit shall be mounted on pad and equipment stand. Existing exhaust fan, associated ductwork, controls and appurtenances shall be demolished and replaced with new. A complete and balanced system of exhaust and supply ductwork, grilles, and diffusers shall be provided and installed.
1.4 CODES & ORDINANCES:
A. All work shall be executed in accordance with all underwriters, public utilities, local and state rules and regulations applicable to the trade affected. Should any change in the plans and Specifications be required to comply with these regulations, the Contractor shall notify the Architect before the time of submitting his bid. After entering into contract, the Contractor will be held to complete all work necessary to meet these requirements without extra expense to the Owner. Where work required by drawings or specifications is above the standard required, it shall be done as shown or specified.
B. Applicable codes are the current adopted version of the following codes:
International Mechanical Code International Building Code International Plumbing Code Fuel and Gas Piping Code International Energy Conservation Code Fire Code
1.5 UTILITIES & FEES:
A. Contractor is responsible to obtain all permits and fee information for this project.
B. All charges for fees and permits will be paid by the owner. Unless noted otherwise, all systems furnished and or installed by this Contractor, shall be complete with all utilities, components, commodities and accessories required for a fully functioning system.
C. Authorities Having Jurisdiction
D. Contractor is responsible to contract and coordinate all inspections required by the various agencies who are authority having jurisdiction. Inspection must be completed and documented before substantial completion is given to contractor.
1.6 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submittals:
1. As soon as possible after the contract is awarded, but in no case more than 14 calendar days thereafter, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) copies of the descriptive literature covering products and materials to be used in the installation of mechanical systems for this project. The review of the submitted data will require a minimum of 14 days. If the Contractors schedule requires return of submitted literature in
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0100 - 2 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
less than the allotted time, the Contractor shall accelerate his submittal delivery date. The Contractor shall resubmit all items requiring re-review within 14 days of returned submittals. Refer to each specification section for items requiring submittal review. Written approval of the Owner's Representative shall be obtained before installing any such equipment or materials for the project. The submittals shall be prepared in an orderly manner, contained in a 3-ring loose-leaf binder with index and identification tabs each item or group of items and for each specification section. All items shall be submitted at one time except automatic temperature control drawings and seismic restraint drawings which may be submitted separately within 80 days of the contract award date. 2. Partial submittals will not be reviewed until the complete submittal is received. 3. Electronic submittals may be submitted. Electronic submittals are under the same requirements as described above. 4. Submitted literature shall bear the Contractor's stamp, indicating that he has checked all equipment being submitted; that each item will fit into the available space with the accesses shown on the drawings; and, further, that each item conforms to the capacity and quality standards given in the contract documents. 5. Submitted literature shall clearly indicate performance, quality, and utility requirements; shall show dimension and size of connection points; and shall include derating factors that were applied for each item of equipment to provide capacity at job site elevation. Temperature control submittals shall include piping and wiring diagrams, sequence of operation and equipment. Equipment must fit into the available space with allowance for operation, maintenance, etc. Factory piped and wired equipment shall include shop drawings for all internal wiring and piping furnished with the unit. 6. Submitted literature shall clearly show all required field install wiring, piping, and accessory installations required by the Contractor to provide a complete operating system. 7. Review by the Owner's Representative is for general conformance of the submitted equipment to the project specification. In no way does such review relieve this Contractor of his obligation to furnish equipment and materials that comply in detail to the specification nor does it relieve the Contractor of his obligation to determine actual field dimensions and conditions that may affect his work. Regardless of any items overlooked by the submittal review, the requirements of the contract drawings and specifications must be followed and are not waived or superseded in any way by the review. 8. By description, catalog number, and manufacturer's names, standards of quality have been established by the Architect and the Engineer for certain manufactured equipment items and specialties that are to be furnished by this Division. Alternate products and equipment may be proposed for use only if specifically named in the specifications or if given written prior approval in published addenda. Design equipment is the equipment listed on the drawings or if not listed on the drawings is the equipment first named in the specifications.
B. Alternate Equipment:
1. The Contractor should protect himself with the supplier of alternate named equipment. Alternate named equipment will be reviewed only one time.
2. Should alternate equipment be submitted and be rejected, it shall not be resubmitted for review and it shall be the responsibility of this contractor. The contractor shall only submit on design equipment on future submittals. Incomplete submittal data will be rejected.
3. If the Engineer is required to do additional design work to incorporate changes caused by submitting equipment or products, different than the design equipment specified, as
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0100 - 3 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
defined above, the contractor shall reimburse the engineer for additional time and expenses at the engineers current, recognized, hourly rates.
1.7 DRAWINGS AND MEASUREMENTS:
A. Drawings: 1. The contract document drawings show the general design, arrangements, and extent of the system. In certain cases, the drawings may include details that show more nearly exact locations and arrangements; however, the locations, as shown diagrammatically, are to be regarded as general. 2. It shall be the work of this Section to make such slight alterations as may be necessary to make adjustable parts fit to fixed parts, leaving all complete and in proper shape when done. All dimensions given on the drawings shall be verified as related to this work and with the Architect's office before work is started. 3. This Section shall carefully study building sections, space, clearances, etc., and then provide offsets in piping or ductwork as required to accommodate the building structure without additional cost to the Owner. In any case and at any time, a change in location required by obstacles or the installation of other trades not shown on the mechanical plans shall be made without charge. 4. The drawings shall not be scaled for roughing in measurements nor shall they be used as shop drawings. Where drawings are required for these purposes or where drawings must be made from field measurements, the Contractor shall take the necessary measurements and prepare the drawings. Shop drawings of the various subContractors shall be coordinated to eliminate all interferences and to provide sufficient space for the installation of all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. 5. The drawings and specifications have been prepared to supplement each other and they shall be interpreted as an integral unit with items shown on one and not the other being furnished and installed as though shown and called out on both.
B. Record Drawings:
1. Record drawings for all systems and sections of this Division shall be furnished as work of this Section. Blue-line white prints of floor plans shall be furnished by the Architect's office. These prints shall be accurately and neatly marked in colored pencil, showing all changes from schematics. 2. These drawings shall be reviewed with the Architect at least once each month, shall be submitted at time of final inspection, and shall be checked for accuracy. Failure to keep record drawings up-to-date shall be cause for withholding monthly payments.
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF BUILDING EQUIPMENT:
A. The Contractor may use equipment such as electric motors, fans, heat exchangers, filters, etc., with the written permission of the Owner. As each piece of equipment is used (such as electric motors and fans), maintenance procedures approved by the manufacturer are to be followed. A careful record is to be kept of the length of the time the equipment is used, maintenance procedures followed, and any difficulty encountered. The record is to be submitted to the Owner upon acceptance. All fan belts and filter media (such as bearings) shall be carefully inspected just prior to acceptance. Any excessive wear noted shall require replacement.
1.9 EXISTING CONDITIONS:
A. The Contractor shall carefully examine all existing conditions that might affect the mechanical system and shall compare these conditions with all drawings and specifications for work included under this contract. He shall, at such time, ascertain and check all conditions that may
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0100 - 4 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
affect his work. Contractor shall verify existing equipment to remain is in excellent working condition – if found to be in less than excellent working condition, contractor shall immediately bring this to the attention of the engineer / architect. No allowance shall subsequently be made in his behalf for an extra expense incurred as a result of his failure or neglect to make such examination. This Contractor shall include in his bid proposal all necessary allowances to repair or replace any item that will remain or will be removed, and any item that will be damaged or destroyed by new construction.
B. The Contractor shall remove all abandoned piping, etc., required by new construction and cap or plug openings. No capping, etc., shall be exposed in occupied areas. All openings of items removed shall be sealed to match adjacent surfaces.
C. The Contractor shall verify the exact location of all existing services, utilities, piping, etc., and make connections to existing systems as required or as shown on the drawings. The exact location of each utility line, together with size and elevation, shall be established before any on- site lines are installed. Should elevation or size of existing main utility lines make connections to them impossible as shown on drawings, then notification of such shall immediately be given to the Engineer & Architect for a decision.
1.10 EQUIPMENT CAPACITIES:
A. Capacities shown for equipment in the specifications and on the drawings are the minimum acceptable. No equipment shall be considered as an alternate which has capacities or performance less than that of design equipment.
B. All equipment shall give the specified capacity and performance at the job-site elevation. Manufacturers' standard ratings shall be adjusted accordingly. All capacities and performances listed on drawings or in specifications are for job-site conditions.
1.11 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT:
A. All equipment must be furnished structurally adequate to withstand seismic forces as outlined in the International Building Code for the applicable seismic zone. Equipment bases shall be designed for direct attachment of seismic snubbers and/or seismic anchors.
1.12 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES:
A. The Contractor shall refer to other drawings and parts of this specification that cover work of other trades that is carried on in conjunction with the mechanical work such that all work can proceed without interference resulting from lack of coordination.
B. The Contractor shall properly size and locate all openings, chases, sleeves, equipment bases, and accesses. He shall provide accurate wiring diagrams to the Electrical Contractor for all equipment furnished under this Division.
C. The ceiling cavity must be carefully reviewed and coordinated with all trades. In the event of conflict, the installation of the mechanical equipment and piping shall be in the following order: plumbing, waste, and soil lines; supply, return, and exhaust ductwork; water piping; and pneumatic control piping.
D. The mechanical Contractor shall insure that the installation of all piping, ducts and equipment is in compliance with the National Electrical Code relative to proper clearances in front of and over
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0100 - 5 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
all electrical panels and equipment. No piping or ductwork will be allowed to run over electrical panel.
1.13 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR:
A. The Contractor is responsible for the installation of a satisfactory piece of work in accordance with the true intent of the drawings and specifications. He shall provide, as a part of his work and without expense, all incidental items required even though these items are not particularly specified or indicated. The installation shall be made so that its several component parts will function together as a workable system and shall be left with all equipment properly adjusted and in working order. The Contractor shall familiarize the Owner's Representative with maintenance and lubrication instructions as prepared by the Contractor and shall explain and fully instruct him relative to operating, servicing, and maintenance of them.
1.14 PIPE AND DUCT OPENINGS AND EQUIPMENT RECESSES:
A. Pipe and duct chases, openings, and equipment recesses shall be provided by others only if shown on architectural or structural drawings. All openings for the mechanical work, except where plans and specifications indicate otherwise, shall be provided as work of this Division.
B. Whether chases, recesses, and openings are provided as work of this Division or by others, this Contractor shall supervise their construction and be responsible for the correct size and location even though detailed and dimensioned on the drawings. This Contractor shall pay for all necessary cutting, repairing, and finishing if any are left out or incorrectly made. All necessary openings thru existing walls, ceilings, floors, roofs, etc. shall be provided by this Contractor unless indicated otherwise by the drawing and/or specifications.
1.15 UNFIT OR DAMAGED WORK:
A. Any part of this installation that fails, is unfit, or becomes damaged during construction, shall be replaced or otherwise made good. The cost of such remedy shall be the responsibility of this Division.
1.16 WORKMANSHIP:
A. Workmanship shall be the best quality of its kind for the respective industries, trades, crafts, and practices, and shall be acceptable in every respect to the Owner's representative. Nothing contained herein shall relieve the Contractor from making good and perfect work in all details in construction.
1.17 SAFETY REGULATION:
A. The Contractor shall comply with all local and OSHA safety requirements in performance with this work. (See General Conditions). This Contractor shall be required to provide equipment, supervision, construction, procedures, and all other necessary items to assure safety to life and property.
1.18 ELECTRICAL SERVICES:
A. Motors: 1. All motors required under this Division shall be furnished and installed as work of this Division. All motor-starting equipment, unless otherwise specified in Division 23 shall be furnished as work of Division 26, Electrical. Motors shall be name plated with Class F insulation as manufactured by Lincoln Electric, US Motors, General Electric, Allis
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0100 - 6 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Chalmers, Century, or Reliance, designed for quiet continuous operations with maximum (Class B) 90oC resistance heating rise with 40oC ambient temperature at full load and rated speed and voltage individually specified with minimum 1.15 service factor. Motors shall be all of the same make except those incorporated in packaged units. All motors shall be provided with ball bearings and conduit connection boxes. Lifting eyes shall be provided on motors 1-1/2 horsepower and larger. 2. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and set all motors, shall give the exact locations of all electrical connections, and shall provide complete information on motor control to the Electrical Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper operation of all electrical power equipment furnished by him. 3. Unless otherwise specified, motors 3/4 horsepower and larger shall be 3 phase, 60 cycle, and motors 1/2 horsepower and smaller shall be single phase, 60 cycle. Refer to fan and equipment schedules on drawings for voltage characteristics, horsepower, size, etc. All single-phase motors shall have thermal overload protection. If motor-starting equipment is included in packaged units, all three phases shall have overload protection. All motors shall have a power factor of 85 percent or better. All motors 20 horsepower and larger shall be manufacturers Premium Efficiency grade and shall meet the NEMA MG 1-12.54" efficiency ratings for energy efficient motors. All two speed motors, unless otherwise specified, shall be 1800/1200 rpm dual winding type. (All 3 phase motors shall be designed and manufactured to be capable of speed control through a variable frequency drive controller. Motors shall be compatible with the furnished VFD controller.) 4. Motors and other electrical control equipment installed in damp or moist areas or in areas of other special conditions shall be designed and approved for the installation. Motors and electrical equipment in explosive locations shall be approved for those locations. Motors located outside buildings shall be totally enclosed.
B. Electric Wiring: 1. Electric power wiring conduit, flexible conduit, outlets, relays, thermal switches, auto-off- on switches, magnetic starters, and disconnecting switches shall be provided and installed under Division 26 "Electrical Work" for all electrical equipment furnished or installed as work of this Division. 2. All equipment control wiring and all automatic temperature control wiring including all necessary contacts, relays, and interlocks, whether low or line voltage, except power wiring, shall be furnished and installed as work of this Division unless shown to be furnished by Division 26. All such wiring shall be in conduit. Installation of any and all wiring done under Division 23 shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 26, Electrical. 3. All equipment that requires an electrical connection shall be furnished so that it will operate properly and deliver full capacity on the electrical service available and also satisfy the requirements under "Motors," as specified above. 4. The Mechanical Contractor must refer to the electrical control equipment and wiring shown on the diagrams. Any changes or additions required by specific equipment furnished shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor furnishing the equipment. 5. The Mechanical Contractor must coordinate with the Electrical Contractor to insure that all required components of control work are included and fully understood. No additional cost shall accrue to the Owner as a result of lack of such coordination.
1.19 WORK, MATERIALS, AND QUALITY OF EQUIPMENT:
A. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and of the best quality of their respective kinds and all labor shall be done in a most thorough and workmanlike manner.
B. All mechanical equipment shall be listed, labeled, and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0100 - 7 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
C. Products or equipment of any of the manufacturers cited herein or any of the products approved by the Addenda may be used. However, where lists of products are cited herein, the one first listed in the design equipment used in drawings and schedules to establish size, quality, function, and capacity standards. If other than design equipment is used, it shall be carefully checked for access to equipment, physical dimensions shall fit within existing structure, electrical and control requirements, valving, and piping. Should changes or additions occur in piping, valving, electrical work, etc., or if the work of other Contractors would be revised by the alternate equipment, the cost of all changes shall be borne as work of this Division.
D. Pipe of foreign manufacture will not be acceptable.
E. The access to equipment shown on the drawings is the minimum acceptable space requirements. No equipment that reduces or restricts accessibility to this or any other equipment will be considered.
F. All major items of equipment are specified in the equipment schedules on the drawings or in these specifications and shall be furnished complete with all accessories normally supplied with the catalog item listed and all other accessories necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation.
G. All mechanics shall be capable journeymen, skilled in the work assigned to them. No one unskilled in the work which he is given to do shall be employed, and all work shall be executed in a skillful and workmanlike manner. All men employed upon this work shall be competent, faithful, orderly, and satisfactory to the Owner.
H. All welders shall be certified in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, latest Edition.
1.20 PROTECTION AGAINST WEATHER AND STORING OF MATERIALS:
A. All equipment and materials shall be properly stored and protected against moisture, dust, and wind. Coverings or other protection shall be used on all items that may be damaged or rusted or may have performance impaired by adverse weather or moisture conditions. Damage or defect developing before acceptance of the work shall be made good at the Contractor's expense.
B. All open duct and pipe openings shall be adequately covered at all times.
1.21 INSTALLATION CHECK:
A. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer or supplier of each item of equipment indicated in the equipment schedule shall visit the site of the work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. In each case, the equipment supplier's representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation. The equipment supplier's representative shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation is satisfactory to the Engineer.
B. Each equipment supplier's representative shall furnish to the Owner, through the Engineer, a written report certifying that the equipment (1) has been properly installed and lubricated; (2) is in accurate alignment; (3) is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; and, (4) has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily.
C. All costs for this work shall be included in the prices quoted by equipment suppliers.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0100 - 8 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.22 EQUIPMENT LUBRICATION:
A. The Contractor shall properly lubricate all pieces of equipment before turning the building over to the Owner. A linen tag shall be attached to each piece of equipment, showing the date of lubrication and the lubricant used. No equipment shall be started until it is properly lubricated. The contractor shall give 48 hours notice prior to the completion of the lubrication so that the owner and engineer may verify.
B. Necessary time shall be spent with the Owner's Representative to thoroughly familiarize him with all necessary lubrications and maintenance that will be required of him.
C. Detergent oil as used for automotive purposes shall not be used for this work.
1.23 CUTTING AND PATCHING:
A. No cutting or drilling in structural members shall be done without written approval of the Architect. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other surfaces necessary for the mechanical work shall be carefully done. Any damage to building, piping, or equipment shall be repaired by professional plasterers, masons, concrete workers, etc., and all such work shall be paid for as work of this Division.
B. When concrete, grading, etc., is disturbed, it shall be restored to original condition as described in the applicable Division of this Specification.
1.24 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING:
A. All necessary excavations and backfilling for the Mechanical phase of this project shall be provided as work of this Division. Work shall conform to Division 2, Site Work. Trenches for all underground pipelines shall be excavated to the required depths.
B. The bottom of trenches shall be compacted hard and graded to obtain required fall. All underground piping shall be bedded upon 6" layer of sand. The sand shall be graded to provide proper pipe slope. After pipe is placed the pipe shall be covered with a 12" layer of sand. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers, not exceeding 12 inches in thickness, and properly moistened. Each layer shall be compacted, by suitable equipment, to a density of not less than 95 percent as determined by ASTM D-1557. After pipelines have been tested, inspected, and approved, the trench shall be backfilled with selected material. Excess earth shall be hauled from the job site. Fill materials approved by the Architect shall be provided as work of this Division.
C. No trenches shall be cut near or under any footings without consultation first with the Architect's office. Any trenches or excavations more than 30 inches deep shall be tapered, shored, covered, or otherwise made absolutely safe so that no vehicle or persons can be injured by falling into such excavations, or in any way be harmed by cave-ins, shifting earth, rolling rocks, or by drowning. This protection shall be extended to all persons approaching excavation related to this work whether or not such persons are authorized to be in the vicinity of the construction.
D. Existing utility locations shown on plans are to be field verified by the contractor for completeness and location. Contractor shall utilize utility locating services of Blue Stakes of Utah 811 prior to beginning any work. The Contractor shall protect from damage all existing underground utilities or utility tunnels indicated on the contract drawings (or field located for the Contractor by the Owner prior to excavation operations). Any damage to such existing utilities or utility tunnels shall be repaired by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. Any
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0100 - 9 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
damage to existing utilities not indicated on the contract drawings or designated by the Owner prior to excavating operations shall be repaired by the Contractor but shall be paid for by the Owner.
E. Material shall be stockpiled on the site in a location directed by the architect. Any surplus or unsatisfactory material may be used for other material needs if deemed appropriate for the use per the contract specifications. Any native material used for backfill of trenches shall be 4"diameter or smaller and free of vegetation and debris.
1.25 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS:
A. All access doors in walls or hung ceilings in the building construction shown on drawings for access to mechanical equipment such as valves, dampers, etc., that are not specified under other Divisions of these specifications shall be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor. All access doors shall be hinged and constructed of metal with a screwdriver latch painted to match surrounding surfaces. All access panels, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, shall be 24 inches by 24 inches. Installations shall be neat in final appearance. Access doors shall be fire rated where required.
1.26 V-BELT DRIVES:
A. V-belt drives shall be of fabric and rubber construction of approved manufacture. Multiple belts shall be matches and all belts shall be adjusted to drive the apparatus properly and to prevent slippage and undue wear in starting. Drives shall be designed for 150 percent of the specified motor nameplate rating. Belt guards shall be provided for all exposed belts and drives.
1.27 FLASHING:
A. All pipes, ducts and roof drains which penetrate roofs or exterior walls shall be flashed and sealed watertight under this Division of the specifications. All plumbing vents shall be extended to not less than 12 inches above the roof. Roof flashings shall be furnished by this Contractor and installed by the Roofing Contractor. Flashings shall be of the type required by the Roofing Contractor. Flashings shall be of the size required by the Roofing Contractor and shall extend horizontally not less than 12 inches all around. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install flashings for all services and shall flash and counterflash all ducts and through roofs and exterior walls. Existing penetrations thru the exterior envelope that are not to be re-used shall be capped and sealed weather-tight.
1.28 SEALING:
A. Pipe, conduit or duct and sleeve penetrations through fire rated floors and walls shall be sealed with Dow Corning 3-6548 Silicone RTV Foam or an approved equal. Refer to the manufacturers application guide specifications to determine proper installation procedures.
B. Pipe, conduit or duct and sleeve penetrations through non-fire rated floors and walls shall be sealed with Pecora butyl rubber BC-158 or an approved equal. Spaces greater than 1/4" wide must first be backed with a compressible foam backer rod and then caulked.
C. Pipe, conduit or duct and sleeve penetrations through below grade foundation walls shall be sealed with Vulkem polyurethane #116 or an approved equal. Spaces greater than 1/4" wide must first be backed with a compressible foam backer rod and then caulked.
D. After stubbing and/or caulking, all openings are to be thoroughly taped with heavy plastic or butyl duct tape to prevent sound passage.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0100 - 10 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
E. Waterproof sleeves shall be provided on all piping penetrations through the exterior foundation walls.
F. Installation of fire rated wall penetration sealants shall be in accordance with UL designs and recommendations. Sealant manufacturer shall provide UL designs details with submittals.
1.29 CLEANING AND PAINTING:
A. Cleaning: 1. After all tests and adjustments have been made and all systems pronounced satisfactory for permanent operation, this Contractor shall clean all exposed piping, ductwork, insulated members, fixture, and equipment installed under this Section and leave them ready for painting. He shall refinish any damaged finish and leave everything in proper working order. The Contractor shall remove all stains or grease marks on walls, floors, glass, hardware, fixtures, or elsewhere, caused by his workman or for which he is responsible. He shall remove all stickers on plumbing fixtures, do all required patching up and repair all work of others damaged by this division of the work, and leave the premises in a clean and orderly condition.
B. Painting: 1. Painting of exposed pipe, insulated pipe, ducts, or equipment inside of the building is work of Division 9, Painting. Painting of exposed pipe outside is work of this section. All pipe exposed to the outdoors shall be painted for rust protection. Pipe, equipment, and duct identification is work of Section 230150. 2. Mechanical Contractor: All equipment which is to be furnished in factory prefinished conditions by the mechanical Contractor shall be left without mark, scratch, or impairment to finish upon completion of job. Any necessary refinishing to match original shall be done. Do not paint over nameplates, serial numbers, or other identifying marks.
C. Removal of Debris, Etc: 1. Upon completion of this division of the work, remove all surplus material and rubbish resulting from this work, and leave the premises in a clean and orderly condition.
D. No Smoking: 1. There shall be no smoking anywhere inside the building after any wall coverings, ceiling grid, flooring, etc has been installed. If smoking occurs in the building, contractor shall be responsible for fees incurred for cleaning & re-placement / removal of equipment and materials damaged including re-installation.
1.30 CONTRACT COMPLETION:
A. Incomplete and Unacceptable Work: 1. If additional site visits or design work is required by the Engineer or Architect because of the use of incomplete or unacceptable work by the Contractor, then the Contractor shall reimburse the Engineer and Architect for all additional time and expenses involved. 2. Maintenance Instructions: 3. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner complete printed and illustrated operating and maintenance instructions covering all units of mechanical equipment, together with parts lists. This maintenance manual shall be furnished as work of Section 230150.
B. Instructions To Owner's Representatives:
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0100 - 11 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. In addition to any detailed instructions called for, the mechanical Contractor must provide, without expense to the Owner, competent instructors to train the Owner's representatives who will be in charge of the apparatus and equipment, in the care, adjustment, and operation of all parts on the heating, air conditioning, ventilating, plumbing, and automatic temperature control equipment. Instruction dates shall be scheduled at time of final inspection. A written report specifying times, dates, and name of personnel instructed shall be forwarded to the Architect. A minimum of three 8-hour instruction periods shall be provided. The instruction periods will be broken down to shorter periods when requested by the Owner. The total instruction hours shall not reduced. The ATC Contractor shall provide additional hours of instructions as specified in the ATC specifications.
C. Guarantee: 1. By the acceptance of any contract award for the work herein described or shown on the drawings, the Contractor assumes the full responsibility imposed by the guarantee as set forth herein and in the General Conditions, and should protect himself through proper guarantees from equipment and special equipment Contractors and from subContractors as their interests may appear. 2. The guarantee so assumed by the Contractor and as work of this Section is as follows: 3. That the entire mechanical system, including plumbing, heating, and air-conditioning system shall be quiet in operation. 4. That the circulation of water shall be complete and even. 5. That all pipes, conduit, and connections shall be perfectly free from foreign matter and pockets and that all other obstructions to the free passage of air, water, liquid, sewage, and vent shall be removed. 6. That he shall make promptly and free of charge, upon notice from the Owner, any necessary repairs due to defective workmanship or materials that may occur during a period of (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. 7. That all specialties, mechanical, and patent devices incorporated in these systems shall be adjusted in a manner that each shall develop its maximum efficiency in the operation of the system; i.e., diffusers shall deliver the designed amount of air shown on drawings, thermostats shall operate to the specified limits, etc. 8. All equipment and the complete mechanical system shall be guaranteed for a period of (2) years from the date of the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion. Any equipment supplier not willing to comply with this guarantee period shall not submit a bid price for this project. The Contractor shall be responsible for a 100-percent guarantee for the system and all items of equipment for this period. 9. All filters used during construction shall be replaced just before equipment is turned over to the Owner, and all required equipment and parts shall be oiled. Any worn parts shall also be replaced.
1.31 TEST RUN:
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall operate the mechanical system for a minimum of 10 days to prove the operation of the system. After the owner takes occupancy, the Temperature Control Contractor shall provide a temperature (0 to 200 degrees F) and pressure (0 to 12 inches w.g.) recorder and record in areas so designated by the Design Engineer.
B. During the beginning and last day of the 10 day test run, the Temperature Control Contractor shall record the temperature settings of all room thermostats. These recordings will be provided to the owner in a report.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0100 - 12 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.32 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT:
A. Structural engineering requirements including load support verification of structural members shall be the responsibility of the mechanical contractor. Contractor is responsible for supporting the mechanical equipment (i.e. pipes, ducts, fans, etc.) Mechanical equipment shall not be supported from the roof. Mechanical equipment shall be supported from the top cord of the roof joists. Intermediate beams, unistruts, etc. shall be secured to the roof joists at locations approved by structural engineer. Contractor shall provide and install all materials necessary to adequately support the mechanical equipment. Connection types (i.e. weldings, clips, etc.) shall be in accordance with structural engineer recommendations. Contractor shall be responsible for support sizing, locations, and types and shall coordinate with job site conditions. Contractor shall comply with structural drawings and specification.
B. All equipment shall be independently supported from the structure so that it is not depending on the ceiling for support.
C. Roof:
1. All roof mounted equipment shall be a minimum of 10'-0" from roof edges, walls, parapets, etc. All exhaust, relief, vents and intake locations shall be carefully coordinated to prevent cross contamination of intakes. Exhaust and vents shall be a minimum of 25'- 0" from intakes, further if possible.
1.33 FACTORY START UP:
A. All major pieces of equipment shall receive a factory startup by the respective manufacturer’s representative. The owner and the engineer shall be notified 48 hours prior to the commencement of any factory start up so that the owner and/or their agent may be on site for verification of work. The contractor shall include the factory start up reports in the O & M manuals. A copy shall also be sent to the engineer.
B. The following list of equipment shall receive a factory start up:
1. Package Rooftop Units (make-up air units) 2. Exhaust Fans 3. Electric Unit heaters 4. Duct furnaces
C. Substantial Completion:
D. Before requesting substantial completion the Mechanical Contractor shall complete the following:
1. Certificates of compliance from all authorities having jurisdiction, i.e. Boiler inspector for gas fired equipment, compressors, etc. 2. O and M Manuals to be completed and turned into the architect. 3. Factory start up of equipment completed and reports included in the O and M Manuals. 4. Seismic representative final review and report confirming compliance included in the O and M Manuals. 5. Water sterilization completed and report included in the O and M Manuals.
E. Mechanical Equipment Support
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0100 - 13 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Mechanical equipment and large pipes shall be supported by additional framing members as shown in the contract documents. The supplier is responsible for providing supporting anchors which are embedded in the additional members and which have adequate capacity to support the loads. Provide a level concrete pad for mechanical equipment exterior to the building. Contractor to verify thickness and construction of the concrete pad shall meet structural load requirements & seismic requirements.
END OF SECTION 23 0100
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0100 - 14 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 23 0150
BALANCING, MAINTENANCE MANUALS, AND IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. All pertinent sections of Section 230100, Division 23, are a part of the work described in this section. Division 1 is a part of this and all other sections of these specifications.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This work shall include the final adjustment, balancing, and identification of all mechanical systems. The work of this section shall include but not be limited to the following.
B. Identification of piping, ductwork, and equipment furnished and installed as work of Division 23.
C. Tagging of all valves and controls furnished and installed as work of Division 23.
D. Balancing and adjustments of the plumbing, heating, air-conditioning, and ventilating systems furnished and installed as work of Division 23.
E. Supervision of start-up and commissioning of all systems and equipment furnished and installed as work of Division 23.
F. Submission of Operating and Maintenance Manuals complete with balancing and system commissioning reports.
G. Coordination of work involving other contractors essential to the final balancing of the system and supervision of the adjustments.
H. Testing of smoke evacuation/pressurization systems for proper air movement and pressure relationships.
I. 48 hours notice shall be given to the owner and the engineer prior to the commencement of the testing and balancing work and 48 hours prior to the completion of work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1 and Section 230100. Submit the following:
Name and qualifications of Balancing Contractor. Name of certifying affiliation or certifying Professional Engineer. Samples of pipe, duct, and equipment identification. Sample test and balancing data forms. Sample of O & M manual outline and description of binder. System commissioning procedures and check list.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 1 BALANCING, MAINTENANCE MANUALS, AND IDENTIFICATION
1.4 IDENTIFICATION:
A. Pipe and Duct Identification: 1. Identification of piping and ducts shall be done with "Brady" or "Westline" labels. The color coding shall comply with OSHA ANSI Safety Color Coding Regulations. The means of identification shall be color coded band and an identifying legend to indicate the contents of the pipe and a direction of flow arrow. 2. The identifying color coded bands, legends, and directional arrows on piping and duct systems shall be located adjacent to each valve, at every point of entry and exit where piping or ducts pass through a wall or ceiling, on each riser and junction, every 50 feet on long continuous lines and adjacent to all special fittings (regulating valves, etc.). 3. Legends shall be applied on the color band on the perimeter of the pipe in a location that will be readily visible to operating personnel from the floor in the area.
B. Existing labels that are no longer accurate shall be removed by the contractor.
C. Color coding shall follow ANSI standards:
Background Identifying Material Color Legend Lettering
Domestic cold Green Domestic Cold Water White Domestic soft hot Yellow Domestic Soft Hot Water Black Domestic soft hot return White Domestic Soft Hot Water Return Black Natural Gas Yellow Natural Gas Black Plumbing Vent - Plumbing Vent -
D. Identification of all ductwork, piping, and equipment located above ceilings, either accessible or non-accessible, shall be completed before any ceilings are installed.
E. Equipment Identification: 1. Except for individual room heating units and items furnished under Temperature Control, all items of mechanical equipment, including fans, pumps, and electrical switches and starters for mechanical equipment and gauges shall be labeled. 2. Information on labels shall include the following: a. Identification number and name. Generally, this number and name shall be the same as that shown on the drawings or in these specifications. b. If the item is a fan or pump, the flow and head shall be indicated. c. If the item is part of a unit, the label shall have, in addition to its item number, the number of the main item it is serving. d. Valves shall be tagged with the area served and their normal operating positions shall be indicated. e. Where the main unit served by the valve is apparent, only the valve function needs to be included on the nameplate. 3. The types of nameplates shall be as follows: a. Valve tags shall be 1/2-inch embossed aluminum tapes with identification on one side for valves. Tags for magnetic starters shall be screwed to the metal starter cover. Tags shall be Addressograph No. B-5300. b. Equipment nameplates shall be black faced formica with white engraved lettering at least 3/16 inch high. 4. Valve tags shall be connected to valve stems by steel rings or chains. Screws shall be used for equipment labels. 5. Prior to installation, the contractor shall submit to the engineer a complete list of all valves and each item of equipment to be identified with the proposed identification.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 2 BALANCING, MAINTENANCE MANUALS, AND IDENTIFICATION
1.5 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:
A. Work under this section shall be performed by the contractor performing the system testing and balancing or by a Registered Professional Mechanical Engineer that has had previous experience in the writing of these manuals. Preliminary review copy of O & M to be provided at midpoint of construction schedule. Final review copy to be provided at the 75% construction schedule point. The final four (4) copies of the manuals shall be furnished to the Architect for distribution to the owner prior to contractor receiving substantial completion.
B. The "Start-Up and Operation" section is one of the most important in the manual. Information in this section shall be complete and accurately written and shall be verified with the actual equipment on the job, such as switches, starters, relays, automatic controls, etc. A step-by-step start-up procedure shall be described.
C. The manuals shall include Air-balancing reports, water-balancing reports, system commissioning procedures, start-up tests and reports, equipment and system performance test reports, warranties, and certificates of training given to the owners representatives.
D. The operating and maintenance manuals shall be as follows: 1. Binders shall be red buckram with easy-view metal for size 8-1/2 x 11-inch sheets, with capacity expandable from 2 inches to 3-1/2 inches as required for the project. Construction shall be rivet-through with library corners. No. 12 backbone and lining shall be the same material as the cover. The front cover and backbone shall be foil-stamped in white as follows:
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR THE (INSERT NAME HERE, NAME TO BE PROVIDED BY ARCHITECT)
(INSERT YEAR OF COMPLETION)
HKS Van Boerum & Frank Associates, Inc. Architects Consulting Engineers
2. Binders shall be a manufactured by Hiller Bookbinding.
E. An index sheet typed on AICO Gold-Line indexes shall be provided in the front of the binder. The manual shall be organized as follows:
SECTION I: START-UP AND OPERATION
FORWARD
START-UP PROCEDURE AND OPERATION OF SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION TABLE
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION, INTERLOCK AND CONTROL DIAGRAMS, AND CONTROL PANELS.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 3 BALANCING, MAINTENANCE MANUALS, AND IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 2: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE BULLETINS
ITEM MANUFACTURER VENDOR TELEPHONE
A. AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
B. SPECIALIZED EQUIPMENT
C. PLUMBING AND HEATING SPECIALTIES
D. HEATING AND VENTILATING EQUIPMENT
SECTION 3: MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION REFERENCE TABLE
SECTION 4: AIR AND WATER SYSTEM BALANCING REPORTS
SECTION 5: EQUIPMENT WARRANTIES AND TRAINING CERTIFICATES
SECTION 6: SYSTEM COMMISSIONING REPORTS
System commissioning report
Equipment start-up certificates
1.6 SYSTEM AIR AND WATER BALANCE:
A. These systems shall be balanced and adjusted by person or persons fully familiar with mechanical systems of the type specified in this Division and whose main business is the balancing and adjustment of mechanical systems.
B. Contractors approved to do this work are Temp-co, Certified Test and Balance and Bonneville Testing and Balancing. The balancing contractor must either be certified by NEBB, AABC, or must have all data, procedures, reports, etc. certified by a licensed Professional Mechanical Engineer actively engaged in the heating and air-conditioning field, who shall supervise the work.
C. The testing and balancing subcontractor shall have the necessary experienced personnel and equipment to accomplish the work. Upon request, the testing and balancing subcontractor shall furnish a list of at least (10) ten separate buildings of comparable size and system types to this project which have been balanced by this subcontractor.
D. Prior to commencement of the testing and balancing, the mechanical system shall be properly commissioned and ready for operation. Representatives of the equipment manufacturers shall have previously visited the project to verify that their equipment is ready for operation.
E. Reports shall be well organized and shall indicate design and measured valves, percent of design valves, items not yet complete, issues preventing completion, items needing contractor attention, controls completion status, etc.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 4 BALANCING, MAINTENANCE MANUALS, AND IDENTIFICATION
F. Seven (7) copies of this report shall be furnished so that one can be included in each Operating and Maintenance Manual and one copy is to be furnished to the Mechanical Engineer.
G. Start up reports shall be submitted for review prior to any test and balancing work performed.
1.7 ADJUSTMENT OF AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS:
A. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assign the foreman or mechanic who installed the sheet-metal air-handling systems to assist in the air-balancing work.
B. Fresh air dampers shall be set to their minimum positions as called for in the Temperature Control Specification.
C. All filters shall be clean and all room doors shall be closed during the balancing procedure.
D. All supply and exhaust air fans shall be running.
E. All dampers shall be in a correct orientation.
F. An initial volume reading of each supply fan shall be taken with a pitot tube and draft gauge.
G. The Contractor shall measure rpm and adjust the sheaves of all fans to handle design quantity of air. He shall check and record motor amperage. The drives shall be changed as required, at the Contractor's expense, to provide the specified air quantities.
H. Test and record motor full load amperes.
I. A pressure test shall be made to verify the proper air flow from clean areas toward less clean areas.
J. Make a pitot tube traverse of main supply and exhaust ducts and adjust systems to obtain design CFM at fans to within 5% of design quantities.
K. Test and record static pressures, suction and discharge.
L. Test and record entering and leaving air temperatures at all fans (D.B. heating), including existing equipment to be reused and new equipment.
M. Adjust all main supply, return and exhaust air ducts to proper design CFM.
N. Adjust all zones to design CFM, supply, return and exhaust.
O. Adjust all registers, grilles and diffusers to deliver design cfm plus or minus 10 percent of design requirements.
P. All tests and readings shall include required FPM and CFM, initial FPM and CFM and final FPM and CFM after adjustments. All adjustments shall be made to minimize drafts.
Q. The Temperature Control Contractor shall have a mechanic available to the personnel adjusting the air system for assistance in adjusting any defective control devices.
R. Final Adjustment:
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 5 BALANCING, MAINTENANCE MANUALS, AND IDENTIFICATION
1. This Contractor shall be responsible for the final balancing and adjustment of all mechanical systems with necessary adjustments being made to provide a satisfactory system. If adjustments are required to produce other than conditions shown on the drawings because of job conditions, then these adjustments shall be made without extra costs. 2. The pressure taps, access openings, etc., necessary to balance the system, shall be installed by other Mechanical Contractors where directed by this Contractor. 3. The Balancing Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect, in writing, if any item of equipment, diffusers, grilles, etc., fails to operate within 5 percent of its specified capacity at the completion of the balancing of the system. 4. The report submitted by this contractor shall be certified to be correct by a Mechanical Engineer licensed in the State of Utah, who has originally been approved by the Architect. The reports shall be submitted to the General Contractor and he shall submit them to the Architect for review before submitting them to the Owner.
1.8 DUCT SYSTEM TEST:
A. All ductwork shall be leak tested according to the requirements of the SMACNA Duct Manual. Test equipment shall include rotary blower, straightening vanes, calibrated orifice, draft gauges, and corresponding leakage curve for orifice used. Duct leakage shall be limited to a maximum of ten (10) percent of the total system capacity. A soap test will be applied to connections and joints to locate leaks. All audible leaks shall be sealed. The Project Engineer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of each test. A written test report indicating test pressure, pressure drop across orifice, corresponding flow, percent of total flow, and conversion chart for orifice shall be submitted for each test section. All leaks shall be sealed.
1.9 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING:
A. The contractor shall be responsible for developing a procedure for commissioning all equipment and systems furnished and installed as part of work of Division 23. This procedure shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. The commissioning procedure shall include a critical path chart showing the work to be performed, at which stage of construction the commissioning procedure should be performed, and the contractor who will perform the procedure. The following are the minimum requirements for commissioning.
B. The test and balance contractor shall be responsible to demonstrate as required the water and air measurements for the mechanical equipment on the project. The test and balance contractor shall make a technician available for review of the mechanical equipment after the system has been tested and balanced by the test and balance contractor prior to the completion of the project.
C. The 100% complete test and balance reports shall be fully reviewed by the certified personnel responsible for the project, the report shall be signed by the certified person and shall be submitted in a final, typed format (handwritten reports not acceptable) a minimum of 2 days prior to the commencement of the final inspection.
D. General Items: Bearings Lubricated Rotation Correct and Free Correct Thermal Overload Protection Shipping Restraints Removed Equipment Secured in Place Equipment Clean and Free of Debris Vibration Isolators Correctly Located with Proper Springs Motors Not Overloaded
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 6 BALANCING, MAINTENANCE MANUALS, AND IDENTIFICATION
E. Life Safety Items: All smoke alarm and fire alarm fan shutdowns. All systems Complete Tested and Signed Off by All Appropriate Authorities
F. O & M Items O & M Manuals Prepared Pipe and Equipment Identified Valves Tagged Schematic Drawings Provided Instruction of Operating Personnel Equipment Nameplates Clean and Accessible
G. Duct System Ductwork Clean Access Door Tightly Closed, Gasketed with Proper Hardware Balancing Dampers in Place, Open and Locked with Accessible Operators All Terminals in Place Minimum Allowable Duct Leakage has been Tested and Verified Minimum Friction and Dynamic Loss Openings in Walls and Shafts for Air Transfer Insulation Completed Access doors installed
H. Fans Correct V-Belt Drive Installed V-Belt Drive Aligned Drive Screws and Keyways Tight Proper Belt Tension Flexible Connection Properly Installed Belt Guards in Place Minimum of Negative System Effect
I. Filters Clean, Specified Cells Installed No Bypass Around Filters Filter Gauge Installed and Calibrated Spare Cells on Site Retaining Clips in Place
J. Automatic Control System
Control System in Operation All Controls Installed Controls Set and Calibrated Control Sequence Verified (can be a part of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing) Tight Closing Smooth Operation Full Stroking
K. Equipment Checkout
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 7 BALANCING, MAINTENANCE MANUALS, AND IDENTIFICATION
Verify that installed equipment is same as equipment approved in shop drawings or specifications.
L. Piping Systems
All Service and Balancing Valves in Place and Open Air Vents in Place Expansion Tank Properly Located and Charged with Air No Leakage Thermometer Wells in Place and Properly Located Insulation Completed Pressure/Temperature Taps Installed System Completely Filled and Static Pressure Proper System Thoroughly Flushed and Clean Start Up Strainers Removed Permanent Strainers with Proper Sleeves Strainer Sleeves Clean Strainers Piped for Easy Removal of Sleeves. Service Valves in Place. No Insulation over Caps. Dirt Pockets Installed Flow Meters in Place. Proper Flow Direction. Gauge Tappings Turned Up. Correct Piping Length from Disturbances. Nameplate Accessible
M. Pumps
Motors Aligned and Secured Couplings Secured Flexible Connections Correct Pressure Gauge Properly Piped Minimum of Negative System Effect
END OF SECTION 23 0150
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 8 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 23 0200 INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. All pertinent sections of Section 230100, Division 23, are a part of the work described in this section. Division 1 is a part of this and all other sections of these specifications.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. This work shall include but not be limited to the installation of a complete thermal and acoustic insulation system, including the following:
B. Covering for all culinary hot water, recirculating hot water and cold water piping and equipment insulation.
C. All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the National Insulation Contractors Association.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1 and Section 230100. Submit the following:
Pipe Insulation Duct Insulation Equipment Insulation Cements and Finishes Application Procedures
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS:
A. Fiberglass insulation shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 547 as manufactured by Manville, Certain-Teed, KNAUF, or Owens-Corning. Calcium silicate insulation shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 533, as manufactured by Manville, Owens-Corning, or Pabco.
B. Flexible unicellular insulation shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 534, as manufactured by IMCOA/IMCOLOCK, IMCOA/IMCOSHIELD, Armstrong, Halstead, or Rubatex.
2.2 SMOKE BURNING CHARACTERISTICS:
A. Insulation materials, adhesives, coatings and other accessories shall have burning characteristics as determined by ASTM and IBC shall have a flame spread and smoke contribution as follows: 1. All batting insulation shall have a flame spread of 0 to 25 and a smoke contribution of 0 to 50.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0200 - 1 INSULATION
2. All foam plastic insulation shall have a flame spread of 0 to 75 and a smoke contribution of 0 to 50. 3. Pipe and tubing insulation shall have a flame spread of 0 to 25 and a smoke contribution of 0 to 50. 4. Duct insulation shall have a flame spread of 0 to 25 and a smoke contribution of 0 to 50.
2.3 DOMESTIC WATER:
A. All domestic hot water and cold water piping shall be covered with Owens-Corning ASJ-25 fiberglass pipe insulation with vapor seal jacket. Insulation thickness shall be 1” for all cold water piping. Insulation thickness shall be 1" for hot water and tempered water piping. Insulation thickness for all recirculating hot water shall be 1/2”. Fittings shall be similarly insulated with a fiberglass blanket insulation covered with a pre-molded PVC cover.
2.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the Manufacturer and National Insulation Contractors Association, MICA.
B. Pipe Insulation: 1. Prior to application of insulating materials, surfaces to be insulated shall be brushed clean and made free from rust, scale, grease, dirt, and other deleterious materials. Insulation shall be installed to facilitate removal for making repairs. Insulation sections or blocks shall be placed so the least possible damage to insulation will result from inspection or repair of piping or equipment to which it is applied. 2. Wherever a leak from a valve or other source might drip onto an insulated surface, the surface shall be protected with 22-gauge aluminum band rolled up at the ends and large enough to prevent dripping or splashing on surrounding areas. 3. See Section 230300 for insulated protective hangers supplied and installed by the Mechanical Contractor. For all insulated piping not installed with pre-insulated pipe supports, this contractor shall install high density inserts (calcium silicate) as shown in detail A on Plate No. 6 of MICA insulation standards at each pipe support or hanger. Provide metal shield under hanger. On hot pipe, apply three-inch wide vapor barrier type or band over the butt joints between pipe insulation and pre-insulated hanger. On cold water, chiller water or other cold fluid piping, apply a wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on all butt joints and seal the joints with a minimum of three-inch wide vapor barrier tape or band. 4. Insofar as possible, pipe insulation shall be applied in sectional form. When segmental form is used, segments shall be fit to curved surfaces to which they are applied. All joints shall be carefully pointed with cement. A thin finishing coat of insulating cement and OCF fitting mastic shall be applied on segmental forms of covering to present a smooth, even surface. Calcium silicate insulation shall be installed in staggered pattern and shall be wired in place at 9 inches on center with 16 ga wire. 5. Insulation shall be continuous thru walls and partitions. Fire stopping shall be installed at all rated wall penetrations. Refer to Division 7 and Section 230100. 6. All piping exposed to the weather shall be covered with a 0.024 thick embossed aluminum jacket pop-riveted and banded at 12 inches on center. All joints shall be caulked and sealed watertight with a suitable silicone sealant. All seams shall be located on the bottom of the pipe away from the weather. 7. Insulation shall not be applied over flanged joints until piping has been brought up to operating temperature and flange bolts have been fully tightened. 8. For all hot and non-cold fluid systems, insulation shall be beveled to expose all flanges, unions, valves, strainers and special accessories. Raw ends of insulation shall covered with finishing cement to provide a smooth water proof surface.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0200 - 2 INSULATION
C. Duct Wrap Insulation: 1. Rectangular Ducts not lined shall be wrapped. Duct wrap shall be Owens-Corning Fiberglass FRIL type IV Ductwrap, 1-1/2" thick, with vapor barrier foil reinforced kraft facing overlapped 2" at joints. 2. All round ducts are wrapped except where ducts are exposed to view or are shown lined as indicated on the plans. 3. Insulation shall be wrapped tightly on the duct with all circumferential joints butted and longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of 2 inches. Insulation shall be adhered to metal with 4-inch strips of insulation bonding adhesive at 8 inches o.c. and taped with foil- reinforced kraft tape not less than 3 inches wide. the same method shall be used for longitudinal joints. All pin penetrations or punctures in facing shall also be taped. All joints shall be covered with foil-reinforced kraft tape 3 inches wide.
D. Testing and Approval: 1. No pipe insulation shall be applied until the piping has been pressure checked and approved. No exterior duct insulation shall be applied until the ducts have been inspected and approved. All insulation shall be applied strictly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION 23 0200
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0200 - 3 INSULATION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0200 - 4 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 23 0300
PIPING SYSTEMS, SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 All pertinent sections of Section 230100, Division 23, are a part of the work described in this section. Division 1 is a part of this and all other sections of these specifications.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. This work includes furnishing all labor and materials to complete all piping systems including piping specialties and valves for the HVAC and plumbing systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1 and Section 230100. Submit the following:
1. Pipe, couplings, and fittings 2. Valves 3. Hangers and insulated pipe supports 4. Specialty Items
1.4 PIPE AND FITTINGS:
A. NO PIPE OF A FOREIGN MANUFACTURER WILL BE ACCEPTABLE.
B. All piping, fittings, flanges, etc. shall be free from defects and shall comply with the appropriate ASTM specifications.
1. Black and Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 ERW Grade B, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) or Extra Strong (Schedule 80) as specified.
2. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L or K as specified. 3. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A74 4. Welded Black Steel Fittings: ASTM A234 Grade B, 150-pound for Standard Weight Piping, 300-pound for Extra Strong Piping, or of weight or Schedule of matching piping. 5. Threaded Malleable Iron Fittings: ANSI B16.3, 150-pound for Standard Weight Piping, 300-pound for Extra Strong Piping, or of weight or Schedule of matching piping either black or galvanized to match piping. 6. Welded Flanges: ASTM A181 Grade B, 150-pound for Standard Weight Piping, 300- pound for Extra Strong Piping or of equal weight of connected equipment. 7. Copper Fittings: Wrought Copper, ANSI specification B16.22.
C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Cellular Core DWV plastic pipe: ASTM F891 Schedule 40, plain ends.
D. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings: ASTM D1785 Class 150 with ASTM D2853 solvent cement joints unless otherwise specified.
E. Domestic hot water, hot water return, and cold water piping shall be type L or K hard tempered copper pipe with wrought-copper fittings using 95-5 solder. Standard weight galvanized steel
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0300 - 1 PIPING SYSTEMS, SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
pipe with galvanized malleable iron screwed fittings or mechanical grooved galvanized iron fittings may be used in lieu of copper on sizes 3-inches and larger.
F. Domestic hot and cold water piping buried below grade shall be Type K soft tempered (annealed) copper without fittings or joints and covered with IMCOA Imcoshield unicellular insulation. Install piping in PVC sleeve.
G. All Soil, waste, & vent piping above grade shall be standard weight cast iron with no hub couplings.
H. All Soil, waste, vent, piping below grade shall be standard weight cast iron with no hub couplings or PVC. No pipe of a foreign manufacturer will be acceptable. All piping, fittings, flanges, etc. shall be free from defects and shall comply with ASTM D1785 Class 150 with ASTm D2853 solvent cement joints.
I. All necessary transition fittings shall be provided as necessary to accommodate any mixing of piping materials.
J. Gas piping in the building and not buried shall be standard weight black steel pipe. Pipe 2-inch and smaller shall have either welded or screwed fittings. Pipe 2-1/2" or larger shall have welded fittings. All gas piping shall be installed in accordance with IFG Code, Dominion Energy requirements and regulations.
K. Paint all exterior exposed gas piping with two coats of rust resistant paint.
1.5 PIPE COUPLINGS:
A. Flanges and Gaskets:
1. All flanges, gaskets and bolting materials shall comply with ANSI B31-9. 2. Flanges: Forged steel, ASTM A181 Grade II, ANSI Specification B16.5 flanges for a working pressure at 150 psi, welding neck with 1/16" raised face, except where mating to flat faced valves or equipment, in which case flat face shall be used. 3. Flange Gaskets: Full faced or flat ring, to suit flange facings, compressed non-asbestos with synthetic rubber binder, 1/16" thick. 4. Flange Bolting: Bolts, studs, and washers shall be carbon steel, ASTM A-307, Grade B, with heavy hex heads. Nuts shall be heavy hexagon series alloy steel, ASTM A-194, Grade 1 or better. All bolts and nuts shall be cadmium or zinc plated. Bolt tightening sequence and tensioning torque shall be in accordance with recommendation of gasket manufacturer.
B. Unions:
1. Unions shall generally be used on all connections to automatic valves and equipment and wherever necessary to prevent undue difficulty in making repairs or replacements. In general, unions are not required for flanged valves or equipment with flanged connections. 2. Grinnell 463, 250-psi, malleable iron ground joint, brass to iron seat unions shall be used on all threaded piping 2 inches and smaller. 3. Grinnell 487, 150-psi cast-iron gasket type, flanges with gaskets, unions shall be used on all threaded piping 2-1/2 inches and larger. 4. Grinnell Gruvlok mechanical pipe couplings for 2-1/2" and larger steel pipe.
C. In general, unions shall be provided at the following locations for all connecting piping:
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0300 - 2 PIPING SYSTEMS, SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
1. On all sides of automatic valves where valves do not have union connections. 2. At any plumbing equipment requiring servicing.
D. Insulating Fittings:
1. Dielectric unions or couplings as manufactured by Walter Vallet Company or Victaulic shall be installed to connect dissimilar metals (such as steel and copper) to prevent electrolytic action.
1.6 VALVES AND COCKS:
A. Nameplate or markings on each valve shall show manufacturer or trademark, size, grade, and pressure-temperature service rating.
B. Unless otherwise specified, all valves in connection with piping shall be Hammond, Milwaukee, Keystone, Crane, Centerline, Walworth, NIBCO, Watts, or Grinnell. Ball valves shall be bronze with bronze ball, teflon seat, indicator dial, insulated handle, and adjustable packing. Gate or butterfly valves shall be used on all water piping 2-1/2 inches and larger. Ball or globe valves may be used on all water piping 2 inches and smaller. Exceptions, if any, are shown on the plans or noted in specific sections of the specifications.
C. All valves 2 inches and smaller shall be all bronze construction. Companion flanges shall be provided for butterfly screwed connections. Companion flanges shall be provided for butterfly valves and nonslam check valves. Valves, except where noted in specific sections, shall be rated for a minimum of 125-psi working pressure at 353 degrees F.
D. Valves locations are either shown or noted on plans; generally, however, any valve inadvertently omitted, or customarily furnished, or necessary for the proper maintenance and operation of this system shall be furnished as work of this Division.
E. Valves shall be installed with stems horizontal or above. Where possible, valves shall be located for operation from floors or platforms. Chain wheels or valve extensions shall be provided where valves are more than 11 feet above floors or platforms. Glands shall be tightened and gland packing added as required.
F. Nonslam check valves shall be used in the discharge lines from all pumps, except in-line pumps.
G. The following valves are used for design and descriptive purposes and to establish a standard of quality:
1. Gate valves 2 inches and smaller shall be Milwaukee 1151 or 1169; Grinnell 3080 or 3080SJ; NIBCO #T-134 or S-134. 2. Gate valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be Milwaukee F-2885-M; Grinnell 6020A; Crane 465-1/2; NIBCO #F-617-O. 3. Globe valves 2 inches and smaller shall be Milwaukee 590-T or 1590-T; Crane No. 7 or No. 1310; NIBCO #S-235-Y or T-235-Y; Grinnell 3240 or 3240SJ. 4. Globe valves 2-1/2 and larger shall be Milwaukee F-2981-M; Crane 350 or 351; NIBCO #T-718-B or F-718-B; Grinnell 6200A. 5. Calibrated balancing valves shall be Bell & Gossett Circuit Setter, equipped with Barco shutoff valves and quick-disconnects or Armstrong CBV. 6. Check valves 2 inches and smaller shall be Milwaukee 509 or 1509; Crane No. 36 or No. 1342; NIBCO #T413-B or S-413-B; Grinnell 3300 or 3300SJ, Mueller, Stockham or Watts.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0300 - 3 PIPING SYSTEMS, SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
7. Check valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be Milwaukee F-2974-M; Crane No. 373 or 374; NIBCO #F-918-B; Grinnell 6300A. Nonslam check valves shall be Mission Duo- Check 60SVF or Watts F-ICU-125 or Central Sprink. 8. Butterfly valve 2" and smaller shall be Milwaukee Butterball BB2-100 or BB2-350. 9. Butterfly valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be lug type Milwaukee ML-223-E for 5" and below or Milwaukee ML-323-E for 6" and above rated bubble-tight dead end service at full 200 psi working pressure or Central Sprink. 10. Ball valves shall be Milwaukee BA-100 full ported two-piece construction, or Milwaukee BA-300 full ported three piece construction or Watts B-6000.
H. Balancing cocks 2 inches and smaller shall be Crane No. 250 or Milwaukee Butterball BB2-100 or BB2-350 with memory stop.
I. Air vent valves shall be Crane No. 88 or Milwaukee 600, 200-psi working pressure, 3/8 inch bronze needle-point globe.
1.7 SPECIALTIES:
A. Pressure Gauges:
1. The Contractor shall furnish and install liquid filled U.S. Gauge, Trerice, Marsh, Weksler, Weiss, Marshaltown, or Ashcroft, 3-1/2 inch minimal dial or as noted on the drawings, black cast-aluminum pressure gauges and chrome-plated ring. All gauges shall be provided with a shutoff cock and snubber. Each gauge shall be of the free-standing repairable type, with graduations and scale suitable for the pressure encountered. Compound gauges shall be installed where necessary. A list of all gauges with graduations, type, and locations shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before any gauge is installed.
B. Strainers:
1. Strainers shall be Keckley, Sarco, Victaulic, Mueller, Central Sprink or Webster, of the self-cleaning type. Perforations in strainers shall be 1/16 inch in diameter. Blowoff ball valves with shall be provided for all strainers. A threaded hose connection shall be provided on all strainers located above ceilings. The outlet of all other strainer blowoff shall be piped to above floor in a location adjacent to a wall or so that traffic or accessibility to equipment is not restricted and so that any item or piece of equipment is not damaged. Pressure rating of strainers shall be equal to but in no case less than the pressure testing of adjoining valves.
C. Thermometers and Test Wells:
1. Where indicated on the drawings and the water piping diagrams, thermometers as manufactured by the Moeller Instruments Co., Weksler, Palmer, Weiss, or approved equal shall be installed.
2. Thermometers shall be provided with glass red reading column, mercury filled, 9-inch scale, V-shaped, straight, angular, or inclined pattern as required by conditions under which they are to be installed and as required for proper reading. Thermometers shall be provided with expansion heads as required by their location in the piping system. Thermometers shall be provided with expansion heads as required so that they will not break under extremes of temperature. Each thermometer shall be provided with a separable socket well which shall be placed in the piping system.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0300 - 4 PIPING SYSTEMS, SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
3. The well and stems of thermometers shall be the length required for accurate reading of the thermometer. Where thermometers occur in the insulated piping systems or on installed equipment, extension necks shall be provided so that the thermometer casing is outside of the insulation. Thermometer test wells equal to Moeller bar stock test well with plug and chain will be installed in outlet water. Thermometers shall be calibrated at mid- range of scale before they are installed.
D. Combination Pressure Temperature Test Wells:
1. Where indicated on the drawings, combination test plugs by Universal Control or Flow Design shall be installed. Two sets of pressure gauges and thermometers for use by the building maintenance staff shall be provided.
1.8 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. All necessary structural members, hangers, and supports of approved design shall be provided to keep piping in proper alignment and to prevent transmission of injurious thrusts and vibrations. Pipe hangers shall generally be of the clevis pipe-clamp type with suspension bolts. All bolts shall have provision for vertical adjustment and shall be equipped with locknuts. Where concrete inserts are used, they shall be suitably reinforced. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the Architect for the location of such inserts prior to their installation. Pipe supports in tunnels shall be roller type with protective saddles. Spring and spring roller hangers shall be used wherever vertical movement of pipe occurs so that pipe and pipe supports shall always be in absolute contact. Expansion shields may be used provided that the hanger is not attached rigidly to the expansion bolt, but is supported from a suitable bracket held in place by expansion bolts. No hanger shall be welded directly to steel joists. Where joists occur, clips shall be installed and hanger rod attached to clips. All piping hung from joists shall be hung from joist panel points. Protective saddles shall be provided on all insulated piping at point of hanger. Hangers shall not contact pipe where pipe is specified to be insulated and hangers shall not penetrate insulation.
B. The following is a schedule of maximum spacing for hangers or other supports and sizes of suspension rods for piping. In addition to the spacing listed, an additional hanger shall be provided 1 foot 0 inches from each pipe drop, rise, or turn.
Maximum Spacing
Pipe Size Rod Diameter Steel Pipe / HDPE Pipe
1-1/4 in. and smaller 1/2 in. 6 ft./ 2 ft.
1-1/2 in. and 2 in. 1/2 in. 9 ft./ 2 ft.
2-1/2 in. and 3 in. 5/8 in. 10 ft./ 4 ft.
4 in. and 6 in. 3/4 in. 10 ft./ 4 ft.
8 in. and 10 in. 7/8 in. 10 ft./ 4 ft.
12 in. and 14 in. 1 in. 10 ft./ 4 ft.
C. Pipes larger than 3 inches in diameter must be hung from beams. Where beam spacing is greater than a 10 foot 0 inch span for pipes, intermediate beams must be installed to support pipes. Groups of pipes anchored to floor slabs shall not exceed a 300-pound load between
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0300 - 5 PIPING SYSTEMS, SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
beams. Intermediate beams shall be provided to support pipes if a 300-pound load is exceeded.
D. Pipes larger than 3 inches which must be supported from roof joists shall be hung from every joist (max. 7'-0" o.c.). the hangers shall be within 3 inches of panel points or the mechanical Contractor shall add a brace to the joist as per the structural general notes or as directed by the architect.
E. Pipe hangers shall not be welded to metal pan floor. Pipe hangers shall be concrete inserts installed in holes drilled in concrete.
F. All hangers, supports, and anchors shall be assembled with heavy pattern, hexagon carbon steel nuts.
G. Perforated metal strap shall not be permitted.
H. Pipes above ceilings are to be grouped together and either hung from individual rod hangers or on Unistrut trapeze hangers as shown on the drawings. Pipes are to be run as high as possible for maximum clearance of attic spaces.
I. Risers shall be properly supported and guided at each floor. Pipe hangers, inserts, rollers, etc., and all necessary accessories required to support piping shall be provided by the Contractor, unless noted otherwise.
J. All soil, waste, and vent stacks shall be substantially supported at the base with either a base stack fitting and concrete block or a riser clamp resting on the floor slab.
K. All pipe hangers, inserts, trapezes, etc., and all necessary accessories required to support the piping shall be provided by this Contractor.
L. All pipe hangers shall be installed outside of insulation on all insulated lines.
M. Manufacturers may be Blaw-Knox, Grinnell, or Pipe Shields, Inc.
N. Insulated Pipe Supports:
1. Insulated pipe supports shall be furnished and installed by the Mechanical Contractor on all insulated pipe and tubing according to the following tables. See Pipe Insulation Specification Section. Supports shall be Pipe Shields, Inc. All designations as to hanger type refer to Pipe Shields, Inc., model numbers.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0300 - 6 PIPING SYSTEMS, SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
O. Horizontal Pipes: Model Designations
Maximum In Ring Or On Flat On Pipe Pipe Horizontal Clevis Hanger SurfaceRoll Size Spacing Cold Hot Cold Hot Cold Hot
Through 1-1/4" 7'-0 CS-CW CS CS-CW CS CSX-CW CSX 1-1/2 9'-0 CS-CW CS CS-CW CS CSX-CW CSX 2 - 4 10'-0 CS-CW CS CS-CW CS CSX-CW CSX 6 10'-0 CS-CW CS CS-CW CS CSXP-CW CSXP 8 10'-0 CS-CW CS CSXP-CW CSXP MXP MXP 10-16 10'-0 CS-CW CS MXP MXP MXP MXP 18 10'-0 NCP NCP MXP MXP MXP MXP 20 10'-0 NCP NCP MXP(c) MXP(c) MXP(b) MXP(b) 24 9'-0 NCP NCP MXP(a) MXP(a) MXP(a) MXP(a)
Notes: 7'-0 maximum spacing 8'-0 maximum spacing 9'-0 maximum spacing
Vertical Pipes: (All Pipe Sizes)
Pipe Riser Clamp Model Maximum Vertical Centers
PRV 15'-0 HPRC 40'-0
P. Insulation shall be asbestos-free calcium silicate; 100 psi avg. compressive strength with a K = 0.38 BTU in/ft2/DegF/Hr. Insulating structural insert shall be asbestos-free calcium silicate; 600 psi avg. compressive strength treated with water repellant.
Q. Jackets shall be galvanized sheet steel ASTM A-527; straps and load distribution plates to be carbon steel ASTM A-36; fasteners to be ASTM A-307, cadmium plated.
1.9 GROOVED PIPE COUPLINGS AND VALVES:
A. Mechanical grooved pipe couplings, fittings, butterfly valves, check valve, and strainers as manufactured by Victaulic or Grinnell Gruvlok, or Central Sprink, may be used for piping systems and mechanical equipment connections (in lieu of welded, fanged, threaded connections) in systems specified in all areas except mechanical rooms where all piping shall be rigid type couplings, welded and/or screwed as herein specified under operating conditions not to exceed -30Deg F. through 230deg F. temperature range according to the gasket or valve lining selected and working pressures as shown in the coupling manufacturer's current product specifications, for the following systems (subject to local code approval):
Domestic Hot Water Domestic Cold Water
B. The complete pipe and jointing method shall conform strictly to the manufacturer's requirements for the service designated.
C. Couplings:
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0300 - 7 PIPING SYSTEMS, SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
1. Couplings shall consist of three basic components -- housings, gasket, nuts and bolts. 2. Branch stub-in connections shall be made with welded stubs. Grooved Mechanical-T shall not be used in lieu of welded stubs. 3. Fittings shall be of grooved or shouldered and design to accept grooved mechanical couplings without field preparation. 4. Flanges for connecting fanged components into the grooved system shall be Victaulic Vic-Flanges or Grinnell Gruvlok flanges or Central Sprink. Flanges shall conform to 125# cast iron and 150# or 300# steel bolt hole alignment.
D. Valves:
1. Valves shall be of grooved end design in sizes 1-1/2" through 12". All butterfly valves 6" and smaller shall be Grinnel Gruvlok Series 7000 butterfly valves or Victaulic Series 703 butterfly valves with long necks and infinitely variable manual handle or manual gear operator, Grade "E" linings and standard trim or Central Sprink. All butterfly valves 8" through 12" shall be Grinnell Gruvlok Series 7000 butterfly valves or Victaulic Series 704 Butterfly Valves with long necks and manual gear operator, Grade "E" linings and standard trim or Central Sprink. Operating conditions not to exceed -30 deg to 230 deg temperature. At least one side of each valve shall be joined with a rigid type coupling, Grinnell Gruvlok figure 7009 or 7004 or Victaulic Style 07 or HP-70, to restrain the valve. 2. Grooved end check valves for horizontal in line service for sizes 2" through 4" shall be Victaulic Series 712 Swinger Swing Check Valve. Grooved end check valves for horizontal and vertical in-line service for sizes 4" through 12" shall be Victaulic Series 711 or 715 which are of non-slam, dual disk design or Central Sprink. Check valves are to have Grade "E" linings and standard trim. Grooved end strainers shall be Victaulic Series 730 or Central Sprink. Grooved end suction diffusers where required by the engineer shall be Victaulic Series 731 or Central Sprink. 3. Pipe shall be supplied grooved in accordance with coupling manufacturer's specifications. For grooving on-site, pipe shall be prepared in accordance with the same specifications using specially designed tools available. Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. 4. For flexible couplings, the requirements of MSS-SP-69, "Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application" shall in general, govern the installation of hangers and supports. 5. In addition, no horizontal pipe shall be left unsupported between any two couplings nor shall any pipe be left unsupported whenever a change in direction of lineflow takes place. Vertical piping shall be supported at every other floor or every other pipe length, whichever is most frequent. The base of the riser or base fitting shall be set on a pedestal or foundation. 6. For rigid couplings such as Victaulic Styles 07, or HP-70 or Central Sprink #772, see manufacturer's current specifications for support.
1.10 PIPE INSTALLATION:
A. All piping systems shall be installed so that they can be easily drained by means of drainage of low points of all piping without disconnecting pipe. If not specifically indicated on the drawings, the frequency of draining shall determine whether drain caps, plugs, cocks, or valves are to be used. If other than valves are contemplated, the Architect's permission must be obtained.
B. All installed pipe lines shall be straight, free from dents, scars, and burrs, with ends reamed smooth, and shall remain straight against strains tending to cause distortion during system operation. The Contractor shall make proper allowance for pipe line expansion and contraction so that no unsightly distortion, noise, damage, or improper operation results therefrom.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0300 - 8 PIPING SYSTEMS, SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
C. Piping shall run only parallel or at right angles to the walls or axes of the building and shall be neatly organized. The Contractor shall study the architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, and other drawings and existing structure to eliminate conflict of piping with other structure lighting or other services. Unless specified otherwise, no piping shall be exposed in a finished room, except in shop or storage areas. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings.
D. No piping shall be run above any electrical panels, electrical equipment or access clearances for electrical for electrical panels or equipment. No piping shall be allowed to run through any electrical rooms.
E. All piping shall be clean and free from acids and loose dirt when installed and shall be kept clean during the completion of the installation.
F. Plugs of rags, wools, cottons, waste, or similar materials may not be used in plugging. All piping shall be so arranged to not interfere with removal of other equipment or devices; and to not block access to manholes, access openings, etc. Piping shall be arranged to facilitate equipment maintenance. Flanges or unions, as applicable for the type of piping specified, shall be provided in the piping at connections to all items of equipment. Piping shall be placed and installed so that there will be no interference with the installation of the air-conditioning equipment, ducts, etc. All piping shall be so installed to insure noiseless circulation.
G. All valves and specialties shall be so placed to permit easy operation and access, and all valves shall be regulated and packed, and the glands shall be adjusted at the completion of the work and before final acceptance. All piping shall be erected to insure proper draining. No bushings, short nipples, or street-type fittings shall be used, unless located in the street and properly required.
H. Drain valves shall be installed at all low points in all piping systems to allow for complete drainage of piping systems.
I. When insulated pipes are supported by a roller hanger they shall be protected from damage by suitable pipe covering protection saddles. Saddles shall support pipe on roller and shall be packed with insulation.
J. Grade:
1. Soil, waste, and drainage lines shall be graded not less than allowed by code and AHJ. 2. Domestic hot and cold water lines shall be graded so that systems can be drained with as few drains as possible. Drains shall be located in convenient and accessible places. 3. Shutoff valves shall be provided in domestic hot and cold water system and in the steam system at each major junction and at each branch supply line, hot and cold serving a fixture group, including toilet rooms.
K. Welding:
1. All welding shall be performed by experienced certified welders. Welders must be certified for the materials, procedures, positions, and applicable codes to be used. Performance qualifications and certifications shall be determined in accordance with Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. All welders must be certified within 3 months of beginning welding on this project. When a welder has not used a specific welding process for a period of 6 months, he shall be required to be requalified before beginning procedure. Welders certificates shall be maintained on file at the project site. Any welding performed by noncertified welders will be rejected.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0300 - 9 PIPING SYSTEMS, SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
2. Electric arc welding shall be used between sections of pipe and between pipe and fittings for black steel piping 2-1/2 inches and larger. All changes in direction of pipes shall be made with welded fittings for sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger. All welds shall be of sound metal, thoroughly fused to the base metal and penetrating to the bottom of the joint. 3. The strength of the finished weld shall be equal to the strength of the pipe. The width of the finished weld shall be at least 2-1/2 times the thickness of the part joined and the thickness of the weld shall be at least 24 percent greater than the thickness of the pipe or fittings. 4. No direct welded connections shall be made to valves, strainers, apparatus or related equipment. Connections to fanged valves or accessories having fanged connections shall be made with welded companion flanges. 5. In general, all fittings shall be standard welding type. Weld-O-Lets may be used on low- pressure lines 2 inches and smaller. Under no circumstances shall pipe be notched, mitered, or swaged.
L. Screwed Connections:
1. Piping 2" and smaller shall be screwed. All changes in direction shall be made with standard threaded fittings. Under no conditions will piping be notched, mitered or swaged. 2. All piping shall be accurately sized to measurements established at the building and worked into place without springing or forcing. Proper provisions shall be made for the expansion and contraction of all pipe lines. Screw joints shall be made with a lubricant applied to the male threads only. Threads shall be full cut and not more than three threads on the pipe shall remain exposed.
M. Joints in Copper Piping:
1. Pipe shall be cut square and true. The end shall be deburred, reamed, and/or sized as necessary. The pipe shall be cleaned with medium grit emery cloth and, if the fitting socket is tarnished or shows oxidation, it shall be likewise cleaned. The pipe shall be inserted in the fittings and heat shall be applied to the fittings. Joints in copper piping for all above grade domestic water piping shall be soldered joints. Use ASTM B813, water flushable, lead free flux; ASTM B32, lead free alloy solder and ASTM B828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 2. An approved isolation fitting shall be installed at the junction of all steel and copper pipes. This shall not apply to copper black steel connections at radiation convectors, cabinet heaters, and coils. 3. T-drill is not acceptable.
N. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates:
O. Beaton and Caldwell or Grabler nickel-plated floor, wall, and ceiling plates of adjustable type that can be applied after pipes are in place shall be provided. They shall be installed on all exposed uninsulated pipes passing through walls, floors, and ceilings.
P. PVC DWV Pipe: Join PVC drainage pipe and fittings according to ASTM D1785 with ASTM D2853 solvent cement joints.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0300 - 10 PIPING SYSTEMS, SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
1.11 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
A. All piping connecting to equipment shall be installed without strain. The Contractor shall be required as directed to disconnect piping to demonstrate that it has been so connected.
B. Flexible connections shall be provided at the inlet and outlet of each item of equipment and at other locations indicated on the drawings.
1.12 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION:
A. The Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for expansion and contraction of piping with Victaulic or Central Sprink couplings, expansion joints, offsets, or expansion loops as required or shown, to prevent undue strain.
1.13 ANCHORS AND GUIDES:
A. All pipes shall be securely anchored where necessary to properly distribute expansion stresses. All vertical risers shall be anchored at the midpoint and at additional locations as required.
B. Anchors shall be located where indicated by the drawings or required and shall be applicable to the type of piping installed. All anchor bolts, after tightening, shall be welded to the anchor frame in such a manner that all anchor bolts are effective. Additional restraining pipe supports shall be provided wherever danger of excessive pipe movement exists.
C. Aligning guides of the concentric ring type shall be installed and anchored at all locations where piping may be distorted from the normal centerline movement of the piping and on either side of all expansion joints. Two guides, spaced 3 feet 0 inches on centers shall be provided at each side of the expansion joint or the expansion loop. Job or shop-fabricated guides are not acceptable.
1.14 CROSS CONNECTIONS:
A. No plumbing fixture, device, or piping shall be installed that will provide a cross connection interconnection between a distributing water supply for drinking or domestic purposes and a polluted supply, such as a drainage system or a soil or waste pipe, which will permit or make possible the backflow of sewage polluted water, or waste into the water supply system.
END OF SECTION 23 0300
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0300 - 11 PIPING SYSTEMS, SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0300 - 12 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH SECTION 23 0400
PLUMBING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. All pertinent sections of Section 230100, Division 23, are a part of the work described in this section. Division 1 is a part of this and all other sections of these specifications.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. Demolition work as outlined on the plans.
B. This work shall include all plumbing fixtures, fixture trim specialties, drains, etc., required for the complete plumbing system.
C. An extension of the domestic cold water system and a recirculating domestic hot water system.
D. A complete waste and venting system.
E. An extension of the natural gas system.
F. Rerouting or capping of any inservice or abandoned utility lines unearthed or uncovered by construction.
1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS:
A. All work included in the scope of this specification shall conform to the latest adopted versions of applicable codes and standards, including the following:
International Plumbing Code International Building Code International Mechanical Code UOSHA IAPMO PDI ADA
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1 and Section 230100. Submit the following:
Plumbing Fixtures and Accessories Water Hammer Arrestors Sterilization Contractor Gas Pressure Regulators Thermostatic Mixing Valves
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 1 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
1.5 TESTS:
A. Sanitary System: The sanitary soil, waste, and vent piping shall be tested by plugging all outlets and filling the lines with water to the highest roof opening. The water level shall not drop more than 3 inches in 1 hour. All joints within the building shall be inspected for visible leaks.
B. Water Lines: All water lines shall be tested hydrostatically at 200 psi and shall show a pressure drop not more than 5 psi in a 24-hour period.
C. Gas Lines: Gas lines shall be tested with air at a pressure of 100 psi and show no drop in pressure. The Gas Company shall test all gas lines for leaks in compliance with Gas Company regulations.
D. The pressure shall remain on all parts of the system for a minimum of 12 hours to permit complete examination and inspection.
E. Defective Work: If inspection or tests show defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or corrected and inspection and tests shall be repeated. All repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. No caulking or screwed joints or holes will be acceptable.
F. All defects in material and workmanship which appear during the test shall be promptly remedied and the test shall be reapplied.
G. Enclosed Piping: Any piping which is to be insulated, placed within the construction, or otherwise concealed shall be carefully tested before being permanently enclosed.
H. Test Instruments: All testing shall be performed in the presence of the Architect and his Mechanical Engineer and shall meet with their approval. Instruments required for making the tests shall be provided by this Contractor. Relief valves set to avoid excessive pressure during testing shall be provided.
I. Required Adjustments: Before final acceptance of the piping system as a whole, this Contractor shall make all required adjustments, including controls, flush valves, etc., and shall place the entire piping system in a perfect operating condition. At the completion of the work, this Contractor shall furnish the Architect with all certificates of inspection.
PART 2 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
2.1 EXISTING LINES:
A. Any utility line uncovered during construction that is not clearly defined on the drawings shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Architect and Owner. The Owner and Architect will subsequently inform the Contractor what should be done. A change order shall be initiated in accordance with the General Conditions for such occurrences. Relocation of any existing piping shall be done with the same material and fittings as the original installation. Damaged or removed insulation shall be repaired and/or replaced.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 2 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
2.2 VENTS:
A. The entire system shall be properly vented to atmosphere and all gases shall be discharged at points not less than 14 inches above the roof line. Each fixture shall be back-vented on the discharge side of safe water seal and arranged for free passage of all gases to atmosphere. Vent lines are to be offset, if necessary, so that they will not pierce the roof at points closer than 5 feet 0 inches from the edge of the roof, except where shown otherwise on the drawings.
2.3 CLEANOUTS:
A. Full size cleanouts shall be installed at the base of each soil waste stack and at the end of each horizontal run of sanitary piping. All other cleanouts shall be installed where shown on the drawings and where required by State, local, or National Plumbing Codes.
B. Cleanouts shall have cast-iron bodies with threaded brass screw plugs. They shall be the full size of the pipe line in which they are installed, up to and including 4 inches. All cleanouts shall be installed in locations easily accessible for rodding. Where stacks or other piping is concealed, cleanouts shall be installed above the floor with extensions made to the finished wall surface. Cleanouts in walls shall be J. R. Smith 4402 with countersunk plugs and round stainless steel access covers. In floors, J. R. Smith 4023 square top cleanouts with countersunk plugs and round scoriated polished nickel bronze access covers with frames shall be used.
C. Cleanouts shall be J. R. Smith, Zurn, Wade, or Josam. J. R. Smith references are used herein.
2.4 TRAPS:
A. Each fixture and appliance installed in the work and discharging water into the sewer or house drainage system shall have a seal trap arranged in connection with a complete venting system and shall be installed so that all gases shall pass freely to the atmosphere with no pressure or siphon condition on the water seal. Each fixture shall have a water seal of not less than (2) inches and not more than (4) inches except where a deeper seal is found necessary by the Administrative Authority for special conditions.
2.5 FLASHING AND SLEEVES:
A. Furnish and install on each pipe passing through the roof a Stoneman Stormtite four pound seamless lead flashing assembly extending horizontally not less than 12-inches all around. Flashing to have steel reinforced conical boot and counter-flashed with a hooded cast iron counter-flashing. Seal the neck of the flashing to the pipe with permaseal waterproofing compound and secure the counter-flashing to the pipe with vandal proof screws. Fill the top annular space of counter-flashing with epoxy compound. Alternate using open top models of all pipes.
B. Sleeves for pipes passing through walls, floors or ceilings shall be as specified in Section 230300.
2.6 FLOOR DRAINS:
A. Floor drains shall be 4-pound lead sheet pans 40 inches square or other code allowed material. Floor drains with clamping collars shall be complete with pan.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 3 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
2.7 BURYING PIPE:
A. Outside pipe placed underground is to be buried a minimum of 4 feet to prevent freezing. All backfill shall be mechanically compacted to meet the density requirements set forth in Division 2.
2.8 COURSES OF WATER PIPES:
A. Water pipes shall not be exposed in finished rooms except where noted on plans or as permitted by the Architect, except the finished brass supplies that are a part of the fixture trimmings. Pipes are to be run in tunnel, furred ceiling and walls, and behind or under cabinets as shown.
2.9 SEWER LOCATION:
A. Where the location of the sewer is not clearly defined by dimension on the drawings, it shall not be closer than 10 feet horizontally to a water main or service line, except where the bottom of the water pipe will be at least 12 inches above the top of the sewer pipe, where they shall cross each other at neat 90-degree angles. Verification of existing sewer main elevations shall be made prior to connection or installation of any new lines. Should installation at the minimum required slope not be attainable at the connection points shown, the Architect shall be immediately notified before installation of the line possible.
2.10 PIPING LAYOUTS:
A. Layout of piping shown on drawings is in a general sense diagrammatic as to the exact location of piping. It is to be understood by the Contractor that unforeseen conditions and obstacles at the site may not permit the running of piping as scaled from the drawings, but changes shall not be made without the written permission of the Architect. The Plumbing Contractor shall check toilet room details as shown on the Architectural drawings. He shall check the grade of a waste line with a transit before installing the pipe.
B. See the Plumbing Fixture Schedule on plans for the sizing of connecting lines to each fixture.
2.11 FLOOR DRAINS:
A. Exposed surfaces of floor drains, unless otherwise noted, shall be finished in nickel bronze. Floor waterproofing materials shall be securely anchored in the clamping ring of the floor drain. Floor drain strainers in ceramic tile floors shall be square. The tops of all drains shall be set flush with the finished floor level except where floors are warped to drains, where these shall be set flush. The Contractor shall consult with the trades responsible for adjacent work before establishing final finish elevations. Floor drain location and elevations are to be carefully coordinated to insure they are placed at the low points of the finished floor surfaces. Openings shall be core drilled. Coordinate exact location and elevation of all floor drain with architectural drawings.
2.12 WATER SERVICE:
A. This Contractor shall modify the existing domestic water system as shown on the plans.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 4 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
2.13 WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM:
A. A complete plumbing waste and vent system shall be furnished and installed. It shall be installed in strict compliance with the International Plumbing Code. It shall be incorporated into the space constraints in the building. Building waste line shall be extended to existing utility main at street, as shown on plans.
2.14 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT:
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all turrets, cocks, escutcheons, vacuum breakers, etc. Connections to mains shall be by this Plumbing Contractor.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall coordinate with the cabinet supplier the location of all sinks and counter top equipment. Final connections to be by the Plumbing Contractor.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall rough in all utility lines to the cabinets, tables, hoods, and terminate utilities with shutoff valve and waste and vent lines with caps. All such rough-ins shall be labeled. Final connections to be by the Plumbing Contractor.
D. The cabinet supplier shall provide complete roughing in drawings showing the exact location of all stub-ups in floors and walls. It shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor to install all sleeves through walls and floors and to make all final connections. Piping through floors shall be sleeved, caulked, and flashed to prevent leakage should a leak occur.
E. Piping for water, gas and air where required, shall be of 3/8-inch, ½-inch, or 3/4-inch IPS as required to provide full capacity at all fixtures or services outlets. All exposed piping, fittings, and hangers shall be red metal of same composition as fixture and shall be chrome plated.
PART 3 - EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION:
3.1 PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVE (WATER):
A. Contractor to verify working condition of existing domestic water pressure reducing valve and associated equipment, valves and piping. Alert Architect / Engineer immediately if not in excellent working condition.
3.2 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE: (GAS):
A. A gas-pressure regulator shall be installed on the main gas line to the building and other locations shown and for each gas-burning appliance. The regulator shall be a single-seated cast-iron body gas-pressure-reducing valve where shown on the drawings. The valve shall be installed complete with gas cock and union upstream of the valve and a union downstream of the valve. Gas-pressure-reducing valves shall be Fisher or Rockwell.
3.3 VACUUM BREAKERS:
A. All water outlets with hose ends where backflow is possible and where required by code shall be complete with vacuum breakers. Where vacuum breaker is not specified with fixture trim, the breaker shall be installed in the supply line to the fixture.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 5 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
B. Vacuum breakers shall be of chrome-plated brass, or specified finish, and shall be FEBCO 730C or Watts unless otherwise specified. Vacuum breaker shall be in accordance with American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE) Standard 1011 and shall be suitable for the duty it is required to provide. Vacuum Breakers shall be capable of being drained if located where freezing is possible.
3.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS:
A. J.R. Smith Hydrotrol or Watts water hammer arresters shall be provided in the ends of all multiple flush-valve-type fixture supply lines to eliminate water hammer. Arrestors shall be installed vertically in an accessible location. Shutoff valves shall be installed in lines to all water hammer arrestors.
B. Water hammer arrestors shall comply with Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI-WH- 201.
3.5 ACCESS PANELS:
A. Access panels shall be installed over all concealed valves, cleanouts, and any other concealed equipment that may require access for operation, maintenance, and repair. Access box locations shall be verified with the Architect prior to installation.
Tile Walls: J.R. Smith No. 4730 chrome plated. Ceilings: J.R. Smith No. 4760 bonderized and primed.
3.6 CHARCOAL VENT FILTERS
A. Provide charcoal vent filters on all vents through the roof (VTR’s) for the entire project. For vents 6 inches in diameter and larger contractor to break the vent into two 4 inch VTR’s where it rises up through the roof and provide a charcoal filter for each. Charcoal devices and filters to be as manufactured by Sweet Septic System. Contractor to provide one carton of Sweet Air filters.
3.7 STERILIZATION:
A. After the entire system is completed and tested for pressure, and just before the building is ready to be occupied, the Mechanical Contractor shall sterilize the system as follows: After the mains are flushed, a water and chlorine solution concentrated to 250 ppm shall be introduced. The treated water and chlorine solution shall be retained for not less than 8 hours before final flushing out of the system until the chlorine content is less than 0.2 PPM. Sterilization of all piping systems excluding waste, vent and roof drain lines and including domestic cold water, domestic hot water, domestic hot water return to be done by Sterilization Contractor and paid for by the Mechanical Contractor.
3.8 PLUMBING FIXTURES:
A. This Contractor shall furnish and install all fixtures shown on the drawings or specified hereinafter, shall make all parts complete, and shall leave the entire system in perfect working order. He shall clean and adjust all fixtures before leaving the job. Any damaged or cracked fixtures shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 6 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
B. The fixtures shall be all new and complete as shown or described in catalog or as required for the work. The fixtures shall include accessible loose key compression stops above the floor in supplies to all fixtures and cast brass P-traps unless otherwise shown. Trim for all fixtures shall be chrome plated and all trim shall match in design.
C. Drain pipe tail pieces shown to receive condensate waste shall have auxiliary inlet fittings suitable for connection of the condensate drain to the tail piece. See plans for locations.
D. All exposed piping in occupied spaces shall be chrome plated including piping, mixing valves, etc. under counters. Supply faucets shall have renewable seats and barrels.
E. Fixtures shall be the water-saver type with maximum usage of 1.6 gallons per flush for water closets, 2.5 gallons per minute for showers and 1.2 gallons per minute for lavatories(non metered).
F. All single lever faucets shall be Moen, Kohler, Elkay American Standard or Zurn
G. Faucet operating handles must be interchangeable.
H. Faucets shall be Chicago, Kohler, Zurn or Moen, Symmons
I. Stops shall be provided in all water lines to individual sinks, roughed-in locations, etc., as part of the plumbing contract. All fixtures shall be caulked to the floor or a wall with water-resistant white butyl rubber caulking compound.
J. All parts or surfaces of plumbing items connected to the acid drainage added to original systems shall be acid resistant. All parts of floor drains connecting to the acid drainage system shall be acid resistant. Acid resistant P-traps shall be polypropylene by Orion or Town & Country.
K. Fixtures shall be Kohler, Crane, American-Standard and Eljer. Specialties shall be Zurn, Josam, or J.R. Smith.
L. Flush valves shall be Sloan or Zurn.
M. Sensor flush valves to be Sloan or Zurn.
N. Toilet seat manufacturers shall be Beneke, Church, Lustra, Stasco, Olsenite, or Bemis.
O. Chair-carriers with floor supports and hangers shall be provided for all wall mounted fixtures. Carrier manufacturers shall be J.R. Smith, Zurn, or Josam.
P. Wall hydrant manufacturers shall be Watts, Zurn, Wade, Acorn or Smith.
Q. Stainless-steel sink manufacturers shall be Just or Elkay.
R. Pressure balance mixing valves shall be Leonard, Symmons or Chicago.
S. Thermostatic mixing valves shall be Leonard, Symmons, or Powers.
T. Water closets shall be the height specified on the Architectural drawings. Water closets shall be supported on Smith 210 or 230 carriers. Where space dictates a smaller carrier, 440 or 417 carriers may be used.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 7 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
U. Carriers shall be double nutted as necessary for secure installation and as recommended by manufacturer.
V. Urinals shall be the height specified on the Architectural drawings. Cleanouts for urinal waste piping in finished walls shall be covered with cleanout assembly and cover as specified elsewhere. Urinals shall be supported with Smith 629, 635, or 637 Carriers.
W. Supplies and stops shall be Frost, Brasscraft, Kohler, Eastman, U.S. Brass, Robert Mfr., BBC or approved equal. Plastic supplies are not acceptable. P-traps shall be Frost, Kohler, Sanitary- Dash or approved equal. Grid strainers shall be Chicago or Dearborn.
X. Lavatories shall be the height specified on the Architectural drawings. Lavatories shall be supported on Smith 700 or 800 carriers.
Y. Floor drains and floor sinks shall be furnished with clamping collars where a waterproof membrane is provided. Membranes will be required for all drains installed above grade. See architectural drawings for additional locations of membranes.
3.9 FIXTURE SCHEDULE:
See plans for schedule.
END OF SECTION 23 0400
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0150 - 8 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 23 0800
AIR DISTRIBUTION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. All pertinent sections of Section 230100, Division 23, are a part of the work described in this section. Division 1 is a part of this and all other sections of these specifications.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work shall include all labor, material, and equipment necessary to complete the air distribution, heating and air conditioning work for the entire project, including but not limited to the following: 1. All ductwork, plenums, sheet metal partitions, and specialties required for the air distribution and ventilating system. 2. Registers, grilles, and diffusers. 3. Acoustical lining in ductwork. 4. Air distribution equipment including exhaust air systems, heating and make-up air units, and existing. 5. Connection to equipment furnished by other Contractors and pre-purchased by Owner (including existing equipment to remain). 6. Installation of all floor and wall blockouts for floor or wall outlets and coordination with General Contractor during concrete pour. 7. Substantially complete and accurate adjustment of all equipment of this section, ready for final adjustment as work of Section 230150. 8. Sheet Metal Contractor to furnish a man to assist the Balancing Contractor in the balancing to operate equipment and to change belts and sheaves. 9. All automatic dampers are furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor. They shall be installed by the Sheet Metal Contractor under the supervision of the Control Contractor.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1 and Section 230100. Submit the following: 1. Make-up Air Units 2. Registers, Grilles and Diffusers 3. Exhaust Fans 4. Duct liner, sealer 5. Flexible duct 6. Exhaust systems 7. Dampers and Damper Regulators 8. Electric Unit heaters 9. Duct Heaters
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0800 - 1 AIR DISTRIBUTION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
1.4 MATERIALS:
A. Unless otherwise specified, galvanized iron shall be used throughout, fabricated and installed so that no vibration or noise results. It shall be made from the best grade of galvanized mild steel sheets of the U.S. Standard gauge and shall be free from blisters, slivers, and pits.
B. All seams shall be hammered and made airtight. The construction of all ductwork, including gauges of metal, bracing layout, etc., shall be in accordance with the following manuals of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA).
C. Ductwork and plenums shall be in accordance with SMACNA, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible", latest edition.
1.5 SHEET METAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. All duct systems shall be constructed to the pressure requirement indicated for the fan serving that duct system. Ductwork systems with a fan pressure requirement less than 2 inches w.g. shall be constructed to meet the requirements of the 2 inch w.g. pressure class. Ductwork on the suction side of the fan shall be constructed to the negative pressure class requirements. Ductwork on the discharge side of the fan shall be constructed to the positive pressure class requirements.
B. The Contractor shall exercise utmost care to obtain a smooth surface inside of all ductwork, absolutely free from small fins, imperfect joints, or other obstructions that cause noise and increased friction. Any additional duct offsets or turns not shown on plans or increases in length of run necessary to overcome obstacles shall be called to the attention of the Architect so that an acceptable rearrangement can be worked out. Under no circumstances shall the cross section of any duct be decreased by dents, pipes, or hanger rods running through it unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Neither shall the shape be changed without approval. No quick transitions that restrict the area shall be used. Where necessary to gain clearance, the duct seams may be turned inside. Structural and Architectural drawings shall be consulted for areas with restrictive clearances. This work shall be installed in cooperation with other trades so that there will be no delay in progress of construction work.
C. During the installation, the open ends of all ducts shall be protected by covering them with plastic sheet tied in place to prevent debris and dirt from entering. It is extremely important that the duct system be clean before finish painting is done.
D. Leakage Test: 1. All medium pressure ductwork shall be leak tested as per Section 230150. All leaks shall be sealed air tight. 2. Ducts shall be tested at 1.5 times the maximum design pressure. Measured leakage shall not exceed 10% of design flow.
E. Exterior Ductwork: 1. All joints and seams in exterior ductwork shall be welded or soldered watertight or sealed with Dow Corning #795 silicone. All surfaces to be sealed must first be wiped clean and dry with a petroleum free solvent such a Xylol, Toluol or Methyl ethyl ketone. Refer to manufacturer's surface preparation guide to determine proper substrate preparation.
F. Duct Joints: 1. All supply air and exhaust air duct joints, seams and fittings must be sealed airtight as required by the SMACNA Manual table 1-2, seal classification A. All return air ductwork
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0800 - 2 AIR DISTRIBUTION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
joints shall be sealed as required by SMACNA Manual table 1-2, seal classification C. The term "seal" or "sealed" means use of mastic or mastic plus tape or gasketing as appropriate. 2. All traverse joints on metal rectangular ducts 30" and over and all exhaust ductwork 12" and larger shall be constructed using the Ductmate 4-bolt duct connection system. 3. The system must be installed according to the manufacturer's instruction and assembly booklet. 4. The Ductmate or Ward system shall be comprised of a hollow, slip-on flange, containing a factory applied integral sealant and separate corner pieces to connect the two flanges to form a rectangular frame. This frame shall be affixed to the duct, and bolted together at the corners. Install a gasket between the flanges, and a support cleat to join the flanges on the outside.
G. Hangers and Supports: 1. Hangers for ducts up to 18 inches in width shall be placed on not more than 8-foot centers. Ducts 19 inches and over in width shall be supported on not more than 4-foot centers. Hangers shall be placed plumb and shall present a neat appearance. Duct hangers shall be constructed of galvanized band iron 1 x 1/8 inch for ducts up to 36 inches in width. On ducts 37 inches and more in width, hangers shall be constructed from galvanized angles not less than 1 x 1 inch. The use of perforated band iron for duct support is prohibited. Hangers shall extend down the sides of the ducts not less than 9 inches. On ducts less than 9 inches in depth, hangers shall extend the full depth of the ducts. Attach hangers to the ducts with not less than three rivets or Parker screws of the appropriate sizes. It is essential that all ducts be rigidly supported. Where vertical ducts pass through floors or roofs, a flanged sheet metal collar around the duct shall be welded to the duct, and supporting angles shall be rigidly welded to the duct collars and to the structure. Additional supports shall be provided as required. Angles used shall be galvanized and of sufficient size to support the ductwork rigidly. Horizontal round ductwork shall be supported 6 feet 0 inches o.c. with 2-inch wide bands of 18-gauge galvanized steel wrapped around the duct.
H. Cross-Breaking: 1. Sheet metal ducts shall be cross-broken on the four sides of each 4-foot panel. All vertical and horizontal sheet metal barriers, duct offsets, elbows, as well as 4-foot panels of straight sections of ducts or plenum walls, shall be cross-broken. Cross-breaking shall be applied to the sheet metal between the standing seams or reinforcing angles. The center of the cross-break shall be of the required height to assure that the surfaces will be rigid. 2. All exposed ductwork, other than in mechanical equipment rooms shall have flat seams and joints; standing seams shall not be permitted. 3. Exposed ductwork shall be run in straight runs; transitions shall occur on one side only with the bottom and exposed edge maintaining an even plane. Ducts shall be wide enough to allow the boot down to the diffuser or grille to be as large as the flange so that the flange will not project out beyond the duct or boot.
I. Low Pressure Ductwork: 1. Low pressure ductwork shall mean: All ductwork serving fan systems with a fan static pressure requirement of 2.25 inches w.g. or less, Ductwork shall be constructed to the SMACNA 2-inch pressure class requirements.
J. Round Ductwork - Low Pressure: 1. The round ductwork and accessories shall be factory fabricated, spiral conduit as manufactured by United Sheet Metal Company, Metco, Sheet Metal Products Co., Everdur, Ventline or Dees Spiral Pipe and Fittings. The conduit shall be constructed of rust-resistant zinc-coated steel of the sizes called for on the drawings. Conduit 3 inches
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0800 - 3 AIR DISTRIBUTION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
to 8 inches in diameter shall be 26-gauge steel, 9 inches to 22 inches in diameter shall be 24-gauge steel, 23 inches through 36 inches in diameter shall be 22-gauge steel, 38 inches through 50 inches shall be 20-gauge steel, 52 inches through 60 inches shall be 18-gauge steel. All conduits up through 60 inches shall be spiral lockseam construction. Conduits over 60 inches shall be 16-gauge steel with longitudinal seam. 2. All fittings in the round pipe shall be factory fabricated to match the spiral conduit and shall be of the same manufacturer. All elbows and fittings shall be fabricated from galvanized sheets at least one gauge heaver than connecting conduits. Ninety-degree elbows shall be equal to United Sheet Metal Company type E-5, five-piece construction with a centerline radius of 1-1/2 times the pipe diameter. All elbows and fittings shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA recommendations. 3. Shop or job fabricating pipe and fittings will not be acceptable. 4. Pipe-to-pipe joints are by slip-fit or by projecting collar of the fitting into the pipe. 5. Insertion length of sleeve coupling and fitting collar is 2 inches for diameters through 9 inches and 4 inches for diameters 10 inches through 60 inches. 6. Approved sealer equal to "Hard Cast" shall be applied to all duct joints. After the joint is assembled. Sealer is then applied to the outside of the joint, extending 1 inch on each side of the joint bead and covering the screw heads. Plastic backed tape is immediately applied over the wet sealer. 7. The duct sealer must be specifically formulated for the job of sealing the field joints for high-pressure systems. The sealer shall be compatible with plastic-backed duct tape so the two shall cure and bond together. Samples of sealer and tape and the specification data sheets shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 8. Flanged joints shall be sealed by Neoprene Rubber Gaskets.
K. Duct Insulation: 1. All rectangular low-pressure transfer air, supply air, return air, mixed air, relief air, and outside air ducts shall be lined with 1 inch of fiberglass insulation securely butted or lapped and sealed. Insulation shall be Manville Permacote Linacoustic or equal of Certainteed or Knauf. Liner shall have 1-1/2 pound density with flame spread rating of 0- 25 and smoke of 0-50. Duct liner shall have an NRC rating of not less than 0.60 and a thermal conductivity (k factor) of not more than 0.27 BTUH/In-ft2. Duct Liner shall have factory applied edge coating. Duct dimensions shall be increased 2 inches on each side from those shown on drawings to accommodate insulation. Insulation shall be attached with Graham pins or stick slips applied not less than one for each 2 square feet of insulation. The insulation shall be applied to the sheet metal with a fire-retardant mastic on not less than 50 percent of the surface. The insulation shall be further held in place with mechanical fasteners spaced on not greater than 1-foot 0-inch centers. Side pieces of the duct lines shall be cut to lap inside the top and bottom pieces. All interior joints shall be painted to a smooth surface and all edges shall be coated with a fire- resistant mastic prior to being delivered to job site. Any duct sections found with uncoated edges will be rejected. The tops of all fasteners shall be coated with the same mastic. Exhaust ducts shall not be lined.
L. Closure Collars 1. A duct ending at a wall or partition shall have the edge turned back to form a closure collar and flanged tight to the wall or partition so that no sharp or ragged edge appears.
M. Flashing: 1. Where ducts pierce roof construction, the flashing shall be provided as part of this section and shall be as
N. Test Holes in Ductwork: 1. Test holes for testing air quantities in ducts shall be installed at locations to be specified by the Balancing Contractor. Rubber stoppers shall be provided for closing the test
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0800 - 4 AIR DISTRIBUTION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
holes. Where these holes are installed in insulated ductwork, a removable plug of approved insulation material shall be provided. An instrument port shall be provided as required by the TAB contractor, the Architect or his representative. 2. Instrument ports shall be die cast with screwed cover for the insulation thickness specified. Ports shall be located outside of the plenum with 20-gauge sheet-metal sleeve of the same size as the port opening, passing through insulation where ducts have interior insulation.
O. Elbows: 1. Radius type elbows shall be used wherever possible. Radius elbows shall have a center line radius of at least 1.5 times the duct width. Short radius elbows will not be allowed. Square elbows may be used if they are provided with turning vanes.
P. Branch Take-offs: 1. Expanded throat high efficiency takeoffs shall be used for all branch takeoffs unless shown otherwise on the drawings. An opposed blade volume damper with locking quadrant shall be provided at each branch takeoff. Where dampers are not accessible for adjustment from above, concealed ceiling regulators with adjustable chrome-plated covers shall be provided. High efficiency take-offs shall be Hercules or Daniel.
Q. Wall Penetrations: 1. All ducts penetrating structural or architectural walls shall be sealed air and sound tight as specified in Section 230100, Mechanical General Requirements.
R. Dimensions: 1. Ducts, unless otherwise approved, shall conform accurately to the dimensions indicated on the drawings, and shall be straight and smooth on the inside with joints neatly finished. All duct sizes are net free inside dimensions. Acoustically lined ducts shall have outside dimensions increased as required to accommodate the acoustic lining specified and still maintain the free area inside dimensions shown on the drawings.
S. Field Verification: 1. No ductwork shall be fabricated without first field verifying that the available space under the actual job conditions will permit installation of the ductwork without structural of other conflicts. This Contractor shall provide all necessary offsets and transitions to make all parts fit without additional compensation.
T. Duct Cleaning: 1. Before ducts are insulated and before the ceiling is installed and final connections made to the terminal boxes, the fans shall be operated at full capacity to blow out any dirt and debris from the ducts. The full capacity of the fan shall discharge into the duct. If it is not practical to use the main supply blower for this cleaning, the ducts may be blown out in sections by a portable fan. After the ducts have been cleaned and initially pressure tested, the final connection shall be made.
1.6 SHEET METAL SPECIALTIES:
A. Flexible Connections: 1. This Contractor shall provide flexible connections not less than 4 inches wide, constructed of heavy, waterproof, woven plastic-coated glass fabric at each ducted roof top unit, securely fastened to the unit and to the ductwork by a galvanized iron band, and provided with tightening screws. Corners shall be sewn tight shut. The connection shall be 20-ounce Ventfab.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0800 - 5 AIR DISTRIBUTION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
B. Volume Dampers: 1. Opposed-blade balancing dampers (OBD) to 12 inches by 36 inches: Dampers used in low-velocity branch ducts to control the volume or air flow shall be Young No. 817 volume control dampers. An operating head shall be placed on the side of the duct and shall be locked in position by a set key where the damper is accessible. Where the damper is not accessible, Young No. 817A or 817B volume control damper, consisting of an end bearing or miter gear, coupling, 3/8-inch square shaft, and a 31 x 3/8 inch regulator for operating the unit from suspended ceiling shall be provided. 2. Opposed-blade balancing dampers (OBD) larger than 12 inches by 36 inches: (Air Balance type AC2) opposed-blade damper of 14-gauge galvanized steel with locking quadrant shall be used or Ruskin, Louvers and Dampers, Daniel, United Air, or Safe Air.
C. Damper Regulators: 1. All volume dampers and splitter dampers in exposed ductwork shall be provided with Ventlock No. 640 or Young No. 443 damper regulators. Each volume damper and splitter damper concealed above an inaccessible ceiling, etc., shall be provided with a shaft extended through the ceiling, to which shall be attached a chrome-plated Ventlock No. 666 concealed damper regulator. No. 680 Ventlock miter gears shall be used where necessary.
D. Belt Guards: 1. Belt guards shall be fabricated and installed. Guards shall be constructed of 10-gauge wire, 1-inch mesh in 1-1/2-inch angle-iron welded frames. All guards shall be provided with an opening for a tachometer and shall be either the split type or easily removable for belt repair. The guards shall be anchored securely to the floor or walls to prevent any vibration.
E. Turning Vanes: 1. Turning vanes shall be furnished and installed in all 90-degree turns in all supply, return, mixed and fresh air ducts, and elsewhere as shown on the drawings. Install turning vanes in all exhaust ductwork except grease hood exhaust ductwork. Material of turning vanes shall match ductwork. Vanes are to be single blade, of size, spacing, gauge, and fabrication in accordance with SMACNA recommendations.
F. Ducts at Masonry: 1. Where ducts are shown connecting to masonry openings along edges of all plenums at floors and walls, a continuous 2 x 2 x 3/8-inch galvanized angle iron shall be provided. The angle iron shall be bolted to the construction and made airtight to the construction with caulking compound. Sheet metal at these locations shall be bolted to the angle irons.
G. V-Belt Drives: 1. V-belt drives of canvas and rubber construction of approved manufacturer shall be provided for all fans. V-belt drives shall have matched belts adjusted to drive the apparatus properly and to prevent slippage and undue wear in starting. Drives shall be designed for 150 percent of the specified motor nameplate rating. Drives for fans shall be Browning and Woods or an approved equal. Complete data on all drives must be submitted for approval. Drives must provide for the fan operating at midrange when at specified performance. At the completion of balancing, each drive shall be checked, and, if the fan is not operating near midrange, the V-belt drive shall be replaced with a suitable drive. Provide only "A", "B", or "C" Section drives. "3V" and "5V" are not acceptable. Provide variable pitch on all drives up to and including 10 hp. Larger horsepower drives shall be provided with fixed pitch sheaves and changed as necessary by the balancing Contractor. The cost of the new sheaves shall be borne by the Fan Manufacturer.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0800 - 6 AIR DISTRIBUTION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
1.7 INSTALLATION CHECK:
A. See Section 230100, paragraph "Installation Check".
1.8 EQUIPMENT:
A. Registers, Grilles, and Diffusers: 1. Registers, grilles, and diffusers of the sizes shown on the drawing and described herein shall be furnished and installed. All grilles, diffusers, and registers shall be complete with frames with rubber gaskets suitable for the area and wall construction where shown on the drawings. 2. Finish for all registers, diffusers, grilles, etc., shall be off-white unless otherwise selected by the Architect. The successful supplier shall submit color samples to the Architect for his selections before the order is placed. All data shall be certified, and all tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Air Diffusion Council. 3. See plan for schedule. 4. Contractor shall coordinate diffuser, register and grille types with architectural reflected ceiling plans and shall select type, style, mounting requirements, frame types, etc., suitable for respective ceilings. 5. For convenience and to establish quality and function, manufacturers and their model numbers are used herein and on the drawings. Items for air distribution shall be Price, Nailor, Metal Air, Tuttle & Bailey, Titus, Krueger or Anemostat. 6. Ceiling diffusers grilles and registers shall be independently supported from the structure so that they are not depending on ceiling for support. 7. Ceiling diffusers may be round necked (as shown on drawing) or equivalent size square neck (provide a square neck to round neck adapter as necessary). Flex duct shall typically connect directly to diffuser using a 1-1/2 radius flexible duct elbow (see details). If space does not allow for a full 1-1/2 radius elbow to be provided, then a lined sheet metal boot shall be provided (see details). The flexible duct shall be connected to the side of the sheet metal boot as shown on the detail. The flexible duct shall not be connected to the top of the sheet metal boot.
B. Temporary Filters: 1. Before any of the fan systems are operated, the Contractor shall provide and install in all filter framing systems one set of high-velocity disposable filters. 2. Filters shall be polyester media with scrim backing encased in a cardboard frame with bottle-cap material on the air entering and leaving side. Filters shall be Roto-Aire Model P-H23232, AAF, Continental, or Air Guard, Final filters, and prefilters shall be installed prior to air balance.
C. Flexible Duct (Low Pressure): 1. Flexible duct connections from the main trunk ducts to diffuser boots shall be furnished and installed as shown on the drawings. Flexible duct shall be used for supply air ducts only. Flexible ducts shall contain a full inner liner, 1 inch of insulation, vapor barrier, and compression fittings on both ends. Flexible ducts shall connect to trunk duct using high efficiency take offs. A balance damper with locking quadrant will be provided downstream of take-off from trunk duct. Maximum length of flexible duct is 10 feet. Flexible ducts shall be Genflex SLR-25 or Wiremold, Flexmaster, Cody, West or Hercules. Flex duct shall be secured using plastic cinch ties. 2. Ducts shall conform to the requirements for Class I connectors when tested in accordance with "Standard for Factory Made Air Ducts Materials and Air Duct Connectors" (UL 181). Ducts shall also pass the 15 minute U.L. flame penetration test as specified in the UL 181 Standard.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0800 - 7 AIR DISTRIBUTION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
1.9 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS AND QUALIFICATIONS:
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for supplying and installing equipment, vibration isolators, flexible connections, rigid steel frames, anchors, inserts, hangers and attachments, supports, seismic snubbers and bracing to comply with the International Building Code.
B. All mechanical equipment, and ductwork shall be braced, snubbed or supported to withstand seismic disturbances and remain operational. Furnish all engineering, labor, materials and equipment to provide protection against seismic disturbances as specified herein.
C. All supports, hangers, bases, braces and anchorage for all non-isolated equipment, ductwork and piping shall be installed as detailed and specified in the contract documents. Specific requirements on equipment anchorage and restraints, locations and sizes shall be furnished by the contractor and submitted to the Project Engineer for review after shop drawings for mechanical equipment have been reviewed.
D. All supports, hangers, bases, anchorage and bracing for all isolated equipment shall be designed by a professional engineer employed by the restraint manufacturer, qualified with seismic experience in bracing for mechanical equipment. Shop drawings submitted for earthquake bracing and anchors shall bear the Engineer's signed professional seal.
E. The Contractor shall require all equipment suppliers to furnish equipment that meets the seismic code, with bases designed to receive seismic bracing and/or anchorage. All isolated mechanical equipment bracing to be used in the project shall be designed from the Equipment Shop Drawings certified correct by the equipment manufacturer for respective Seismic Zone.
F. Manufacturers and suppliers of restraint equipment and systems approved for use by the Contractor, for isolated and non-isolated systems, are Mason Industries, Inc., Korfund, Amber/Booth Company, Vibration Mountings & Control Co, and B-Line. Manufacturer of seismic restraint equipment and the vibration isolators for isolated equipment shall be the same manufacturer.
G. Manufacturers representative shall inspect the project and provide a report once everything is properly seismically restrained. A copy of the report shall be submitted to the engineer and a copy shall be placed in the O&M manuals.
H. Electric Heaters – Unit, Wall Mounted and Ceiling Mounted or Hung: 1. Electric heaters of the size, type and capacity shown on the drawings shall be furnished and installed. Heaters shall be recessed or semi-recessed as required and shall be suitable for the surface they are located in. Heater shall be complete with electric heating element, rough-in box, fan, motor, automatic reset thermal protection, built-in two-pole terminal block, built-in thermostat and baked enamel enclosure. 2. Heater shall be Q-mark, Chromalox, Markel, Marley, Berko.
I. Wall-Mounted Centrifugal Domed Exhausters: 1. Wall-mounted exhaust fans of the capacity shown on the drawings shall be furnished and installed. Fans shall be direct drive, complete with backdraft dampers and spun aluminum domed housing. Blower shall be non-overloading backward inclined. The motor and bearing shall not come into contact with the discharge air and shall be readily accessible without removal of fan or housing from location. A disconnect switch and self- flashing prefabricated curb shall be supplied with fan. Fan shall be complete with insect screen. 2. Fans shall be Penn or equal of Jenn, ACME, Cook, or Trane.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0800 - 8 AIR DISTRIBUTION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
1.10 100% OUTSIDE AIR MAKE-UP AIR UNITS (MAU):
A. Furnish and install a 100% outside air make-up air unit of the size and capacity shown on drawings. Internally wired and designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as low as 0̊ F.
B. Heating capacities are rated in accordance with ARI standards. Unit design to be certified by the American Gas Association (AGA), specifically for Laboratory listed and designed for outdoor installation. Unit shall be ASHRAE 90.1 compliant.
C. Each Make-up Air unit shall be piped, wired, tested and shipped in one piece with the option of splitting the unit at the supply fan section and heat section. Outside air system, return air system, filters, switches, supply air fan and all standard operating safety controls shall be furnished and factory installed. Unit shall have internally wired and integral motorized dampers at supply and return.
D. Unit Performance: 1. Unit shall have a minimum heating system efficiency of 80%. Units shall be safety certified in accordance with UL Standard UL465, and ANSI Standard Z21.47. Unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped, wired and shipped in one piece. Unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor application with a fully weatherproof cabinet.
E. Unit Construction: 1. Cabinet shall be constructed entirely of galvanized metal with the exterior constructed of 18 gauge or heavier material.
F. Access to controls, filters, blower, heating section, and other items needing periodic checking or maintenance shall be through hinged access doors with a quarter turn latch (door fastening screws are not acceptable).
G. Air side service access doors shall be fully gasketed with rain break overhangs. Air side access doors will have an internal metal liner to protect the door insulation.
H. Unit exterior shall be painted with two-part polyurethane paint over a wash primer and a paint grip type galvanized steel.
I. Wiring shall be color coded and marked with a three digit identification on each end.
J. The interior air side of the cabinet shall be entirely insulated on all exterior panels with 1" thick, one pound density, neoprene coated, fiberglass insulation.
K. All openings through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least ½" in height around the opening through the base pan.
L. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate unit lifting-rigging, service areas and caution areas.
M. Wiring diagrams shall be in color and marked to match the color and marking of the wires and shall be both “point-to-point” and “ladder” diagrams.
N. Diagrams shall also be laminated in plastic and permanently fixed to control compartment door. Installation and maintenance manual shall be supplied with each unit, located in a metal pocket in the control access compartment.
O. Blowers:
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0800 - 9 AIR DISTRIBUTION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
1. Blower(s) shall be double inlet with forward curved blades type. 2. Adjustable V-belt drive shall be provided with a minimum rating of 140% of the motor nameplate brake horsepower when the adjustable pulley is at the minimum RPM. 3. Blowers, drives and motors shall be dynamically balanced.
P. Outside Air: 1. Make-up Air unit shall use 100% outside air when occupied including a motor operated outdoor air damper and return air damper constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, air foil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 25 CFM of leakage per square foot of damper area when subjected to 2" WG air pressure differential across the damper. Damper motor shall be spring return to insure closing of outdoor air damper during periods of unit shut down or power failure, or unoccupied.
Q. Gas Heating Section: 1. Unit shall heat using natural gas fuel and with staged heating capacity. 2. Unit shall be provided with a gas heating furnace consisting of an aluminized steel heat exchanger with multiple concavities, an induced draft blower an electric pressure switch to lockout the gas valve until the combustion chamber is purged an combustion air flow is established. Heat exchanger tubes with separate internal turbulators are not acceptable. 3. Unit shall be provided with a gas ignition system consisting of an electronic ignitor to a pilot system, which will be continuous when the heater is operating, but will shut off the pilot when heating is not required. 4. Units tubular gas heat exchanger will carry a 10 year warranty. 5. Unit shall have single point power connection.
R. Smoke Detector: 1. Unit shall be provided with terminal strip connections for field supplied supply air smoke detector wired to shut off the unit control circuit.
S. Electrical: 1. Each unit shall be wired and tested at the factory before shipment. Wiring shall comply with NEC requirements and shall conform with all applicable UL standards. All electrical components shall be labeled according to the electrical diagram and be UL recognized where applicable. Each unit shall have a 115 volt control circuit transformer, high temperature sensor, system switch, and control circuit fuse. 2. The supply air fan motors shall have contactors and external overload protection. Main control panel shall be of weatherproof construction with a dead front cover over main power circuit control and strip heaters to keep systems operational down to -20 deg F. A terminal board shall be provided in the bottom of the main control panels for field wiring entrance. 3. Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and wired internal disconnect switch with fusing. 4. Each unit shall be furnished with a factory installed starter. 5. Unit shall be provided with phase and brown-out protection to shut down all motors in the unit if the phases are more than 10% out of balance on voltage, or the voltage is more than 10% under design voltage. 6. Contractor/Supplier shall coordinate electrical requirements, including voltage, prior to ordering the units.
T. Filters: 1. Filters shall be 2" thick throw away.
U. Equipment Stands:
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0800 - 10 AIR DISTRIBUTION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
1. Equipment stands shall be provided and installed by the contractor. Equipment stands shall be constructed of galvanized steel, are to be fully gasketed between the stand top and unit bottom with the stand providing full perimeter support, cross structure support and air seal for the unit. Unit shall be mounted 6-inch thick concrete pad. Equipment stands height shall be as specified in the mechanical details.
V. Manufacturer’s Instructions 1. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, product carton installation instructions and manufacturer’s SPEC-DATA® sheets.
W. Examination 1. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
X. Installation 1. Install Packaged rooftop units in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions On equipment stands provided by manufacturer 2. Packaged units shall be Trane, Lennox, AAON or Carrier.
END OF SECTION 23 0800
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0800 - 11 AIR DISTRIBUTION, HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0800 - 12 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 23 0900 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. All pertinent sections of Section 15A, Division 23, are a part of the work described in this section. Division 1 is a part of this and all other sections of these specifications.
1.2 APPROVED CONTROLS SYSTEMS
A. The approved ATC Controls system is Schneider Electric as supplied and installed by Utah Yamas Controls.
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. The scope of work shall include all labor, material, and equipment necessary to complete the temperature control work for the entire project.
B. The Contractor under this heading shall furnish and install a complete electric, electronic and direct digital temperature control system, with the ability to integrate into the existing campus control system at a later date as specified. This should include the furnishing of an IP level device in order for monitoring of the building over the owner’s network.
C. This system shall include but not be limited to controls and equipment as hereinafter specified: 1. Existing Gas Fired Furnace (bldg. #4101 only) 2. Duct Furnace (bldg. #4101 only) 3. Make-up Air Unit (bldg. #4141 only) 4. Exhaust Fans 5. Electric Heater
D. The Contractor shall carefully review all notes, coordination schedules, and drawings for work required under this section of the specification.
E. The Contractor shall carefully coordinate the HVAC equipment controls and ascertain that the necessary relays, etc, provided with the HVAC equipment are compatible with the owner’s existing control scheme. Any difficulties and or conflicts shall be immediately brought to the engineer’s attention in writing during the bidding period. Once the bidding period is over, the ATC contractor shall be responsible for any additional controls necessary for a complete control system as described herein.
F. The controls contractor shall make a technician available at all times while the commissioning agent is reviewing 100% of the mechanical equipment after the system has been tested and balanced by the test and balance contractor prior to the completion of the project.
1.4 RELATED WORK:
A. The electrical contractor shall provide and install and wire the duct smoke detectors as required. The smoke detectors, when in alarm shall shut down the associated fans.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0900 - 1 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
A. Prior to any installation, the Contractor shall submit, within 21 days after award of contract, a complete submittal. This submittal shall contain six (6) copies of complete literature on all control equipment including control diagrams. This submittal shall specifically address the interrelationships between the HVAC equipment and the ATC controls.
1.6 TESTS:
A. The automatic temperature control contractor shall furnish a technician familiar with the control system to the testing and balancing contractor to verify the operation of control system components.
1.7 ELECTRICAL WIRING:
A. All power wiring of fans and all other heating and ventilating equipment shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. The ATC Contractor is responsible for all control wiring not shown on electrical drawings or specified elsewhere in connection with the automatic temperature control system. All temperature control wiring shall be installed in conduit as required by the National Electric Code and local codes. In addition, all exposed wiring, wiring in walls and wiring above non-lay-in ceilings shall be run in conduit. All ATC Wiring above lay-in ceilings shall be plenum rated.
1.8 EQUIPMENT:
A. All control devices shall be mounted a maximum of 24" above the ceiling.
B. Thermostats/Sensors: 1. The thermostats shall be provided by the ATC contractor and have the ability to be integrated into the building BMS. Thermostats shall be Low voltage type or line voltage type as required. Thermostats and sensors shall be wired by the ATC contractor.
C. Communications 1. Communication link for peer to peer communications between subbases shall be the responsibility of the ATC contractor. 2. The ATC system will communicate with each HVAC equipment thermostat via the network. The HVAC equipment will be started and stopped by a pre-programmed time schedule, or when occupancy is detected. The system shall be capable of displaying schedules (including holiday capability), set points, unit status, low temperature alarm point, OAT, DAT. 3. There shall be communication between communicating thermostats.
D. Aquastat: 1. Provide, install, and wire aquastats in domestic water return piping for controlling circulation pumps.
E. Miscellaneous: 1. The control contractor shall furnish all two-position relays, transformers, capacity relays, plus all other controls necessary to meet the specifications and to provide for a properly operating automatic control system. All switches and relays must be UL listed and must meet current and voltage requirements of the particular application.
F. Labels:
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0900 - 2 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
1. All controls except individual room controls shall be permanently labeled with an identification number keyed to the control diagrams. Labels shall be mounted adjacent to the device such that if the device is replaced, the label remains intact. This applies to both field and panel mounted controls.
PART 2 - SEQUENCE OF CONTROL:
2.1 EXISTING FURNACE (BLDG. #4101 only):
A. The existing furnace shall have an outside air damper, a return air damper and gas heating.
B. The room sensor shall signal for heating as required. The equipment shall cycle the heating stages in sequence to maintain room temperature.
C. During the occupied mode as determined by the ATC system, the equipment shall operate to satisfy the thermostat set point. The existing furnace blower fan(s) shall operate continuously at full capacity during the occupied mode. 100% outside air shall be utilized, with the outside air damper fully opened and with the return air damper fully closed. The exhaust fan shall be interlocked with the occupied mode and shall operate at full capacity when in occupied mode.
D. In the unoccupied mode as determined by the ATC system, the equipment shall operate to satisfy the unoccupied thermostat set point. The exhaust fan shall be non-operational. 100% return air shall be utilized with the outside air damper fully closed and the return air damper fully opened.
E. The sensor shall be located as indicated on drawings.
2.2 DUCT FURNACE (BLDG. #4101 only):
A. The duct furnace shall serve as supplemental heat to the existing furnace, it shall have gas heating and it shall act as an extension of the existing furnace in building #4101.
B. During the occupied mode as determined by the ATC system, the existing furnace is first stage heating and the duct furnace is second stage heating. The equipment shall operate to satisfy the thermostat set point. The equipment shall modulate the gas input as required to maintain room temperature.
C. In the unoccupied mode the duct furnace shall be non-operational.
2.3 MAKE-UP AIR UNIT (BLDG. #4141 only):
A. Make-up Air Units have an integral outside air damper, an integral return air damper and gas heating.
B. The room sensor shall signal for heating as required. The equipment shall cycle the heating stages in sequence to maintain room temperature.
C. During the occupied mode as determined by the ATC system, the equipment shall operate to satisfy the thermostat set point. The make-up air unit blower fan(s) shall operate continuously at full capacity during the occupied mode. 100% outside air shall be utilized, with the outside air damper fully opened and with the return air damper fully closed. The exhaust fan shall be interlocked with the occupied mode and shall operate at full capacity when in occupied mode.
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0900 - 3 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
D. In the unoccupied mode as determined by the ATC system, the equipment shall operate to satisfy the unoccupied thermostat set point. The exhaust fan shall be non-operational. 100% return air shall be utilized with the outside air damper fully closed and the return air damper fully opened.
E. The sensor shall be located as indicated on drawings.
2.4 Exhaust Fans:
A. See exhaust fans schedule to identify fan control requirements unless noted elsewhere.
B. Furnish and install all relays, switches, conduit, wiring, etc. required to facilitate exhaust fan operation.
2.5 Electric Heater
A. The electric heater shall be controlled by either internal or wall mounted thermostats and shall be activated when temperature below setpoint. ATC contractor will provide and wire wall mounted thermostats as indicated. If this heater is located in a fire riser room etc. an additional space temp sensor shall be provided by the ATC contractor and monitored space temperature. If the temperature drops below 35°F an alarm shall be generated.
2.6 TRAINING:
A. Controls manufacturer and installer will provide (2) four-hour group training sessions for district and servicing contractors. Training subjects shall be coordinated with the owner to meet their requirements and needs.
END OF SECTION 23 0900
VBFA 18454 & 18455 2019-03-20 23 0900 - 4 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 0500
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and other applicable documents are considered a part of the electrical documents insofar as they apply as if referred to in full. Contractor must review the entire set of plans and specifications. Reviewing only the electrical set is not acceptable. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of electrical work is indicated on drawings and/or specified in Divisions 26, 27 and 28 sections of the specification. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, supervision and service necessary for a complete electrical system. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following items. ITEM SECTION
1. Electrical General Provisions 26 0500 2. Electrical Submittals and Spare Parts 26 0502 3. Electrical Connections for Equipment 26 0507 4. Conductors and Cables 26 0519 5. Grounding 26 0526 6. Supporting Devices 26 0529 7. Conduit Raceway 26 0532 8. Electrical Boxes and Fittings 26 0533 9. Electrical Identification 26 0553 10. Occupancy Sensors 26 0923 11. Switchgear and Switchboards 26 2413 12. Wiring Devices 26 2726 13. Overcurrent Protective Devices 26 2815 14. Motor and Circuit Disconnects 26 2816 15. Motor Starters 26 2913 16. Demolition 26 4119 17. Surge Protective Devices (SPD) 26 4313 18. Interior and Exterior Building Lighting 26 5100 19. Fire Alarm and Detection System 28 3111 B. Use of standard industry symbols together with the special symbols, notes, and instructions indicated on the drawings describe the work, materials, apparatus and systems required as a portion of this work. C. Visit the site during the bidding period to determine existing conditions affecting electrical and other work. All costs arising from site conditions and/or preparation shall be included in the base bid. No additional charges will be allowed due to inadequate site inspection.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0500-1 © BNA Consulting ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.3 DEFINITION OF TERMS
A. The following terms used in Divisions 26, 27 and 28 documents are defined as follows: 1. "Provide": Means furnish, install and connect, unless otherwise indicated. 2. "Furnish": Means purchase and deliver to project site. 3. "Install": Means to physically install the items in-place. 4. "Connect": Means make final electrical connections for a complete operating piece of equipment. 1.4 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Consult all other sections, determine the extent and character of related work and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete installation. B. General and Supplementary Conditions: Drawings and general provisions of contract and Division 1 of the Specifications, apply to all Division 26, 27 and 28 sections. C. Miscellaneous Metal Work: 1. Provide fittings, brackets, backing, supports, rods, welding and pipe as required for support and bracing of raceways, lighting fixtures, panelboards, distribution boards, switchboards, motor controls centers, etc. See Division 5, Metals for material and installation requirements. D. Miscellaneous Lumber and Framing Work: 1. Provide wood grounds, nailers, blocking, fasteners, and anchorage for support of electrical materials and equipment. See Division 6, Rough Carpentry for material and installation requirements. E. Moisture Protection: 1. Provide membrane clamps, sheet metal flashing, counter flashing, caulking and sealants as required for waterproofing of conduit penetrations and sealing penetrations in or through fire walls, floors and ceiling slabs and foundation walls. All penetrations through vapor barriers at slabs on grade shall be taped and made vapor tight. See Division 7, Thermal and Moisture Protection for material and installation requirements. F. Access panels and doors: 1. Provide in walls, ceiling, and floors for access to electrical devices and equipment. See Division 8, Doors and Windows for material and installation requirements. G. Painting: 1. Provide surface preparation, priming and finish coating as required for electrical cabinets, exposed conduit, pull and junction boxes, poles, surface metal raceways, etc. See Division 9, Finishes for material and installation requirements. 1.5 WORK FURNISHED AND INSTALLED UNDER ANOTHER SECTION REQUIRING CONNECTIONS UNDER THIS SECTION:
A. Provide electrical service, make requisite connections and perform operational test. Items furnished and installed under other sections and connected under this section, include but are not limited to the following: 1. Electric motors. 2. Package mechanical equipment: fans, fan coil units, pumps, boilers, duplex compressors, etc. 3. Motorized dampers.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0500-2 © BNA Consulting ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
4. Fire and smoke dampers 5. Duct mounted smoke detectors.
1.6 WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS DIVISION:
A. Items of work provided under another contract include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Telephone cables and electronic equipment. 2. Data system cables, fittings, coverplates and electronic equipment. 3. Control wires for irrigation control valves. 4. Energy management/temperature control system; both line and low voltage including conductors and conduit. 5. Television monitors and projection equipment. 6. Security system equipment, cables, fittings, and coverplates. 7. CCTV cabling and electronic equipment. 8. MATV cabling and electronic equipment 1.7 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:
A. Before bidding, Contractor shall familiarize himself with the drawings, specifications and project site. Submit requests for clarification to Architect/Engineer in writing prior to issuance of final addendum. After signing the contract, the Contractor shall meet the intent, purpose, and function of the Contract Documents. Any costs of materials, labor and equipment arising therefrom, to make each system complete and operable, is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Reference to codes, standards, specifications and recommendations of technical societies, trade organizations and governmental agencies refers to the latest edition of such publications adopted and published prior to submittal of the bid proposed, unless noted otherwise herein. Such codes or standards are considered a part of this specification as though fully repeated herein. B. When codes, standards, regulations, etc. allow work of lesser quality or extent than is specified under this Division, nothing in said codes shall be construed or inferred as reducing the quality, requirements or extent of the Drawings and Specifications. Perform work in accordance with applicable requirements of all governing codes, rules and regulations including the following minimum standards, whether statutory or not: 1. National Electric Code (NEC). 2. International Building Code (IBC). 3. International Fire Code (IFC). 4. International Mechanical Code (IMC). C. Standards: Comply with the following standards where applicable for equipment and materials specified under this Division. 1. UL Underwriters' Laboratories 2. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials 3. CBN Certified Ballast Manufacturers 4. IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association 5. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 6. ANSI American National Standards Institute 7. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0500-3 © BNA Consulting ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
D. All electrical apparatus furnished under this Section shall conform to (NEMA) standards and the NEC and bear the Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) label where such label is applicable. E. Comply with requirements of State and Local Ordinances. If a conflict occurs between these requirements and the Contract Documents, the most stringent requirements shall govern. The Contractor accepts this responsibility upon submitting his bid, and no extra charge will be allowed after the contract is awarded. This shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with any requirements of the Contract Documents that may be in excess of the aforementioned requirements, and not contrary to same. F. Obtain all permits, inspections, etc. required by authority having jurisdiction. Include all fees in bid. Furnish a certificate of approval to the Owner's Representative from the Inspection Authority at completion of the work. G. Employ only qualified craftsmen with at least three years of experience. Workmanship shall be neat, have a good mechanical appearance and conform to best electrical construction practices. Provide a competent superintendent to direct the work at all times. Any person found incompetent shall be discharged from the project and replaced by satisfactory personnel. H. Contractor shall have a current state contracting license applicable to type of work to be performed under this contract. 1.9 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE ORDER PROPOSALS
A. In the event that a submission of a change order is issued by the contractor, the following information will be required to be submitted by the contractor, prior to any consideration by the owner/architect. a. Where project manager or project engineer work is required, the labor cost shall not exceed 2% of the electrical portion of the change order. b. All equipment, including conduit and wire, shall be itemized, identifying unit costs and quantities of equipment. Distributor quotes shall accompany all change order requests. The distributor quotes shall include costs for all equipment including conduit and wire. Lot pricing for equipment is not acceptable. c. The general contractor shall review and confirm that the quantity and costs of materials submitted appear reasonable for the scope proposed. d. Labor units shall not exceed base NECA #1 standards. No adjustment factors shall be approved. e. Any research and labeling time, shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor and shall not be included in the change order request. f. Any costs associated with the purchase of tools or transportation shall be fully itemized for review by architect/owner. g. Overtime rates shall only be approved where additional manpower cannot achieve the same result. h. Change order form shall follow the following format: i. PCO number ii. Detailed description of work being performed iii. Location on project where work is performed iv. Chosen NECA column v. Identified material: 1. QTY 2. Unit cost 3. Mark up 4. Material total
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0500-4 © BNA Consulting ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
vi. Identified labor: 1. QTY 2. Unit cost 3. Composite labor rate 4. Labor total 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS:
A. Maintain, on a daily basis, a complete set of “Record Drawings”, reflecting an accurate record of work in accordance with the following: 1. Show the complete routing and location of all feeders rated 100 amps and larger. Locate work buried below grade or under slab, work concealed above ceilings, and work in concealed spaces, dimensionally from fixed structural elements (not partition walls, etc.) 2. Show the complete routing and location of all telecommunications conduits, systems raceways, and empty raceways, 1-1/4" and larger. Locate work buried below grade or under slab, work concealed above ceilings, and work in concealed spaces, dimensionally from fixed structural elements (not partition walls, etc.). 3. Show all changes, deviations, addendum items, change orders, job instructions, etc., that change the work from that shown on the contract documents, including wall relocations, fixtures and device changes, branch circuiting changes, etc. Where locations of boxes, raceways, equipment, etc. are adjusted in the field to fit conditions, but such new locations may not be obvious by referring to the contract document, show new locations on the record drawings. B. At the discretion of the Architect/Engineer, the drawings will be reviewed on a periodic basis and used as a pre-requisite for progress payments. This requirement shall not be construed as authorization for the Contractor to make changes in the layout, or work without written authorization for such changes. The “Record Drawings” for daily recording shall consist of a set of blue line prints of the Contract Drawings. C. Upon completion of the work, purchase a complete set of electronic drawings. Transfer all “Record” information from the blue line prints to the drawings via the current CAD program that it was written. The Architect/Engineer shall review the drawings and the Contractor shall incorporate the resulting comments into the final record drawings. The Contractor shall make two complete copies of the drawings electronically and forward this to the Engineer. D. Certify the “Record Drawings” for correctness by placing and signing the following certifications of the first sheet of the drawings: "CERTIFIED CORRECT (3/8" high letters)
(Name of General Contractor)
By: Date:
(Name of Electrical Contractor)
By: Date: 1.11 GUARANTEE:
A. Ensure that electrical system installed under this contract is in proper working order and in compliance with drawings, specifications, and/or authorized changes. Without additional charge, replace any work or materials that develop defect, except from ordinary wear and tear, within one year from the date of substantial completion.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0500-5 © BNA Consulting ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Exception: Incandescent and fluorescent lamps shall be guaranteed for a period of two months from the date of substantial completion. PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL:
A. Products are specified by manufacturer name, description, and/or catalog number. Discrepancies between equipment specified and the intended function of equipment shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer in writing prior to bidding. Failure to report any conflict, including catalog numbers, discontinued products, etc., does not relieve the Contractor from meeting the intent of the contract documents nor shall it change the contract cost. If the Contractor is unable to interpret any part of the plans and/or specifications, or should he find discrepancies therein, he shall bring this to the attention of the Architect/Engineer who will issue interpretation and/or additional instructions to Bidders before the project is bid. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Provide products of manufacturers specified. Manufacturers catalog numbers and descriptions establish the quality of product required. Substitutions will be considered if a duplicate written application (2-copies) is at the office of the Architect/Engineer eight (8) working days prior to the day of the bidding. The application shall include the following: 1) A statement certifying that the equipment proposed is equal to that specified; that it has the same electrical and physical characteristics, compatible dimensions, and meets the functional intent of the contract documents; 2) The specified and submittal catalog numbers of the equipment under consideration; 3) A pictorial and specification brochure. B. Any conflict arising from the use of substituted equipment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, who shall bear all costs required to make the equipment comply with the intent of the contract documents. C. Samples may be required for non-standard or substituted items before installation during construction. Provide all samples as required. D. No materials or apparatus may be substituted after the bid opening except where the equipment specified has been discontinued. E. Provide only equipment specified in the Contract Documents or approved by addendum. 2.3 SPARE PARTS:
A. Provide spare parts (fuses, diffusers, lamps, etc.) as specified. Transmit all spare parts to Owner's Representative prior to substantial completion. PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Layout electrical work in advance of construction to eliminate unnecessary cutting, drilling, channeling, etc. Where such cutting, drilling, or channeling becomes necessary for proper installation; perform with care. Use skilled mechanics of the trades involved. Repair damage to building and equipment at no additional cost to the contract. Cutting work of other Contractors shall be done only with the consent of that Contractor. Cutting structural members shall not be permitted. B. Provide equipment enclosures appropriate to the environment to which they are installed. For example, provide NEMA 3R for exterior enclosures and NEMA 1 for interior enclosures unless otherwise noted.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0500-6 © BNA Consulting ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
C. Since the drawings of floor, wall, and ceiling installation are made at small scale; outlets, devices, equipment, etc., are indicated only in their approximate location unless dimensioned. Locate outlets and apparatus symmetrically on floors, walls and ceilings where not dimensioned, and coordinate such locations with work of other trades to prevent interferences. Verify all dimensions on the job. Do not scale the electrical drawings, but refer to the architectural and mechanical shop drawings and project drawings for dimensions as applicable. D. Perform for other trades, the electrical wiring and connection for all devices, equipment or apparatus. Consult Architectural, Mechanical, and other applicable drawings, and all applicable shop drawings to avoid switches, outlets, and other equipment from being hidden behind doors, cabinets, counters, heating equipment, etc., or from being located in chalkboards, tackboards, glass panels, etc. Relocate buried electrical devices and/or connections as directed at no additional cost. E. Coordinate the location of outlets, devices, connections, and equipment with the supplier of the systems furniture prior to rough-in. F. Where conduit, outlets or apparatus are to be encased in concrete, it must be located and secured by a journeyman or foreman present at the point of installation. Check locations of the electrical items before and after concrete and/or masonry installation and relocate displaced items. G. Provide block-outs, sleeves, demolition work, etc., required for installation of work specified in this division. 3.2 CLEAN:
A. Clean up all equipment, conduit, fittings, packing cartons and other debris that is a direct result of the installation of the work of this Division. B. Clean fixtures, interiors and exteriors of all equipment, and raceways. Replace all filters in electrical equipment upon request for Substantial Completion. 3.3 POWER OUTAGES:
A. All power outages required for execution of this work shall occur during non-standard working hours and at the convenience of the Owner. Include all costs for overtime work in bid. B. Submit written request at least 7 days in advance of scheduled outage and proceed with outage only after receiving authorization from the Owner's Representative. C. Keep all outages to an absolute minimum. 3.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS:
A. Provide storage space for storage of materials and apparatus and assume complete responsibility for all losses due to any cause whatsoever. In no case shall storage interfere with traffic conditions in any public thoroughfare or constitute a hazard to persons in the vicinity. Protect completed work, work underway, and apparatus against loss or damage. 3.5 ROOF PENETRATIONS:
A. Where raceways penetrate roofing or similar structural area, provide appropriate roof jack coordinate with the roofing contractor and the Architect in order to match the vent with the roof construction. The jack shall be sized to fit tightly to raceway for weather-tight seal, and with flange extending a minimum of 9" under roofing in all sides or as required by the roof type of construction. Completely seal opening between inside diameter of roof flashing and outside diameter of penetrating raceways. Coordinate all work with work
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0500-7 © BNA Consulting ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
required under roofing section of specifications. 3.6 FIRE PENETRATION SEALS:
A. Seal all penetrations for work of this section through fire rated floors, walls and ceilings to prevent the spread of smoke, fire, toxic gas or water through the penetration either before, during or after fire. The fire rating of the penetration seal shall be at least that of the floor, wall or ceiling that it is installed, so that the original fire rating of the floor or wall is maintained as required by Article 300-21 of the National Electrical Code. Where applicable, provide OZ Type CFSF/I and CAFSF/I fire seal fittings for conduit and cable penetrations through concrete and masonry walls, floors, slabs, and similar structures. Where applicable, provide 3M CID cast-in device for floor slabs. Where applicable, provide 3M fire barrier sealing penetration system, and/or IPC Flame Safe Fire Stop System, and/or Chase Foam fire stop system, including wall wrap, partitions, caps, and other accessories as required. All materials to comply with UL 1479 (ASTM E-814). Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of sealing fittings and barrier sealing systems. 3.7 PROJECT FINALIZATION AND START-UP:
A. Upon completion of equipment and system installation, assemble all equipment Factory Representatives and Subcontractors for system start-up. B. Each Representative and Subcontractor shall assist in start-up and check out their respective system and remain at the site until the total system operation is accepted by the Owner's representative. C. The Factory Representative and/or System Subcontractor shall give personal instruction on operating and maintenance of their equipment to the Owner's maintenance and/or operation personnel. To certify acceptance of operation and instruction by the Owner's Representative, the contractor shall prepare a written statement as follows: 1. This is to certify that the Factory Representative and System Subcontractor for each of the systems listed below have performed start-up and final check out of their respective systems. 2. The Owner's Representative has received complete and thorough instruction in the operation and maintenance of each system. SYSTEM FACTORY REPRESENTATIVE (List systems included) (List name and address of Factory Representative)
Owner's Representative Contractor
D. Send copy of acceptance to Architect/Engineer. 3.8 FINAL REVIEW:
A. At the time of final review, the project foreman shall accompany the reviewing party, and remove coverplates, panel covers and other access panels as requested, to allow review of the entire electrical system.
END OF SECTION 26 0500
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0500-8 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 0502
ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS, O & M MANUALS AND SPARE PARTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to all Division 26, 27 and 28 sections. B. Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and other applicable documents are considered a part of the electrical documents insofar as they apply as if referred to in full. Contractor must review the entire set of plans and specifications. Reviewing only the electrical set is not acceptable. C. Consult all other sections, determine the extent and character of related work and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete installation. 1.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. GENERAL: 1. After the Contract is awarded but prior to ordering, manufacture, or installation of any equipment, prepare complete Submittals including shop drawings, product data, brochures, etc. for materials and equipment as required by each section of the specification. 2. Review of Submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for dimensions and/or errors that may be contained therein, or deviations from the Contract Document's requirements. It shall be clearly understood that the noting of some errors but overlooking others does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the Shop Drawings and Brochures, the requirements of the Contract Document's shall govern and are not waived, or superseded in any way by the review of the Shop Drawings and Brochures. 3. Submittals are reviewed, not approved. Comments made within submittals do not alter the contract documents in any way. The contractor is still responsible, regardless of comments (if any) made within submittals, for complying with drawings and specifications. 4. Notify engineer in writing if any of the comments noted in the submittals alter the contract cost. A comment within the submittal process which increases/decreases cost of product is not an authorization to the contractor under any circumstances to proceed. 5. Notify engineer of any modifications between contract documents and submittals. It is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure compliance. 6. ELECTRONIC SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: a. Provide submittals in Portable Document Format (PDF). b. Documents must be electronically bookmarked by Division e.g. 26, 27 and 28, Specification section e.g. 26 0510 and individually for each item submitted for light fixtures, switchgear, transformer, panelboard etc. and keyword searchable using Adobe Acrobat
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0502-1 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS AND SPARE PARTS
(http://www.adobe.com/acrobat) or Bluebeam Revu (http://www.bluebeam.com) for each relevant section. c. Electronically highlight all options for light fixtures, electrical equipment, etc. Manual highlighting and scanning of the documents is NOT acceptable and will NOT be reviewed. d. Provide only completed cutsheets for all fixture and equipment types. Blank cutsheets submitted with a schedule are NOT acceptable and will NOT be reviewed. e. At the time of submission, the electrical contractor shall provide a complete and comprehensive submission of all required specification sections/shop drawings at the same time. Exceptions may be given, with prior approval, for time-sensitive equipment. f. A maximum of one submittal per specification section is allowed. It is NOT acceptable to provide a product by product submittal. Single product by product submittals will NOT be reviewed. B. SCHEDULING 1. GENERAL a. A minimum period of two weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required each time Submittals are submitted or resubmitted for review. This time period shall be considered by the Contractor when scheduling submittal data. b. If the shop drawings are rejected twice, the contractor shall reimburse the engineering firm the sum of $1,200.00 for the third review and any additional reviews required prior to the commencement of additional review. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. PRE-SUBMITTAL PREPARATION a. Prior to submission of the Shop Drawings and Project Data, review and certify that they are in compliance with the Contract Documents. Verify all dimensional information to ensure proper clearance for installation of equipment. b. Shop drawings requiring the use of electronic documents (floor plans, Lighting plans, fire alarm plans, etc.) shall be requested via a request for information (RFI) through the general contractor. Electronic documents will be provided to the Architect for distribution. No direct vendor requests will be accepted. c. Contractor is completely responsible for the content of the submittal 2. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS a. Provide a stamp or statement on each submittal as follows: i. I hereby certify that this Shop Drawing and/or Brochure has been checked prior to submittal and that it complies in all respects with the requirements of the Contract Drawings and Specifications for this Project. (Name of Electrical Subcontractor)
Name .
Position Date .
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0502-2 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS AND SPARE PARTS
i. Failure to provide certification will result in submittals being rejected and returned without review. b. Brochures to be submitted as supplementary information shall be published by the Manufacturers and shall contain complete and detailed engineering and dimensional information. Brochures submitted shall contain only information relevant to the particular equipment or materials to be furnished. The Contractor shall not submit catalogs that describe several different items in addition to those items to be used, unless all irrelevant information is marked out, or unless relevant information is clearly marked. Brochures from each manufacturer shall be identified and submitted separately. c. Shop Drawings shall be done in an easily legible scale and shall contain sufficient plans, elevations, sections, and isometrics to clearly describe the equipment or apparatus, and its location. Drawings shall be prepared by an Engineer/Draftsmen skilled in this type of work. Shop Drawings shall be drawn to at least 1/4" = 1'0" scale. d. Observe the following rules when submitting the Shop Drawings and Brochures. i. Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in the lower right hand corner, and each Brochure shall indicate on the front cover the following: Title of the sheet or brochure, name and location of the building; names of the Architect and Electrical Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, Manufacturer, Supplier/Vendor, etc., date of submittal, and the date of correction and revision. Unless the above information is included the submittal will be rejected and returned without being reviewed. 1. Submittal Identification shall include the following:
a. A unique number, sequentially assigned, shall be noted on the transmittal form accompanying each item submitted.
b. Original submittal numbers shall have the following format: “XXX-Y;” where “XXX” is the originally assigned submittal number and “Y” is a sequential letter assigned for resubmittals (for example, A, B, or C being the first, second, and third resubmittals, respectively). Submittal 25B, for example, is the second resubmittal of Submittal 25.
D. POST-SUBMITTAL 1. Check all materials and equipment after arrival on the job site and verify compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.3 PROVIDE SUBMITTALS AS REQUESTED FOR EACH OF THE SECTIONS LISTED BELOW:
A. 26 0526 Grounding 1. Submit the name of test agency to be used for testing specified in this section. Submit results of tests specified in this section. Also include test results in Operation and Maintenance Manuals as specified. BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0502-3 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS AND SPARE PARTS
B. 26 0533 Electrical Boxes and Fittings 1. Submit manufacturer’s data including specifications, installation instruction and general recommendations for each type of floor box used on project. C. 26 0553 Electrical Identification 1. Submit manufacturer’s data on each type of electrical identification products a. Submit one sample of each component of the electrical identification system as follows: Wire/cable tape marker, Tags, Engraved, plastic laminate labels, Arc-flash hazard labels D. 26 0923 Occupancy Sensors 1. Submit manufacturer's data on occupancy sensors, control modules, wiring diagrams, instructions for installation, interconnection diagrams and any related accessories. 2. Submit scaled drawings with lighting fixtures shown and sensor equipment/devices clearly marked by manufacturer showing proper product, location, coverage pattern and orientation of each sensor. E. 26 0943 Lighting Control Equipment 1. Submit manufacturer’s data on lighting control equipment including, but not limited to published catalog data sheets, rough-in diagrams and instructions for installation, operating and maintenance, suitable for inclusion in maintenance manuals. 2. Submit detailed drawings and documentation of lighting control components and interconnection including, but not necessarily limited to: a. Electronic controllers b. Control stations c. Photo sensors d. Occupancy sensors e. Network wiring details f. Input and output wiring details g. Lighting control panel load schedules h. Accurately scaled equipment layouts, wire/cable routing and connections to control wiring and electrical power feeders. i. Submit scaled drawings/floor plans with locations of all equipment and devices clearly shown for installation purposes. F. 26 2413 Switchgear and Switchboards 1. Submit manufacturer’s data and shop drawings only after completion of the preliminary protective device study (see Section 26 0573 as applicable). Any Section 26 2413 submittals received prior to submission of the preliminary protective device study will be REJECTED. 2. Submit manufacturer's data on switchgear and switchboards. 3. Submit dimensioned drawings of switchgear and switchboards showing accurately scaled basic sections including, but not necessarily limited to, auxiliary compartments, section components, and combination sections. Show plan view of equipment with dimensioned clearances to proximate equipment. Failure to submit said plan view shall not relieve contractor of responsibility to verify required
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0502-4 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS AND SPARE PARTS
clearances before release of equipment for fabrication. G. 26 2726 Wiring Devices 1. Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices. H. 26 2816 Motor and Circuit Disconnects 1. Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation and general recommendations, for each type of motor and circuit disconnect switch required. 2. Submit dimensioned drawings of electrical motor and circuit disconnect switches that have rating of 100 amperes and larger. I. 26 2913 Motor Starters 1. Submit manufacturer's data on motor starters. 2. Submit dimensioned drawings of motor starters showing accurately scaled equipment layouts. J. 26 4313 Surge Protective Devices (SPD) 1. Submit manufacturer's data on SPD’s listing all performance ratings specified or required herein. 2. Submit dimensioned drawings of SPD’s including, but not necessarily limited to, the following. a. Complete data sheet. b. Set of outline drawings giving complete mounting information, conduit entry and exit locations and dimensions, overall unit dimensions, weights, physical characteristics, etc. c. Set of complete electrical drawings for power and control wiring. d. Manufacturer's literature giving detailed information of equipment including parts numbers, model numbers and ratings. e. UL 1449 suppressed voltage rating documentation. K. 26 5100 Interior and Exterior Building Lighting 1. Submit manufacturer's data on interior and exterior building lighting fixtures. 2. Submit dimensioned drawings of lighting fixtures. Submit fixture shop drawings in PDF format with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled in luminaire "type" alphabetical order, with each “type” individually bookmarked, with proposed fixture catalog number and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet. 3. When applicable submit standard color samples with the shop drawings. If standard colors are not acceptable, a color sample will be provided to the fixture manufacturer. Return of the shop drawings will be delayed until color samples are provided. 4. Submit ballast and/or driver manufacturer cut sheets. 5. Submit a list of all lamps used on projects. L. 28 3111 Fire Alarm and Detection System 1. Submit manufacturer's data on fire alarm and detection systems including, but not limited to, roughing-in diagrams and instructions for installation, operating and maintenance, suitable for inclusion in maintenance manuals. 2. Provide shop drawings showing equipment/device locations and connecting wiring of entire fire alarm and detection system. Include wiring diagrams and riser BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0502-5 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS AND SPARE PARTS
diagrams of panel. Provide dimensioned drawing of Fire Alarm Control Panel and Building Graphic. Shop drawings shall be prepared by an individual with a minimum NICET III (Fire Protection Engineering Technology/Fire Alarm Systems) certification. The individual’s name and certification number shall be shown on the submittal design drawings. 3. Submit a written statement to the Architect and the state and local Fire Marshal's Office that each device of the fire alarm system will be installed, inspected and tested in accordance with applicable requirements of NFPA Standard 72. 4. A complete set of shop drawings indicating: a. Location of all alarm-initiating and alarm-signaling devices. b. Point-to-point wiring diagrams for all alarm-initiating and alarm-signaling devices. c. Standby battery calculations, including voltage drop calculation. 5. Wiring diagrams for: a. Alarm control panels. b. Auxiliary function relays and solenoids. c. Remote signaling equipment. 6. A complete equipment list identifying: a. Type b. Model c. Manufacturer d. Manufacturer catalog data sheets e. UL Listing and/or FM approval showing compatibility of device with Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) 7. A complete zone list identifying all: a. Alarm-initiating and alarm-signaling devices. b. Remote signaling and auxiliary function zones. c. Specific devices associated with each zone. 8. Submit to State and Local Fire Marshall, a complete Certificate of Compliance 1.4 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide operating instruction and maintenance data books for all equipment and materials furnished under this Division. B. Submit four copies of operating and maintenance data books for review at least four weeks before final review of the project. Assemble all data in a completely indexed volume or volumes and identify the size, model, and features indicated for each item. The binder (sized to the material) shall be a 2" slide lock unit (Wilson-Jones WLJ36544B). The cover shall be engraved with the job title in 1/2" high letters and the name and address of the Contractor in 1/4" high letters. Provide the same information in 1/8" letters on the spine. C. Include complete cleaning and servicing data compiled in clearly and easily understandable form. Show serial numbers of each piece of equipment, complete lists of replacement parts, motor ratings, etc. Each unit shall have its own individual sheet. (Example: If two items of equipment A and D appear on the same sheet, an individual sheet shall be provided for each unit specified). BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0502-6 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS AND SPARE PARTS
D. Include the following information where applicable. 1. Identifying name and mark number. 2. Certified outline Drawings and Shop Drawings. 3. Parts lists. 4. Performance curves and data. 5. Wiring diagrams. 6. Light fixture schedule with the lamps and ballast data used on the project for all fixtures 7. Manufacturer's recommended operating and maintenance instructions. 8. Vendor's name and address for each item. E. The engineer shall review the manuals and when approved, will forward the manuals on to the architect. If the manuals are rejected twice, the contractor shall reimburse the engineer the sum of $1,200.00 for each review afterwards. F. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manual information for each section listed below in addition to the general requirements listed above. 1. 26 0526 Grounding a. Test Results of measured resistance values 2. 26 0923 Occupancy Sensors a. Record Drawings i. A complete set of ‘as-builts’ drawings showing installed wiring, specific interconnections between all equipment, and internal wiring of this equipment shall be included in the operating and maintenance manuals upon complete of the system.
ii. Provide a CD to the owner containing the information specified below. The CD shall include all information required to allow the Owner to change the schedules themselves. The CD shall contain a minimum of following:
1. CAD drawing files of ‘as-built’ lighting control components and point to point connections.
2. General configuration programming. 3. Job specific configuration programming to include schedule. 4. Tutorial file on complete programming of lighting control system. 3. 26 0943 Lighting Control Equipment a. Record Drawings i. A complete set of ‘as-builts’ drawings showing installed wiring, specific interconnections between all equipment, and internal wiring of this equipment shall be included in the operating and maintenance manuals upon complete of the system.
ii. Provide a CD to the owner containing the information specified below. The CD shall include all information required to allow the Owner to change the schedules BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0502-7 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS AND SPARE PARTS
themselves. The CD shall contain a minimum of following:
1. CAD drawing files of ‘as-built’ lighting control components and point to point connections. 2. General configuration programming. 3. Job specific configuration programming to include schedule. 4. Tutorial file on complete programming of lighting control system. 4. 26 2913 Motor Starters a. After installation is complete, including water and air balancing, measure voltage (L-L and L-N) and full load current of each phase of each motor. Submit report showing field readings of voltage, amperage, service factor, and thermal heater size installed for each motor. 5. 28 3113 Fire Alarm and Detection System a. Manual Requirements i. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be submitted prior to testing of the system. Manuals shall include all service, installation, and programming information. b. Record Drawings i. A complete set of CAD "as-built" drawings showing installed wiring, color coding, specific interconnections between all equipment, and internal wiring of the equipment shall be delivered to the owner upon completion of the system. Vendor shall not request drawings from the Engineer. Vendor shall request current architectural drawings from the Architect and include all cost with bid. ii. A building map shall be supplied to the owner indicating the exact location of all devices along with the addresses of the individual devices. Install building fire alarm map adjacent to the fire alarm panel and all remote operating panels. Provide high quality plastic sign (map holder) with two layers. The back layer shall be painted black. The front layer shall be a clear center for viewing the CAD fire alarm drawing. Edges of the sign shall be colored to match the building interior. The building map shall indicate the various devices and wiring by the use of different colors (minimum of five colors). iii. Provide a CD to the Owner containing the information specified below. The CD shall include all information required to allow the Owner to change the fire alarm program themselves. The CD shall contain a minimum of the following: 1. CAD drawing files of building fire alarm map. 2. CAD drawing files of as-built fire alarm components and point to point connections. 3. General configuration programming. 4. Job specific configuration programming. BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0502-8 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS AND SPARE PARTS
5. Tutorial file on complete programming of fire alarm system 1.5 SPARE PARTS:
A. Provide spare parts (fuses, diffusers, lamps, etc.) as specified. Stock of all spare items shall be delivered as directed to Owner’s storage space prior to substantial completion. All components shall be labeled to match construction document nomenclature. B. Review with Owner/Architect and revise as needed for each project. Qty. Qty. Section Section Name Description Fulfilled? Required Received Provide 100 feet of ¾” conduit with 3 #12 conductors. Provide all supports, fittings, boxes, Conduit Per 26 0532 terminations, etc. as required for installation. Install Raceway description only as directed by engineer. Credit back all unused material and labor to Owner. Occupancy 26 0923 Spare sensors for each type used on project. 5 per type Sensors
END OF SECTION 26 0502
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0502-9 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS AND SPARE PARTS
BLANK PAGE
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0502-10 UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 260507
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-23 section making reference to electrical connections. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of electrical connection for equipment includes final electrical connection of all equipment having electrical requirements. Make final connections for all owner furnished equipment. See other applicable portions of specification for building temperature control wiring requirements. B. Refer to Division-23 sections for motor starters and controls furnished integrally with equipment; not work of this section. C. Refer to Division-23 section for control system wiring; not work of this section. D. Refer to sections of other Divisions for specific individual equipment power requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. NEC COMPLIANCE: Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to type products used and installation of electrical power connections. B. UL LABELS: Provide electrical connection products and materials that have been UL- listed and labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL:
A. For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete assembly of materials, including but not necessarily limited to, raceways, conductors, cords, cord caps, wiring devices, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices, terminations, and connections as required. Crimp on or slip- on type splicing materials (insulation displacement type) designed to be used without wire stripping are not acceptable. See Section 26 0532, Conduit Raceways; Section 26 2726 Wiring Devices: and Section 26 0519 Conductors and Cables for additional requirements. Provide final connections for equipment consistent with the following: 1. Permanently installed fixed equipment - flexible seal-tite conduit from branch circuit terminal equipment, or raceway; to equipment, control cabinet, terminal junction box or wiring terminals. Totally enclose all wiring in raceway. 2. Movable and/or portable equipment - wiring device, cord cap, and multi- conductor cord suitable for the equipment and in accordance with NEC requirements (Article 400).
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0507-1 © BNA Consulting
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
3. Other methods as required by the National Electrical Code and/or as required by special equipment or field conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS:
A. Make electrical connections in accordance with connector manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. C. Coordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with equipment installation work. D. Verify all electrical loads (voltage, phase, horse power, full load amperes, number and point of connections, minimum circuit ampacity, etc.) for equipment furnished under other Divisions of this specification, by reviewing respective shop drawings furnished under each division. Meet with each subcontractor furnishing equipment requiring electrical service and review equipment electrical characteristics. Report any variances from electrical characteristics noted on the electrical drawings to Architect before proceeding with rough-work. In summary it is not in the Electrical Engineers scope to review the shop drawings from other trades/divisions. E. Obtain and review the equipment shop drawings to determine particular final connection requirements before rough-in begins for each equipment item. F. Refer to basic materials and methods Section 26 0553 Electrical Identification, Conductors, for identification of electrical power supply conductor terminations.
END OF SECTION 26 0507
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0507-2 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 0519
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600V AND BELOW)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-26 section making reference to conductors and cables specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of electrical conductor and electrical cable work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of conductors and cables in this section include the following: 1. Copper Conductors (600V) C. Applications for conductors and cables required for project include: 1. Power Distribution 2. Feeders 3. Branch Circuits 1.3 RECORDS SUBMITTAL: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical conductors and cable. Comply with UL standards and provide electrical conductors and cables that have been UL-listed and labeled. B. Comply with applicable portions of NEMA/Insulated Cable Engineers Association standards pertaining to materials, construction and testing of conductors and cable. C. Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASTM and IEEE standards pertaining to construction of conductors and cable. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER CONDUCTORS (600V):
A. Provide factory-fabricated conductors of sizes, ratings, materials, and types indicated for each service. Where not indicated provide proper selection to comply with project's installation requirements and NEC standards. Provide conductors in accordance with the following: 1. Branch Circuit Conductors and All Conductors #3 AWG and Smaller - Copper conductor, with THHN/THWN insulation. Size all conductors in accordance with NEC; minimum size to be #12 AWG. Provide solid conductors for #10 AWG and smaller. Provide stranded conductors for #8 AWG and larger.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0519-1 © BNA Consulting CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600V AND BELOW)
B. Provide a maximum of three phase conductors in any one conduit or as approved by electrical engineer. Where phase conductors share a common neutral they must have a means to simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors at the point where the branch circuits originate. The ungrounded and neutral conductors of a multi-wire branch circuit must be grouped together by wire ties at the point of origination. Provide neutral and ground wire as specified elsewhere in documents. C. Provide separate neutral conductor for all single phase branch circuits installed. No shared neutrals are allowed. Neutral conductor shall be the same size as the phase conductor. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install electric conductors and cables as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. Coordinate installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary for proper interface. C. Cables may be pulled by direct attachment to conductors or by use of basket weave pulling grip applied over cables. Attachment to pulling device shall be made through approved swivel connection. Nonmetallic jacketed cables of small size may be pulled directly by conductors by forming them into a loop that pull wires can be attached; remove insulation from conductors before forming the loop. Larger sizes of cable may be pulled by using basket weave pulling grip, provided the pulling force does not exceed limits recommended by manufacturer; if pulling more than one cable, bind them together with friction tape before applying the grip. For long pulls requiring heavy pulling force, use pulling eyes attached to conductors. D. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommendations for maximum allowable pulling tension, side wall pressure, and minimum allowable bending radius. In all cases, pulling tension applied to the conductors shall be limited to 0.008 lbs. per circular mil of conductor cross- section area. E. Pull in cable from the end having the sharpest bend; i.e. bend shall be closest to reel. Keep pulling tension to minimum by liberal use of lubricant, and turning of reel, and slack feeding of cable into duct entrance. Employ not less than one man at reel and one in pullhole during this operation. F. For training of cables, minimum bend radius to inner surface of cable shall be 12 times cable diameter. G. Where cable is pulled under tension over sheaves, conduit bends, or other curved surfaces, make minimum bend radius 50% greater than specified above for training. H. Use only wire and cable pulling compound recommended by the specific cable manufacturer, and that is listed by UL. I. Seal all cable ends unless splicing is to be done immediately. Conduit bodies shall not contain splices. J. Support all cables in pullholes, concrete trenches, and similar locations by cable racks and secure to rack insulators with nylon cord or self-locking nylon cable ties. Place each cable on separate insulator. In manholes, pullholes, concrete trenches, and similar locations, wrap strips of fire-proofing tape (approx. 1/16 inch thick by 3 inches wide) tightly around each cable spirally in half-lapped wrapping or in two butt-joined wrappings with the second wrapping covering the joints in the first. Apply tape with the coated side toward the cable, and extend tape one inch into the ducts. To prevent unraveling, random
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0519-2 © BNA Consulting CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600V AND BELOW)
wrap the fireproofing tape the entire length of the fireproofing with pressure sensitive glass cloth tape. Provide fireproofing tape of a flexible, conformable fabric having one side coated with flame retardant, flexible, polymeric coating and/or a chlorinated elastomer not less than 0.050 inch thick weighing not less than 2.5 pounds per square yard. Provide tape that is noncorrosive to cable sheath, self-extinguishing, and that will not support combustion. Construct tape of materials that do not deteriorate when subjected to oil, water, gases, salt water, sewage and fungus. K. Follow manufacturer's instructions for splicing and cable terminations. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION OF FEEDERS: Refer to Section 26 0553 for requirements.
END OF SECTION 26 0519
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0519-3 © BNA Consulting CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600V AND BELOW)
BLANK PAGE
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0519-4 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 0526
GROUNDING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Provide grounding as specified herein, and as indicated on drawings. B. Provide grounding and bonding of all electrical and communication apparatus, machinery, appliances, building components, and items required by the NEC to provide a permanent, continuous, low impedance, grounding system. C. Unless otherwise indicated, ground the complete electrical installation including the system neutral, metallic conduits and raceways, boxes, fittings, devices, cabinets, and equipment in accordance with all code requirements. D. Ground each separately derived system, as described in NEC Section 250-30, unless otherwise indicated. E. Types of grounding in this section include the following: 1. Enclosures 2. Systems 3. Equipment 4. Other items indicated on drawings F. Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding work specified elsewhere in these specifications. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with NEC as applicable to electrical grounding and ground fault protection systems. Comply with applicable ANSI and IEEE requirements. Provide products that have been UL listed and labeled. B. Resistance from the service entrance ground bus, through the grounding electrode to earth, shall not exceed 5 ohms. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:
A. GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provide each electrical grounding system as specified herein, and as shown on drawings, including but not necessarily limited to, cables/wires, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods/electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, and other items and accessories needed for complete installation. Where materials or components are not otherwise indicated,
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0526-1 © BNA Consulting GROUNDING
comply with NEC, NEMA and established industry standards for applications indicated. B. ELECTRICAL GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding conductors for grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. Provide with green insulation. C. GROUND RODS: Steel with copper welded exterior, 3/4" dia. x 10' long. Weaver or Cadweld. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF GROUNDING SYSTEMS:
A. Install electrical grounding systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure grounding devices comply with requirements. B. Install clamp-on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned and metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. C. Provide grounding for the entire raceway, enclosure, equipment and device system in accordance with NEC. All non-metallic raceways shall include copper grounding conductor sized in accordance with NEC. Include copper grounding conductor in all raceway installed in suspended slabs. D. Provide service entrance grounding by means of ground rods (quantity of two, driven exterior to building), by means of bonding to water main, and by means of bonding to building structural steel. In addition, provide a grounding electrode for not less than 30 lineal feet in concrete footing or foundation that is in direct contract with earth. Size electrode in accordance with NEC, but in no case, smaller than No. 4 AWG bare copper. Support electrode so as to be below finished grade near the bottom of the trench, and approximately three inches from the bottom or sides of the concrete. Locate a point of connection for inspection. E. Provide grounding conductors for dimming systems in accordance with manufacturer's requirement. 3.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODES:
A. EQUIPMENT BONDING/GROUNDING: Provide a NEC sized conductor, whether indicated or not on the drawings, in raceways as follows: 1. Non-metallic conduits and ducts. 2. Distribution feeders. 3. Motor and equipment branch circuits. 4. Device and lighting branch circuits. 5. Provide grounding bushings and bonding jumpers for all conduit terminating in reducing washers, concentric, eccentric or oversized knockouts at panelboards, cabinets and gutters. B. Provide bonding jumpers across expansion and deflection couplings in conduit runs, across pipe connections at water meters, and across dielectric couplings in metallic cold water piping system. C. Provide bonding wire in all flexible conduit. END OF SECTION 26 0526
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0526-2 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 0529
SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification section, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is a part of each Division-26, 27 and 28 section making reference to supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals, specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of supports, anchors, and sleeves is indicated by drawings and schedules and/or specified in other Division-26 sections. See Section 260532, Raceways, for additional requirements. B. Work of this section includes supports, anchors, sleeves and seals required for a complete raceway support system, including but not limited to: clevis hangers, riser clamps, C-clamps, beam clamps, one and two hole conduit straps, offset conduit clamps, expansion anchors, toggle bolts, threaded rods, U-channel strut systems, threaded rods and all associated accessories. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA Std. Pub No. FB 1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies". Provide electrical components that are UL-listed and labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES:
A. GENERAL: 1. Provide supporting devices; complying with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation; and as herein specified. See drawings for additional requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES:
A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves, and seals as required, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply with requirements of NECA, NEC and ANSI/NEMA for installation of supporting devices. B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work. C. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0529-1 © BNA Consulting SUPPORTING DEVICES
building structures. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. For pre-and post tensioned construction, use pre-set inserts for support of all electrical work. Do not use toggle bolts, moly bolts, wood plugs or screws in sheetrock or plaster as support for any equipment or raceway. D. RACEWAYS: 1. Support raceways that are rigidly attached to structure at intervals not to exceed 8 feet on center, minimum of two straps per 10 foot length of raceway, and within 12" of each junction box, coupling, outlet or fitting. Support raceway at each 90° degree bend. Support raceway (as it is installed) in accordance with the following:
NUMBER OF RUNS 3/4" TO 1-1/4" 0 1-1/2" & LARGER 0
1 Full straps, clamps or hangers. Hanger 2 Full straps, clamps or hangers. Mounting Channel 3 or more Mounting Channel Mounting Channel
2. Support suspended raceways on trapeze hanger systems; or individually by means of threaded rod and straps, clamps, or hangers suitable for the application. Do not use "tie wire" as a portion of any raceway support system; do not support raceway from ceiling support wires. END OF SECTION 26 0529
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0529-2 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 0532
CONDUIT RACEWAY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-26 section making reference to electrical raceways and specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of raceways is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of raceways in this section include the following: 1. Electrical Metallic Tubing 2. Flexible Metal Conduit 3. Intermediate Metal Conduit 4. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit 5. Rigid Metal Conduit 6. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. MANUFACTURERS: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years. B. STANDARDS: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems; and provide products and components that have been UL-listed and labeled. Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction and installation of raceway systems. C. SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING:
A. GENERAL: 1. Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) as indicated; with minimum trade size of 3/4". B. RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC): FS WW-C-0581 and ANSI C80.1. C. INTERMEDIATE STEEL CONDUIT (IMC): FS WW-C-581. D. PVC EXTERNALLY COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT: ANSI C80.1 and NEMA Std. Pub. No. RN 1. E. ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Not acceptable.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0532-1 © BNA Consulting CONDUIT RACEWAY
F. MC CABLE: 1. MC Cable is acceptable for all branch circuits installed in gypsum wallboard walls from the home run device box to the last device box on the branch circuit and all boxes in between, from the home run device box to the branch panel, the circuit shall be installed in an approved raceway. MC Cable is acceptable for all light fixture whips not longer than six feet in length. Located in removable grid ceilings. MC Cable is unacceptable to be installed from light fixture to light fixture. All MC Cable shall be provided with anti short fittings.
G. RIGID AND INTERMEDIATE STEEL CONDUIT FITTINGS: 1. Provide fully threaded malleable steel couplings; raintight and concrete tight where required by application. Provide double locknuts and metal bushings at all conduit terminations. Install OZ Type B bushings on conduits 1-1/4" and larger. H. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT): FS WW-C-563 and ANSI C80.3. I. EMT FITTINGS: 1. Provide insulated throat nylon bushings with non-indenter type malleable steel fittings at all conduit terminations. Install OZ Type B bushings on conduits 1" larger. Cast or indenter type fittings are not acceptable. J. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: FS WW-C-566, of the following type; 1. Zinc-coated steel. K. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 1, and Style A. L. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: 1. Provide liquid-tight, flexible metal conduit; constructed of single strip, flexible continuous, interlocked, and double-wrapped steel; galvanized inside and outside; coated with liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). M. LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 3, Style G. N. EXPANSION FITTINGS: OZ Type AX, or equivalent to suit application. 2.2 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS:
A. GENERAL:
1. Provide non-metallic conduit, ducts and fittings of types, sizes and weights as indicated; with minimum trade size of 3/4". B. UNDERGROUND PVC PLASTIC UTILITIES DUCT: 1. Minimum requirements shall be schedule 40 for encased burial in concrete and for Type II for direct burial. C. PVC AND ABS PLASTIC UTILITIES DUCT FITTINGS: D. ANSI/NEMA TC 9, match to duct type and material. E. HDPE CONDUIT: Not acceptable. 2.3 CONDUIT; TUBING; AND DUCT ACCESSORIES:
A. Provide conduit, tubing and duct accessories of types and sizes, and materials, complying with manufacturer's published product information, that mate and match conduit and tubing. Provide manufactured spacers in all duct bank runs.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0532-2 © BNA Consulting CONDUIT RACEWAY
2.4 SEALING BUSHINGS:
A. Provide OZ Type FSK, WSK, or CSMI as required by application. Provide OZ type CSB internal sealing bushings. 2.5 CABLE SUPPORTS:
A. Provide OZ cable supports for vertical risers, type as required by application. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS:
A. Install electrical raceways where indicated; in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with the following:
1. BRANCH CIRCUITS, SIGNAL AND CONTROL CIRCUITS, AND INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT CIRCUITS RATED LESS THAN 100 AMPS: a. Install in electric metallic tubing (EMT). Below concrete slab-on-grade or in earth fill, install in non-metallic plastic duct. In areas exposed to weather, moisture, or physical damage, install in RMC or IMC B. Coordinate with other work including metal and concrete deck work, as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and components. C. Install raceway in accordance with the following: 1. Provide a minimum of 12" clearance measured from outside of insulation from flues, steam and hot water piping, etc. Avoid installing raceways in immediate vicinity of boilers and similar heat emitting equipment. Conceal raceways in finished walls, ceilings and floor (other than slab-on-grade), except in mechanical, electrical and/or communication rooms, conceal all conduit and connections to motors, equipment, and surface mounted cabinets unless exposed work is indicated on the drawings. Run concealed conduits in as direct a line as possible with gradual bends. Where conduit is exposed in mechanical spaces, etc., install parallel with or at right angles to building or room structural lines. Do not install lighting raceway until piping and duct work locations have been determined in order to avoid fixtures being obstructed by overhead equipment. 2. Where cutting raceway is necessary, remove all inside and outside burrs; make cuts smooth and square with raceway. Paint all field threads (or portions of raceway where corrosion protection has been damaged) with primer and enamel finish coat to match adjacent raceway surface. 3. Provide a minimum of 1 ½” from nearest surface of the roof decking to raceway. 4. Provide a maximum of three phase conductors in any one conduit or as approved by electrical engineer. Where phase conductors share a common neutral they must have a means to simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors at the point where the branch circuits originate. The ungrounded and neutral conductors of a multi-wire branch circuit must be grouped together by wire ties at the point of origination. 5. Provide neutral and ground wire as specified elsewhere in documents. 6. Provide separate neutral conductor for all single phase branch circuits installed. No shared neutrals are allowed. Neutral conductor shall be the same size as the phase conductor.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0532-3 © BNA Consulting CONDUIT RACEWAY
D. Comply with NEC for requirements for installation of pull boxes in long runs. E. Cap open ends of conduits and protect other raceways as required against accumulation of dirt and debris. Pull a mandrel and swab through all conduit before installing conductors. Install a 200 lb. nylon pull cord in each empty conduit run. F. Replace all crushed, wrinkled or deformed raceway before installing conductors. G. Do not use flame type devices as a heat application to bend PVC conduit. Use a heating device that supplies uniform heat over the entire area without scorching the conduit. H. Provide rigid metal conduit (RMC) for all bends greater than 22 degrees in buried conduit. Provide protective coating for RMC bend as specified herein. I. Where raceways penetrate building, area ways, manholes or vault walls and floors below grade, install rigid metal conduit (RMC) for a minimum distance of 10 feet on the exterior side of the floor or wall measured from interior face. Provide OZ, Type FSK, WSK or CSMI sealing bushings (with external membrane clamps as applicable) for all conduit penetrations entering walls or slabs below grade. Provide segmented type CSB internal sealing bushings in all raceways penetrating building walls and slabs below grade, and in all above grade raceway penetrations susceptible to moisture migration into building through raceway. J. Install liquid-tight flexible conduit for connection of motors, transformers, and other electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration. K. Install spare 3/4" conduits (capped) from each branch panelboard into the ceiling and floor space. Run five into the ceiling space and five into the floor space. Where the floor is not accessible run six conduits into the ceiling space. Run conduits the required distance necessary to reach accessible ceiling space. L. Provide OZ expansion fittings on all conduits crossing building expansion joints, both in slab and suspended. M. Provide OZ cable supports in all vertical risers in accordance with NEC 300-19; type as required by application. N. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/conductors within raceways. O. Electrical Identification: Refer to Section 260553 for requirements. P. SPARE PARTS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements. END OF SECTION 26 0532
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0532-4 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 0533
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is a part of each Division-26, 27 and 28 section making reference to electrical wiring boxes and fittings specified herein. See Section 260532, Raceways, for additional requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of electrical box and electrical fitting work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following: 1. Outlet Boxes 2. Junction Boxes 3. Pull Boxes 4. Conduit Bodies 5. Bushings 6. Locknuts 7. Knockout Closures 8. Miscellaneous Boxes and Fittings 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical boxes and fittings. Comply with ANSI C 134,1 (NEMA Standards Pub No. OS 1) as applicable to sheet-steel outlet boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports. Provide electrical boxes and fittings that have been UL-listed and labeled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATED MATERIALS:
A. INTERIOR OUTLET BOXES: 1. Provide one piece, galvanized flat rolled sheet steel interior outlet wiring boxes with accessory rings, of types, shapes and sizes, including box depths, to suit each respective location and installation, construct with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing box and covers and wiring devices; minimum size 4"x4"x2-1/8". 2. Provide an ‘FS’ box, with no knockouts when surface mounted in a finished, non- utility space. Surface mounting is only acceptable when approved by the Architect.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0533-1 © BNA Consulting ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
B. INTERIOR OUTLET BOX ACCESSORIES: 1. Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets, hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, that are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of individual wiring applications. C. WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES: 1. Provide corrosion-resistant cast-metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes (including depth) required, with threaded conduit ends, cast- metal face plates with spring-hinged waterproof caps suitably configured for each application, with face plate gaskets and corrosion-resistant fasteners. D. JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES: 1. Provide code-gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of types, shapes and sizes to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. E. CONDUIT BODIES: 1. Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies, of types, shapes and sizes to suit respective locations and installation, construct with threaded-conduit-entrance ends, removable covers, and corrosion-resistant screws. F. BUSHINGS, KNOCKOUT CLOSURES AND LOCKNUTS: 1. Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable steel conduit bushings and offset connectors, of types and sizes to suit respective uses and installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS:
A. GENERAL: 1. Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. 2. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation work. 3. Provide coverplates for all boxes. See Section 262726, Wiring Devices. 4. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. 5. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. 6. Install boxes and conduit bodies to ensure ready accessibility of electrical wiring. Do not install boxes above ducts or behind equipment. Install recessed boxes with face of box or ring flush with adjacent surface. Seal between switch, receptacle and other outlet box openings and adjacent surfaces with plaster, grout, or similar suitable material. 7. Fasten boxes rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. Use bar hangers for stud construction. Use of nails for securing boxes is prohibited. Set boxes on opposite sides of
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0533-2 © BNA Consulting ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
common wall with minimum 10" of conduit between them. Set boxes on opposite sides of fire resistant walls with minimum of 24” separation. 8. Provide a minimum of 1 ½” from the nearest surface of the roof decking to the installed boxes. 9. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes. END OF SECTION 26 0533
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0533-3 © BNA Consulting ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
BLANK PAGE
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0533-4 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 0553
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Requirements of the following Division 26 Sections apply to this section: 1. “Basic Electrical Requirements”. 2. “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”. 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment and installations. It includes requirements for electrical identification components including but not limited to the following: 1. Identification labels for raceways, cables and conductors. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: C. Refer to other Division 26 sections for additional specific electrical identification associated with specific items. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code” 1.4 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. American Labelmark Co. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Cole-Flex Corp. 4. Emed Co., Inc. 5. George-Ingraham Corp. 6. Ideal Industries, Inc. 7. Kraftbilt 8. LEM Products, Inc. 9. Markal Corp 10. National Band and Tag Co. 11. Panduit Corp.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0553-1 © BNA Consulting ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
12. Radar Engineers Div., EPIC Corp. 13. Seton Name Plate Co. 14. Standard Signs, Inc. 15. W.H Brady, Co. 2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers: 1. Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound, cable/conductor markers with pre- printed numbers and letters. B. Brass or Aluminum Tags: 1. Metal tags with stamped legend, punched for fastener. 2. Dimensions: 2” X 2” 19 gage. C. Engraved, Plastic Laminated Labels, Signs and Instruction Plates: 1. Engraving stock plastic laminate, 1/16” minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. or 8” in length; 1/8 “ thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in 1/4” high white letters on black face and punched for mechanical fasteners. D. Equipment Labels: 1. Adhesive backed polyester with self-laminating flap. Chemical, abrasion and heat resistant. 2. Dimensions: minimum 5” x 2” 3. Conductor-Identification-Means Labels: a. Information contained: the method utilized for identifying ungrounded conductors within switchboards, distribution panels and branch circuit panels. 4. Available-Fault-Current Labels: a. Information contained: maximum available fault current at the respective piece of equipment, and date of calculation of fault current. 5. Source-of-Supply Labels: a. Information contained: indicate the device or equipment where the power supply originates. E. Baked Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors legend and size appropriate to location. F. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated and Metal Signs: 1. Self-tapping stainless steel screws or # 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts, flat and lock washers. G. Cable Ties: 1. Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18” minimum width, 50-lb. Minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 40 F. to 185 F. Provide ties for specified colors when used for color coding. H. Colored Support Wires: 1. When electrical equipment/wiring is supported by wires within the ceiling cavity, these wires shall be independent of the ceiling support assembly and shall be distinguishable by painting entire length in bright yellow.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0553-2 © BNA Consulting ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lettering and Graphics: 1. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors and other designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code. B. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and requirements of NEC. C. Sequence of Work: 1. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require a finish, install identification after completion of finish work. D. Conductor Color Coding. 1. Provide color coding for secondary service, feeder and branch circuit conductors throughout the project secondary electrical system as follows:
CONDUCTOR 208Y / 120V System 480Y / 277V System
Phase A Black Brown Phase B Red Orange Phase C Blue Yellow Shared/Single Neutral White Gray Neutral A (dedicated) White w/Black Stripe Gray w/Black Stripe Neutral B (dedicated) White w/Red Stripe Gray w/Orange Stipe Neutral C (dedicated) White w/Blue Stripe Gray w/Yellow Stipe Equipment Ground Green Green Isolated Ground Green w/Yellow Strip Green w/Yellow Stripe
2. Switch legs, travelers and other wiring for branch circuits shall be of colors other than those listed above. 3. Use conductors with color factory applied the entire length of the conductors except as follows: a. The following field-applied color-coding methods may be used in lieu of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG. b. Apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch-wide tape in colors as specified. Do not obliterate cable identification markings by taping. Tape locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent such obliteration. c. In lieu of pressure-sensitive tape, colored cable ties may be used for color identification. Apply three ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches from the terminal and
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0553-3 © BNA Consulting ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
spaced 3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten for snug fit, and cut off excess length. E. Power Circuit Identification. 1. Securely fasten identifying metal tags or aluminum wraparound marker bands to cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes, junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms with 1/4-inch steel letter and number stamps with legend to correspond with designations on Drawings. If metal tags are provided, attach them with approximately 55-lb monofilament line or one-piece self-locking nylon cable ties. 2. Tag or label conductors as follows: a. Future Connections: Conductors indicated to be for future connection or connection under another contract with identification indicting source and circuit numbers. b. Multiple Circuits: Where multiple branch circuits or control wiring or communications/ signal conductors are present in the same box or enclosure (except for three-circuit, four-wire home runs), label each conductor or cable. Provide legend indicating source, voltage, circuit number, and phase for branch circuit wiring. Phase and voltage of branch circuit wiring may be indicated by mean of coded color of conductor insulation. For control and communications/signal wiring, use color coding or wire/cable marking tape at terminations and at intermediate locations where conductors appear in wiring boxes, troughs, and control cabinets. Use consistent letter/number conductor designations throughout on wire/cable marking tapes. 3. Match identification markings with designations used in panelboards shop drawings, Contract Documents, and similar previously established identification schemes for the facility’s electrical installations. F. Apply warning, caution and instruction signs and stencils as follows: 1. Install warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items. Warning and caution signs shall be furnished and installed on, but not be limited to the following equipment and locations: a. Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations that contain exposed live parts 600 volts or less; signs shall forbid unqualified personnel to enter. b. Switch and Overcurrent device enclosures with splices, taps and feed- through conductors. Provide warning label on the enclosures that identifies the nearest disconnecting means for any feed-through conductors. c. Entrances to buildings, vaults, rooms or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 volts: DANGER- HIGH VOLTAGE-KEEP OUT. d. Metal-enclosed switchgear, unit substations, transformers, enclosures, pull boxes, connection boxes and similar equipment operating at over 600 volts shall have appropriate caution signs and warning labels.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0553-4 © BNA Consulting ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
e. Indoor and Outdoor substations operating over 600 volts. Provide warning signs, instructional signs and single-line diagrams in accordance with NEC 225.70. G. Install equipment/system circuit/device identification as follows: 1. Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic-laminate on each major unit of electrical equipment in building, including central or master unit of each electrical system. This includes communication/signal/alarm systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, with 1/4“-high lettering on 1-inch-high label (1 1/2-inch-high where two lines are required) white lettering in black field. White lettering in red field for Emergency Power Systems. Text shall match terminology and numbering of the Contract Documents and shop drawings. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of electrical equipment. a. Each service disconnect, to identify it as a service disconnect. b. Panelboards (exterior and interior), electrical cabinets, and enclosures. For subpanels, identify feeder circuit served from. c. Switches in fusible panelboards shall be labeled. Main switches shall be identified. d. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. e. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. f. Motor control centers. g. Motor starters, including circuit origination, HP, heater size, FLA, and mechanical equipment designation. h. Disconnect switches. i. Pushbutton stations. j. Power transfer equipment. k. Contactors. l. Dimmers. m. Control devices. n. Transformers. o. Power generating units, to include transfer switches. p. Telephone switching equipment. q. Clock/program master equipment. r. Call system master station. s. TV/audio monitoring master station. t. Fire alarm master station or control panel. u. Busduct – Label all cable tap boxes, bus plug-in units, etc. with plastic laminate labels designating load served. v. Variable frequency drives. w. Lighting Control Equipment. x. Uninterruptable Power Supply. H. Post Conductor-Identification-Means labels at locations of switchboards, distribution panels and branch circuit panels. The labels shall identify the color-coding used on ungrounded conductors for each voltage system used on the premises. I. The label shall identify the device or equipment where the power supply originates, and
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0553-5 © BNA Consulting ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
the system voltage and phase. For example: Feeder Power Supply for Panel “XX” Originates at Panel “XX” (or Switchboard “XX”, Transformer “XX”, Switch “XX”, etc.); 120/208 volts, 3-phase (or 120/240, 277/480, etc.). J. Apply circuit/control/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers, pushbuttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components, where labeling is specified elsewhere. K. Install labels at locations indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. L. Engrave all receptacle plates other than those serving 120 volt, single phase devices. State voltage and amperage characteristics: Example; “208V 30A”. M. Mark each device box (for each type of wiring device) with a permanent ink felt tip marker, indicating the circuit that the device is connected to: Example; “CKT A-1” N. Label circuit breaker feeding fire alarm panel “Fire Alarm Circuit”. Using plastic laminate label, white lettering on a red background. END OF SECTION 26 0553
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0553-6 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 0923
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-26 section making reference to wiring devices specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of occupancy sensor work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of occupancy sensors in this section include the following: 1. Dual Technology Ceiling Sensor w/ Control Pack 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards as applicable to construction and installation of occupancy sensors. Provide occupancy sensors that have been UL listed and labeled. B. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp systems, motor loads and any other passive infrared or microwave systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER: The manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years of experience in the sensor and lighting control industry. Sensors and related relays shall be compatible with the specific lighting types controlled. All sensors shall be of the same manufacturer, mixing brands of sensors is not acceptable.
A. DUAL TECHNOLOGY CEILING SENSOR: Where units are indicated, provide a sensor that meets the following minimum requirements: 1. Sensor shall incorporate ultrasonic (microphonics) and infrared technologies in a single unit. 2. Sensor shall be Class 2, low voltage; capable of mounting in the ceiling for maximum coverage. 3. Sensor shall use internal microprocessor for motion signal analysis and automatic self-adjustment. 4. Sensor shall have automatic self-adjustment algorithm that adjusts timer and sensitivity settings to maximize performance and minimize energy usage. 5. Sensor shall have manual time-out adjustment from 8 minutes to 32 minutes and automatic time out from 8 minutes to 100 minutes. 6. Sensor shall have test time-out setting of 8 seconds, with automatic return to 8 minutes after one hour if sensor is left in test mode.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0923-1 © BNA Consulting
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
7. Sensor’s microprocessor shall automatically extend timer by 1 hour in response to recognition to false off condition. After 5 hours, sensor reduces extended time by 30 minutes and continues to reduce by 30 minute increments over the next few days. 8. Sensor’s microprocessor shall automatically reduce either PIR or ultrasonic sensitivity in response to false on condition. 9. Sensor microprocessor will automatically monitor PIR background threshold signal level and makes corresponding sensitivity adjustments automatically. 10. Sensor microprocessor algorithm shall incorporate automatic adaptation to continuous airflow. 11. For airflow that is so intense as to mask motion, sensor shall flash indicator LED code to indicate excessive airflow. 12. Sensor’s microprocessor shall use a four week learning period and develop a circadian calendar. 13. An internal 24 hour 7 day clock establishes what periods the room is typically occupied, biasing sensor to keep lights on while normally occupied and off when normally unoccupied. 14. Sensor shall have selection settings for the following dual technology schemes: a. High Sensitivity and High Confidence (miser mode) 15. Sensor shall be available with either 180 degrees or 360 degrees coverage pattern. 16. Infrared lens shall have 360 degree field of view. Two types of lens shall be available, standard and extra dense. 17. Sensor shall have a variety of mask inserts for PIR coverage rejection to prevent false tripping. 18. Transducers shall be protected from tampering. 19. Sensor shall have manual adjustments for timer and sensitivities and override switches to force manual adjustment mode. 20. Sensor shall have adjustable sensitivity from 0% to 100% for both ultrasonic and infrared. 21. Controls shall be behind cover to resist tampering. All adjustments shall be accessible from the front of the sensor. 22. Sensor shall be available with a photocell adjustment from 20 to 3,000 Lux. 23. Sensor shall provide internal operating status and settings confirmation via LED motion lamp indicator. 24. Sensor shall have two (if 180 degree) or three (if 360 degree) real time LED motion indicators visible from the front of the unit: Red = infrared; green = ultrasonic. 25. Subject to compliance with the above requirements, provide models of one of the following: a. Hubbell-ATD Series b. Sensor Switch-CM-PDT Series c. Wattstopper-DT Series d. Mytech-Omni-DT Series e. Lithonia - LMTO Series f. Leviton – OSC UOW Series
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0923-2 © BNA Consulting OCCUPANCY SENSORS
g. Greengate OMC – DT Series B. 24 VDC POWER/CONTROL PACK: Where units are indicated, provide a power/control pack that meets the following minimum requirements: 1. Control module shall consist of a DC power supply and a dry contact relay for switching a lighting load. 2. Control module shall be available in versions to accept 120, and 277 VAC line voltages. 3. Output shall be 24VDC nominal, and shall be inherently safe, low voltage, limited power output (Class 2). 4. Output shall supply 100mA current, in addition to current consumed internally to operate internal relay. 5. Relay shall utilize normally open, silver alloy dry contacts, and shall be rated for a 20A ballast load at 120V and 277V. 6. Relay function shall not require more than 5 mA control current to operate. 7. Control module shall have line voltage wiring, consisting of input voltage and relay contact connections, exiting from one end, and low voltage DC connections, consisting of ground, power, and control wires, exiting from the other end. 8. Control module shall be sized to fit inside a standard 4” x 4” junction box. 9. Control module shall be equipped with a 1/2” EMT threaded male fitting on the line voltage end, such that it may be mounted to the outside of a junction box with the line voltage wiring internal to the box and the low voltage wiring external. 10. Control module shall be equipable with accessory 1/2” EMT threaded male fitting on the low voltage end, such that it may be mounted to the inside of a ballast cavity with the box and line voltage wiring internal to the cavity and the low voltage wiring external. 11. Slave module shall be available for switching additional circuits. Slave module has same construction and specifications as control module except without power supply function. 12. Subject to compliance with the above requirements, provide models of one of the following: a. Hubbell-CU Series b. Sensor Switch-PP-20 Series c. Wattstopper-BEP Series d. Mytech-MP Series e. Lithonia - LPCS Series f. Greengate SP20-MV Series g. Leviton – OSC/OSA Series PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT:
A. Install occupancy lighting control system components and ancillary equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that lighting control equipment complies with requirements. B. Comply with requirements of NEC, and applicable portions of NECA's "Standard of
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0923-3 © BNA Consulting OCCUPANCY SENSORS
Installation" pertaining to general electrical installation practices. C. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings, as necessary to interface installation of lighting control equipment work with other work. D. Contractor shall be on site as required, to adjust lighting control units for proper operation. E. Mount the switchpack in a standard 4" junction box. Mount sensor to a standard 4” junction boxes. Refer to manufacturer supplied mounting instructions. F. Spare Parts: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Upon completion of installation and after circuitry has been energized, demonstrate capability and compliance of system with requirements. B. System start-up: Provide a factory authorized technician to verify the installation and test the system. C. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. D. Contractor shall visit the job site 3 months after the owner has taken occupancy and adjust any units not operating properly, otherwise remove and replace with new units. 3.3 PRODUCT SUPPORT AND SERVICES:
A. System Start-Up: Provide a factory authorized technician to verify the installation, test the system, and train the owner on proper operation and maintenance of the system. Before requesting start-up services, the installing contractor shall verify that:
1. The sensors have been fully installed in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. 2. Low voltage wiring for overrides and sensors is completed. 3. Accurate ‘as-built’ load schedules have been prepared. 4. Proper notification of the impending start-up has been provided to the owner’s representative. 5. Programming of all switches, sensors, power packs, relays, etc. shall be completed by factory authorized technician, prior to final and training. B. Factory support: Factory telephone support shall be available at no cost to the owner during the warranty period. Factory assistance shall consist of assistance in solving programming or other application issues pertaining to the control equipment. The factory shall provide a toll free number for technical support.
C. Functional Testing:
1. The owner shall hire a third party that will conduct and certify the functional testing.
2. Lighting controls devices shall be tested to ensure that control hardware and software are calibrated, adjusted, programmed, and in proper working conditions in accordance with the construction documents, manufacturer’s instructions and code requirements. The following shall be performed:
a. Certify that sensors have been located, aimed and calibrated per
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0923-4 © BNA Consulting OCCUPANCY SENSORS
manufacturer recommendations.
b. Status indicator operates properly.
c. Fixtures that are controlled by auto-on controls turn on to permitted level.
d. Fixtures that are controlled by manual on controls operate when manually activated.
e. Fixtures do not turn on incorrectly due to HVAC or movement outside the controlled area.
f. Confirm that occupancy sensors turn off after space is vacated and do not turn on unless space is occupied.
g. Simulate unoccupied conditions and confirm that vacancy sensors only turn on manually and turn off after space is vacated.
3. The party responsible for the functional testing shall provide documentation that the installed lighting controls meet or exceed all performance criteria and shall not be directly involved in the design or construction of the project.
3.4 WARRANTY:
A. Manufacturer shall provide a one (1) year limited warranty on lighting control system. A ten (10) year limited warranty shall be provided on the lighting control relays.
3.5 RECORD DRAWINGS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
3.6 TRAINING
A. Provide four (4) hours of video taped training in two 2 hour sessions on the operation and use of the lighting control equipment, at job site, at no cost to the Owner.
3.7 MANUFACTURER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL TRAINING:
A. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner's building personnel in procedures for starting-up, testing and operating lighting control system equipment.
END OF SECTION 26 0923
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0923-5 © BNA Consulting OCCUPANCY SENSORS
BLANK PAGE
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 0923-6 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 2413
SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-26 Basic Materials and methods sections apply to work of this section except as otherwise indicated. See Section 262713 Service Entrance, for metering requirements. See Section 264313 for SPD requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of switchgear and switchboards is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of switchgear and switchboards in this section include the following: 1. AC Dead Front Switchboards (600V) 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical switchgear and switchboards. Provide switchgear and switchboards that have been UL listed and labeled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
A. MAINTENANCE STOCK FUSES: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements. PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of switchgear and switchboard): B. AC DEAD FRONT SWITCHBOARDS (600V): 1. Cutler-Hammer Products, Eaton Corp. 2. General Electric Co. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D Co. 2.2 EQUIPMENT SECTIONS AND COMPONENTS:
A. GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provide switchgear and switchboards of types, sizes, characteristics, and ratings indicated, that comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation. See drawings and Section 262815. Series rated systems are not accepted. B. Overcurrent Protection Devices, for main and branch devices. Provide switchgear, switchboards, and overcurrent devices of one manufacturer.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2413-1 © BNA Consulting SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARDS
C. Provide each service entrance switchboard with surge protective device (SPD) mounted in a separate enclosure adjacent to the switchboard/switchgear. See Section 264313 for SPD unit requirements. Provide in-line fusing for each phase of the device, and wire in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with conductor length not exceeding 18". 2.3 AC DEAD-FRONT SWITCHBOARDS (600V):
A. Provide factory assembled, dead front, metal enclosed, floor standing, self supporting, group mounted, secondary power switch boards, of sizes, electrical ratings and characteristics indicated consisting of panel (vertical) units, and containing circuit breaker and fusible switch assemblies of quantities, ratings and types indicated. Provide copper main bus and connections to switching devices of sufficient capacity to limit rated continuous current operating temperature rise to UL standard; with main bus and tap connections silver-surfaced or tin-plated and tightly bolted for maximum interrupting capacity. Provide accessibility of line and load terminations from front of switchboard. Prime and paint switchboard with manufacturer's standard finish and color. Equip units with built-in lifting eyes and yokes; provide individual panel (vertical) units, suitable for bolting together at project site, and constructed for the following environment: 1. Installation: Outdoors, NEMA Type 1. B. Limit height of upper most overcurrent device handle to 6'-2" to accommodate 4" curb. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARDS:
A. Install switchgear and switchboards where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions with recognized industry practices to ensure that switchgear and switchboards comply with requirements of NEMA and NEC standards, and applicable portions of NECA's "Standard of Installation". B. Install all switchgear and switchboards on 4" high concrete curb. Install concrete wiring trench under switchgear and switchboards; 18" deep, and 4" smaller in length and width than equipment base. Install grounding bushings on conduits penetrating trench. Secure equipment to pad/trench. Refer to section 26 0548 Electrical Seismic Control. C. Arrange conductors within switchgear and switchboards in neat fashion, and secure with suitable ties. D. Tighten fuses, if any, in each switchgear and switchboard. E. Provide and install spare fuse cabinet in main electrical room.
F. Electrical Identification: Refer to Section 260553 for requirements.
G. Provide a surge protective device on each switchboard located on the emergency distribution system. Refer to Section 26 4313 for requirements. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN:
A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. B. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Prior to energization of switchgear and switchboards, check with ground resistance tester phase to phase and phase to ground insulation resistance levels to ensue requirements are fulfilled.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2413-2 © BNA Consulting SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARDS
B. Prior to energization, check switchgear and switchboards for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short circuits. C. Subsequent to wire and cable connections, energize switchgear and switchboard and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. END OF SECTION 26 2413
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2413-3 © BNA Consulting SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARDS
BLANK PAGE
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2413-4 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 2726
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-26 section making reference to wiring devices specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems that are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy. B. Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following: 1. Receptacles 2. Switches 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices. Provide electrical wiring devices that have been UL listed and labeled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES:
A. GENERAL:
1. Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types, and electrical ratings for applications indicated and complying with NEMA Stds. Pub No. WD 1. B. Provide wiring devices (of proper voltage rating) as follows:
RECEPTACLE SWITCHES MFGR 1-POLE 3-WAY 4-WAY W-PILOT Hubbell HBL 5352 HBL 1221 HBL 1223 HBL 1224 HBL 1221-PL Bryant 5352 1221 1223 1224 1221-PL Pass Seymour 5352 20AC1 20AC3 20AC4 20AC1-RPL Leviton 5362 1221 1223 1224 Cooper 5352 1221 1273 1224 1221-PL
C. Provide devices in colors selected by Architect. Provide red devices on all emergency
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2726-1 © BNA Consulting WIRING DEVICES
circuits. D. TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) RECEPTACLES: 1. Provide TVSS receptacles having 4 series parallel 130V MOV's capable of a minimum of 140 joules suppression. Provide units with visual (and audible) surge status indicators to monitor condition of surge circuit; visual indicator to be "on" when power present and suppression circuit is fully functional. (Audible indicator shall sound a "beep" alarm approximately every 30 seconds if suppression circuit has been damaged.) Provide NEMA 5-20R, 20 amp, 125V receptacle of one of the following manufacturers:
MANUFACTURER
SPECIFICATION GRADE HUBBELL PASS SEYMOUR
Duplex Recept-Visual only 5350 5352 XXXSP
Duplex Recept-Visual/Audible 5352 5362 XXXSP
Single Recept-Visual only 5351 N/A
Duplex Recept-Isol Gnd, Visual/Audible IG5352S IG5362 XXXSP
Single Recept-Isol Gnd, Visual only IG5351S N/A
HOSPITAL GRADE HUBBELL PASS SEYMOUR
Duplex Recept-Visual/Audible 8300HS 8300 XXXSP
Single Recept-Visual only 8310HS N/A
Duplex Recept-Isol Gnd, Visual/Audible IG8300HS IG8300 XXXSP
Single Recept-Isol Gnd, Visual only IG8310HS N/A
2. Color of devices selected by Architect. Provide red devices on all emergency circuits.
E. GROUND-FAULT INTERRUPTER: 1. Provide general-duty, duplex receptacle, ground-fault circuit interrupters; feed- thru types, capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on single circuit; grounding type UL-rated Class A, Group A, 20-amperes rating; 120-volts, 60 Hz; with solid-state ground-fault sensing and signaling; with 5 milliamperes ground-fault trip level; color as selected by Architect. Provide Hospital grade where required elsewhere by specification or drawings. Provide units of one of the following: a. P&S/Sierra b. Hubbell c. Leviton d. Square D
F. WEATHER-RESISTANT RECEPTACLES 1. Provide weather-resistant receptacles in outdoor locations such as under roofed open porches, canopies, marquees, etc.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2726-2 © BNA Consulting WIRING DEVICES
2. Provide products of one of the following: a. Pass & Seymour 2095TRWRXXX. b. Hubbell GFTR20XX 2.2 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES:
A. WALL PLATES: 1. Provide coverplates for wiring devices; plate color to match attached wiring devices. Provide nylon or Lexan coverplates in all finished areas. Provide galvanized steel plates in unfinished areas. Provide blank coverplates for all empty outlet boxes. B. WEATHER-PROTECTING DEVICE ENCLOSURES: 1. Where required for compliance with NEC 406-8 (receptacles installed outdoors for use other than with portable tools or equipment), provide weather-tight device covers that provide complete protection with the cord and cap inserted into the wiring device. Provide units that mount on either single or double gang devices. 2. Provide products of one of the following for In Box Horizontal for brick and cast stone: a. Arlington Industries
i. DSHB1C Clear Cover ii. DSHB1W White Cover iii. DSHB1BR Brown Cover iv. DSHB1BRC Brown Clear Cover 3. Provide products of one of the following for In Box Vertical or Horizontal for Stucco and Metal Sidings: a. Arlington Industries
i. DSBVM1C Clear Cover ii. DSBVM1W White Cover iii. DSBHM1C Clear Cover iv. DSBHM1W White Cover 4. Provide products of one of the following for roof mounted installations: a. Intermatic WP1020 or WP1030 b. P&S WIUC10C or WIUC20c PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. B. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical box and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work. Install devices in
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2726-3 © BNA Consulting WIRING DEVICES
boxes such that front of device is flush and square with coverplate. Drawings are small scale and, unless dimensioned, indicate approximate locations only of outlets, devices, equipment, etc. Locate outlets and apparatus symmetrically on floors, walls and ceilings where not dimensioned and coordinate with other work. Verify all dimensioned items on job site. Consult architectural cabinet, millwork, and equipment shop drawings before beginning rough-in of electrical work. Adjust locations of all electrical outlets as required to accommodate work in area, and to avoid conflicts with wainscoat, back splash, tackboards, and other items. C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes that are clean; free from excess building materials, dirt, and debris. D. Install blank plates on all boxes without devices. E. Delay installation of wiring devices until wiring work and painting is completed. Provide separate neutral conductor from panel to each GFI receptacle. F. Install GFI receptacles for all receptacles installed in the following locations: 1. Restrooms, locker rooms, kitchens, within 6 feet of any sink, or when serving vending machines and electric drinking fountains. 2. Indoor wet locations, non-dwelling garages, elevator rooms and pits. 3. Outdoors, and on rooftops. 4. Dwelling unit garages, crawlspaces and unfinished basements, accessory buildings, boathouses, and receptacles for boat hoists. G. Where light switches or wall box dimmers are specified, provide a separate neutral for each phase of the branch circuits that switches or dimmers are connected. H. Electrical Identification: Refer to Section 260553 for requirements. 3.2 PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES:
A. At time of substantial completion, replace those items, that have been damaged, including those stained, burned and scored. 3.3 GROUNDING:
A. Provide electrically continuous, tight grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 TESTING:
A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for electrical continuity and proper polarity connections. After energizing circuitry, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 26 2726
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2726-4 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 2815
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-26 section making reference to overcurrent protective devices specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of overcurrent protective device work is indicated by drawings and schedules and specified herein. Overcurrent protective devices specified herein are for installation as individual components in separate enclosures; and for installation as integral components of switchboard and panelboards. See Section 262413, Switchgear and Switchboards, and Section 262416, Panelboards. B. Types of overcurrent protective devices in this section include the following for operation at 600 Volts and below: 1. Molded case thermal circuit breakers 2. Fuses C. Refer to other Division-26 sections for cable/wire and connector work required in conjunction with overcurrent protective devices. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NEC requirements and NEMA and ANSI standards as applicable to construction and installation of overcurrent devices. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (main and branch device manufacturer must be same as panelboard and/or switchboard manufacturer): B. MOLDED CASE THERMAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKERS: 1. Provide factory-assembled, molded case circuit breaker for power distribution panelboards and switchboards; and for individual mounting, as indicated. Provide breakers of amperage, voltage, and RMS interrupting rating shown, with permanent thermal trip and adjustable instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Series rated systems are not acceptable. Construct with overcenter, trip-free, toggle type operating mechanisms with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle indication. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position and in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. Provide with
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2815-1 © BNA Consulting OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated, of proper size to accommodate conductors specified. 2. Circuit breakers 15 amps through 599 amps shall be molded case thermal trip circuit breakers. 2.2 FUSES
A. GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provided fuses of type, sizes and ratings and electrical characteristics of a single manufacturer as follows. Provide fuses labeled UL Class L or UL Class R, current limiting and rated for up to 200,000 amperes. Provide Buss KAZ signal activating fuses where required elsewhere in specification. B. Where fuses are shown feeding individual or groups of equipment items, comply with manufacturer's recommendation for fusing; adjust fuse size and type as necessary to comply with manufacturer's recommendation. C. Provide and install spare fuse cabinet in main electrical room. D. MAIN SERVICE AND FEEDER CIRCUITS: For fuse ratings over 600 amperes provide UL Class L Fuses (KRP-C, or A4BQ or LCL or KLPC). For fuse ratings up to 600 amperes, provide UL Class RK1 (KTN-R, KTS-R or A2K-R, A6K-R or NCCR, SCLR or KLN-R, KLS-R). If fuse directly feeds motors, transformers or other inductive load provide UL RK5 time delay (FRN-R, FRS-R or TR-R, TRS-R or ECN-R, ECS-R or FLN-R, FLS- R). E. BRANCH CIRCUITS: For motor circuits, transformer circuits, or other inductive loads, provide UL Class RK5 (FRN-R, FRS-R or TR-R, TRS-R or ECN-R, ECN-S or FLN-R, FLS-A). For other circuits, provide UL Class RK1, (KTN-R, KTS-R OR A2K-R, A6K-R or NCLR, SCLR OR KLNR, KLSR). F. MANUFACTURER: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fuses of one of the following: 1. Bussman Mfg. Co. 2. Mersen (Ferraz Shawmut) 3. Reliance Fuse Div./Brush Fuse Inc. 4. Littlefuse, Inc. PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES:
A. Install overcurrent protective devices as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards for installation of overcurrent protective devices. B. Coordinate with work as necessary to interface installations of overcurrent protective devices with other work. C. Install fuses in overcurrent protective devices. For motor circuits, fuse sizes shown on drawings are for general guidance only. Size fuses in accordance with fuse manufacturer's recommendation for given motor nameplate ampere rating. Test operation. If nuisance tripping occurs, increase fuse size and disconnect device (if necessary) as required to provide nuisance free tripping. Adjust fuse size properly for ambient temperature, frequent starting and stopping of motor loads, and for loads with long start times. Include all costs in bid. D. After the switchgear is energized and just prior to Substantial Completion, the contractor
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2815-2 © BNA Consulting OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
shall ensure that the field-adjustable circuit breakers and solid-state circuit breakers and associated trip mechanisms have been set to the appropriate settings as recommended by the equipment Manufacturer (or as recommended by the electrical contractor's Protective Device Study if section 260573 has been included in the project). Time-current trip curves and trip setting information as was required in the Submittal portion of this specification shall be made available by the contractor at this time. E. Field test all ground fault protective devices for proper operation; test to be performed by representative of the manufacturer. Include verification of complete time current trip characteristics. F. Electrical Identification: Refer to Section 260553 for requirements. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prior to energization of overcurrent protective devices, test devices for continuity of circuitry and for short-circuits. Correct malfunctioning units, and then demonstrate compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 26 2815
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2815-3 © BNA Consulting OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
BLANK PAGE
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2815-4 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 2816
MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-26 section making reference to motor and circuit disconnect switches specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of motor and circuit disconnect switch work is indicated by drawings and schedule. Work includes complete installations and electrical connections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Provide motor and circuit disconnect switches that have been UL listed and labeled. Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standards Pub. No. KS 1, and NEC. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. MANUFACTURER: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of switch): 1. Cutler Hammer Products, Eaton Corp. 2. Square D Company 3. General Electric Company 4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 2.2 FABRICATED SWITCHES:
A. GENERAL: Provide disconnect and safety switches as indicated herein. Provide: 1. General duty switches on 240 Volt rated circuits. 2. Heavy duty switches on 480 volt rated circuits. 3. HP rated switches on all motor circuits. B. GENERAL DUTY SWITCHES: Provide general-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed switches, fusible or non-fusible as indicated of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 240 volts, 60 hertz; incorporating spring assisted, quick-make, quick-break mechanisms. Provide single phase or three phase and with solid neutral as required by application. Equip with operating handle that is capable of being padlocked in OFF position. Provide NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R as required by application, unless noted. Provide fusible switches with Class R rejection fuse clip kits.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2816-1 © BNA Consulting MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS
C. HEAVY-DUTY SWITCHES: Provide heavy-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed safety switches, fusible or non-fusible as indicated, of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 600 volts, 60 hertz; incorporating quick-make, quick-break type mechanisms. Provide single phase or 3 phase, and with solid neutral as required by application, Equip with operating handle that is capable of being padlocked in OFF position. Provide NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R as required by application unless noted. Provide fusible switches with Class R rejection fuse clip kits. D. FUSES: Provide fuses for switches, as required of classes, types and ratings needed to fulfill electrical requirements for service indicated. See Section 262815 Overcurrent Protective Devices for fuse types. Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements. E. Electrical Identification: Refer to Section 260553 for requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
A. Install motor and circuit disconnect switches where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate motor and circuit disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and cable work, as necessary for proper interface. C. Install disconnect switches used with motor driven appliances, and motors and controllers within sight of controller position. D. For disconnect switches serving motors controlled by variable frequency drives, provide late-make, early-break auxiliary contacts on each disconnect switch. (Provide Heavy- Duty switch). Wire auxiliary contact to VFD safety contact, such that disconnecting the motor will shut down the drive first, and closing the switch will start the drive only after power is applied to the motor. END OF SECTION 26 2816
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2816-2 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 2913
MOTOR STARTERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of Division- 26 sections making reference to motor starters specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of motor starter work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of motor starters in this section include the following: 1. AC Fraction Horsepower Manual Starters 2. AC Line Voltage Manual Starters 3. AC Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters 4. AC Combination Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with NEC and NEMA Standards as applicable to wiring methods, construction and installation of motor starters. Comply with applicable requirements of UL 508, "Electric Industrial Control Equipment", pertaining to electrical motor starters. Provide units that have been UL-listed and labeled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER:
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type and rating of motor starter): 1. Allen-Bradley Co. 2. Appleton Electric Co. 3. Crouse-Hinds Co. 4. Eaton Corp., Cutler Hammer Products 5. General Electric Co. 6. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 7. Square D Co. B. MAINTENANCE STOCK, FUSES: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2913-1 © BNA Consulting MOTOR STARTERS
2.2 MOTOR STARTERS:
A. GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor starters and ancillary components; of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated that comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published information and as required for complete installations. B. THERMAL OVERLOAD UNITS: Provide thermal overload units, sized to actual running full load current, not to motor plate current. Size heaters for mechanical equipment after air and water balancing have been completed. C. AC FRACTIONAL HP MANUAL STARTERS (EQUAL TO SQUARE D CLASS 2510): Provide manual, single-phase, 1 and 2 pole, 300 volt AC max, fractional HP motor starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; equip with one piece thermal overload relay with field adjustment capability of plus or minus 10 percent of nominal overload heater rating; for protection of AC motors of 1 HP and less. (For manually controlled motors in excess of 1 HP, see Line Voltage Manual Starters specified herein). Provide starter with quick-make, quick-break trip free toggle mechanisms, green pilot lights, and with lock-off toggle operated handle. Mount surface units in NEMA 1 enclosures, unless noted otherwise. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure in exterior or damp location unless noted otherwise. Provide flush mounted units with coverplate to match wiring device coverplates. D. AC LINE VOLTAGE MANUAL STARTERS (EQUAL TO SQUARE D CLASS 2510): Provide line voltage manual starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt AC max; equip with pushbutton operator, low voltage protection feature, and green pilot light. Provide starters with trip free mechanism such that contacts will open under load and remain open until thermal element has cooled, and unit is reset. Mount surface units in NEMA 1 enclosure, unless noted otherwise. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure in exterior or damp location, unless noted otherwise. Provide overlapping trim for flush mounted units. E. AC NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS (EQUAL TO SQUARE D CLASS 8536): Provide line voltage magnetic starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt max, with thermal overload protection in all phases and inherent under voltage release. Equip units with holding contact, 2 normally open, and 2 normally closed auxiliary contacts, unless noted otherwise. Provide fused control transformer in each starter and 120V control coil. Mount hand-off-auto switch, red pilot light, and reset button in face of enclosure. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure unless noted otherwise. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure in exterior or damp location, unless noted otherwise. Equip all spare starters complete with items as specified herein. F. AC COMBINATION NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS (EQUAL TO SQUARE D CLASS 8539): Provide line voltage combination starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volts max with non-reversing magnetic starters as specified herein; in common cubicle or enclosure with motor circuit protector. Provide motor circuit protector, instantaneous trip circuit breaker as indicated and adjust to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Mount hand-off-auto switch, red pilot light, and reset button in face of enclosure. Provide combination starters for individual mounting, or for group mounting in motor control center as indicated. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure in exterior or damp locations, unless noted otherwise. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated. G. AC COMBINATION NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS (EQUAL TO SQUARE D CLASS 8538): Provide line voltage combination starters, of types, ratings, and electrical characteristics; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt maximum with non-reversing magnetic starters as specified herein; in common cubicle or enclosure with fusible disconnect switch. Provide quick-make, quick-break, disconnect for NEMA sizes 1, 2, 3, and 4; and
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2913-2 © BNA Consulting MOTOR STARTERS
visible blade, automatic circuit interrupters with push-to-trip feature and separate fuse clips for larger NEMA sizes. Fuse all starters with dual-element (time-delay) fuses equal to Bussman FRN/FRS-R. Equip disconnect switch with Class R rejection fuse kits. Mount hand-off-auto switch, red pilot light, and reset button in face of enclosure. Provide combination starters for individual mounting, or for group mounting in motor control centers as indicated. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure in exterior or damp locations, unless noted otherwise. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS:
A. Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Install fuses in fusible disconnects, if any. Mount chart inside each starter indicating heater type, size, and ampere ratings available. C. Electrical Identification: Refer to Section 260553 for requirements. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN:
A. Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. B. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Subsequent to wire/cable hook-up, energize motor starters and demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 26 2913
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2913-3 © BNA Consulting MOTOR STARTERS
BLANK PAGE
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 2913-4 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 4119
DEMOLITION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions, Division 1 and Division-2 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-26 section making reference to demolition. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of major items of demolition work is indicated by drawings. Other demolition work shall be performed as required to maintain system operation. B. The intent of the drawings is to indicate major items affected and not to show every device, outlet, fixture, etc. affected by demolition work. C. The drawings do not necessarily reflect as-built conditions. The contractor shall visit the jobsite prior to bidding to determine the overall scope of demolition work. D. Refer to sections of other Divisions for applicable requirements affecting demolition work. E. Refer to Section 260500 for requirements with regard to power outages affecting the operation of existing electrical systems. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. NEC COMPLIANCE: 1. Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to methods used for demolition work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL:
A. Demolition work shall be laid out in advance to eliminate unnecessary cutting, drilling, channeling, etc. Where such cutting, drilling, or channeling becomes necessary, perform with care, use skilled mechanics of the trades involved. Repair damage to building and equipment. Cutting work of other Contractors shall be done only with the consent of that Contractor. Cutting of structural members shall not be permitted. 3.2 PATCHING AND REPAIR
A. The Contractor is responsible for all demolition, patching and repair of all finished interior surfaces pertaining to the installation of this particular phase of work. All surfaces shall be finished (painted, etc.) to match the adjacent materials, finishes and colors. B. Hard surfaces: Whenever demolition or excavation is required for the installation of the electrical system, it shall be the responsibility of this contractor to make repairs and/or replacements of hard finish surfaces such as concrete, asphalt, roofing, etc. C. The method of patching and repair shall follow good construction practices and all
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 4119-1 © BNA Consulting DEMOLITION
finished surfaces shall match materials and finish wherein the demolition occurred. 3.3 EXISTING EQUIPMENT
A. The following is a part of this project and all costs pertaining thereto shall be included in the base bid. B. The new electrical equipment and apparatus shall be coordinated and connected into the existing system as required. Auxiliary systems shall comply, unless otherwise specified. C. The existing electrical devices, conduit and/or equipment that for any reason obstructs construction shall be relocated. Provide conduit, wiring, junction boxes, etc. as required to extend existing circuits and systems to relocated devices or equipment. D. The new fixtures indicated for existing outlets shall be installed in accordance with the fixture specifications. E. When installing equipment in the existing building, it shall be concealed. F. All existing electrical equipment and systems in portions of the building not being remodeled shall be kept operational, in service and in working condition throughout the entire construction period. Restore any circuits and systems interrupted. Provide temporary panels, temporary wiring and conduit, etc. as required. G. Maintain circuit integrity and continuity of all existing circuits and systems that interfere with or are interrupted by remodel work unless those circuits are to be abandoned completely. Maintain all circuits and systems in operation during construction. Provide temporary panels, temporary wiring and conduit, etc. as required. H. Existing raceways may be used where possible in place, except as noted. All circuits, conduit and wire that are not used in the remodeled area shall be removed back to the panelboard, where it shall be labeled a spare with circuit number indicated. Re-used raceway shall meet all requirements for new installations. I. Obtain permission from the Architect and Owner's representative before penetrating any ceiling, floor, and wall surfaces. J. Any and all equipment having electrical connections that require disconnecting and reconnection at the same or another location throughout the course of construction shall be included as part of this contract. END OF SECTION 26 4119
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 4119-2 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 4313
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of SPD’s work is indicated by drawings, schedules and specified herein. Work includes complete installation, electrical connections, testing, and commissioning. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with NEC, NEMA and IEEE Standards as applicable to wiring methods, construction and installation of SPD’s. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/IEEE C62.11, C62.41.2 and C62.45; NFPA 70 285 (Type 2), 75, and 78; and ANSI/UL 1449 4th edition. Provide complete packaged units that have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratory. UL surge ratings (UL 1449) must be permanently affixed to the SPS’s device. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured by one of the following as indicated by "Location Category" herein. 1. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. 2. Current Technology Inc. 3. Cutler Hammer, Inc. 4. L.E.A. International 5. Emerson Network Power Surge Protection Inc. 6. United Power Corporation 7. GE 8. Eaton 9. Surgelogic (Square D) 10. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 2.2 GENERAL:
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide high energy surge protective devices, with high frequency line noise filtering, suitable for application in Category A, B, and C environments as indicated. Provide types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics
BNA 18312 2019-01-11
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD)
indicated that comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design, and construction in accordance with published information and as required for a complete installation. 2.3 VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION – GENERAL:
A. Electrical Requirements 1. Unit Operating Voltage – Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit configuration. 2. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) – The MCOV shall not be less than 115% of the nominal system operating voltage. 3. The suppression system shall incorporate thermally protected metal-oxide varistors (MOVs) as the core surge suppression component for the service entrance and all other distribution levels. The system shall not utilize silicon avalanche diodes, selenium cells, air gaps, or other components that may crowbar the system voltage leading to system upset or create any environmental hazards. 4. Protection Modes – The SPD must protect all modes of the electrical system being utilized. The required protection modes are indicated by bullets in the following table:
Protection Modes Configuration L-N L-G L-L N-G Wye ● ● ● ● Delta N/A ● ● N/A Single Split Phase ● ● ● ● High Leg Delta ● ● ● ●
5. Nominal Discharge Current (In) – All SPDs applied to the distribution system shall have a 20kA In rating regardless of their SPD Type (includes Types 1 and 2) or operating voltage. SPDs having an In less than 20kA shall be rejected. 6. ANSI/UL 1449 4th Edition Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) – The maximum ANSI/UL 1449 4th Edition VPR for the device shall not exceed the following: B. SPD Design 1. Maintenance Free Design – The SPD shall be maintenance free and shall not require any user intervention throughout its life. SPDs containing items such as replaceable modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable batteries shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring any maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring user intervention to test the unit via a diagnostic test kit or similar device shall not be accepted. 2. Balanced Suppression Platform – The surge current shall be equally distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. The surge suppression platform must provide equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. Designs incorporating replaceable SPD modules shall not be accepted. 3. Electrical Noise Filter – Each unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be up to 50 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz using the MIL-STD-220A insertion loss test method. Products unable able to meet this specification shall not be accepted.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 4313-2 © BNA Consulting SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD)
4. Internal Connections – No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall be used as surge current conductors. All internal components shall be soldered, hardwired with connections utilizing low impedance conductors. 5. Monitoring Diagnostics – Each SPD shall provide the following integral monitoring options: a. Protection Status Indicators - Each unit shall have a green / red solid- state indicator light that reports the status of the protection on each phase.
i. For wye configured units, the indicator lights must report the status of all protection elements and circuitry in the L-N and L-G modes. Wye configured units shall also contain an additional green / red solid-state indicator light that reports the status of the protection elements and circuitry in the N-G mode. SPDs that indicate only the status of the L-N and L-G modes shall not be accepted. ii. For delta configured units, the indicator lights must report the status of all protection elements and circuitry in the L-G and L-L modes. iii. The absence of a green light and the presence of a red light shall indicate that damage has occurred on the respective phase or mode. All protection status indicators must indicate the actual status of the protection on each phase or mode. If power is removed from any one phase, the indicator lights must continue to indicate the status of the protection on all other phases and protection modes. Diagnostics packages that simply indicate whether power is present on a particular phase shall not be accepted. b. Remote Status Monitor – The SPD must include Form C dry contacts (one NO and one NC) for remote annunciation of its status. Both the NO and NC contacts shall change state under any fault condition. c. Audible Alarm and Silence Button – The SPD shall contain an audible alarm that will be activated under any fault condition. There shall also be an audible alarm silence button used to silence the audible alarm after it has been activated. d. Surge Counter – The SPD shall be equipped with an LCD display that indicates to the user how many surges have occurred at the location. The surge counter shall trigger each time a surge event with a peak current magnitude of a minimum of 50 ± 20A occurs. A reset pushbutton shall also be standard, allowing the surge counter to be zeroed. The reset button shall contain a mechanism to prevent accidental resetting of the counter via a single, short-duration button press. In order to prevent accidental resetting, the surge counter reset button shall be depressed for a minimum of 2 seconds in order to clear the surge count total.
i. The ongoing surge count shall be stored in non-volatile memory. If power to the SPD is completely interrupted, the ongoing count indicated on the surge counter’s display prior to the interruption shall be stored in non-
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 4313-3 © BNA Consulting SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD)
volatile memory and displayed after power is restored. The surge counter’s memory shall not require a backup battery in order to achieve this functionality. 6. Overcurrent Protection a. The unit shall contain thermally protected MOVs. These thermally protected MOVs shall have a thermal protection element packaged together with the MOV in order to achieve overcurrent protection of the MOV. The thermal protection element shall disconnect the MOV(s) from the system in a fail-safe manner should a condition occur that would cause them to enter a thermal runaway condition. 7. Fully Integrated Component Design – All of the SPD’s components and diagnostics shall be contained within one discrete assembly. SPDs or individual SPD modules that must be ganged together in order to achieve higher surge current ratings or other functionality shall not be accepted. 8. Safety Requirements a. The SPD shall minimize potential arc flash hazards by containing no user serviceable / replaceable parts and shall be maintenance free. SPDs containing items such as replaceable modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable batteries shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring any maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring user intervention to test the unit via a diagnostic test kit or similar device shall not be accepted. b. SPDs designed to interface with the electrical assembly via conductors shall require no user contact with the inside of the unit. Such units shall have any required conductors be factory installed. c. Sidemount SPDs shall be factory sealed in order to prevent access to the inside of the unit. Sidemount SPDs shall have factory installed phase, neutral, ground and remote status contact conductors factory installed and shall have a pigtail of conductors protruding outside of the enclosure for field installation. 2.4 SYSTEM APPLICATION
A. The SPD applications covered under this section include distribution and branch panel locations, busway, motor control centers (MCC), switchgear, and switchboard assemblies. All SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C, B, and A environments. B. Provide a surge protective device on each switchboard and panelboard located on the emergency distribution system. Refer to table below for category type.
Minimum surge current capacity based on ANSI / IEEE C62.41 location category CATEGORY Application Per Phase Per Mode Service Entrance Locations C (Switchboards, Switchgear, MCC, Main 250 kA 125 kA Entrance)
C. Surge Current Capacity – The minimum surge current capacity the device is capable of withstanding shall be as shown in the following table: D. SPD Type – all SPDs installed on the line side of the service entrance disconnect shall be Type 1 SPDs. All SPDs installed on the load side of the service entrance disconnect
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 4313-4 © BNA Consulting SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD)
shall be Type 1 or Type 2 SPDs. 2.5 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD REQUIREMENTS
A. Switchgear, Switchboard, MCC and Busway Requirements 1. The SPD application covered under this section is for switchgear, switchboard, MCC, and busway locations. Service entrance located SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C environments. 2. The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the switchgear, switchboard, MCC, and busway 3. The SPD shall be factory installed inside the switchgear, switchboard, MCC, and/or bus plug at the assembly point by the original equipment manufacturer 4. Locate the SPD on the load side of the main disconnect device, as close as possible to the phase conductors and the ground/neutral bar. 5. The SPD shall be connected through a disconnect (30A circuit breaker). The disconnect shall be located in immediate proximity to the SPD. Connection shall be made via bus, conductors, or other connections originating in the SPD and shall be kept as short as possible. 6. The SPD shall be integral to switchgear, switchboard, MCC, and/or bus plug as a factory standardized design. 7. All monitoring and diagnostic features shall be visible from the front of the equipment. 2.6 ENCLOSURES
A. All enclosed equipment shall have NEMA 4 general purpose enclosures, unless otherwise noted. Provide enclosures suitable for locations as indicated on the drawings and as described below: 1. NEMA 4 – Constructed of steel intended for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree of protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects (dirt and windblown dust); to provide a degree of protection with respect to the harmful effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (rain, sleet, snow, splashing water, and hose directed water); and that will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure. (sidemount units only) 2. NEMA 4X – Constructed of stainless steel providing the same level of protection as the NEMA 4 enclosure with the addition of corrosion protection. (sidemount units only) PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install SPD’s as indicated in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and as necessary to meet requirements. Install with conductors of minimum length practicable, but in no case exceeding 30" in length; minimum conductor size - #8 AWG copper. B. Install conductors in straight runs with a minimum of turns or bends (minimum bend radius to be 90 degrees). Do not splice phase or ground conductors in SPD’s circuit. Torque all conductor terminations in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 4313-5 © BNA Consulting SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD)
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Upon completion of installation of equipment, energize and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units and proceed with retesting. END OF SECTION 26 4313
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 4313-6 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 26 5100
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Types of lighting fixtures in this section are indicated by schedule and include the following: 1. LED (Light Emitting Diode) 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with NEC, NEMA and ANSI 132,1 as applicable to installation and construction of lighting fixtures. Provide lighting fixtures that have been UL-listed and labeled. B. Components and fixtures shall be listed and approved for the intended use by a National Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) including: UL, ETL, and CSA or equivalent C. All led products shall comply with the latest version of Illuminating Engineer Society (IES) publications LM-79 and LM-80.
1.4 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of fixture): 1. LED: a. Cree b. Nichia c. Samsung d. Philips Lumiled e. Osram f. Xicato 2.2 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES:
A. GENERAL: 1. Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings indicated complete with, but not necessarily limited to, housings, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts,
BNA 18312 2019-01-11
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING
LED drivers, starters, and wiring. Label each fixture with manufacturer's name and catalog number. Provide all enclosed fixtures with positive latch mechanisms; spring tension clips not acceptable. Provide all exterior fixtures with damp or wet location label as required by application. B. SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS: 1. Provide all pendant and stem hung fixtures with flexible ball joint hangers at all points of support. Equip hooks used to hang fixtures with safety latches. Provide all detachable fixture parts, luminous ceiling accessories, louvers, diffusers, lenses, and reflectors with locking catches, screws, safety chain, or safety cable.
C. LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) LUMINAIRES:
1. LED luminaires that can be serviced in place shall have a disconnecting means internal to the luminaries to disconnect simultaneously from the source of supply all conductors of the driver, including the grounded conductor. Disconnects shall not be required under the following exceptions: a. Luminaries located in hazardous locations. b. Luminaries used for egress lighting. c. Cord-and-plug luminaries. d. In industrial establishments with restricted public access where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons service the installation. e. Where more than one luminaire is installed in a space and where disconnecting the supply conductors to the luminaire will not leave the space in total darkness. f. Provide LED luminaires which are tested in accordance with IES LM-79, diodes tested in accordance with IES LM-80, and provide a minimum R9 rating of ≥ 50 (unless specified differently), a CRI rating of ≥ than 80 and L70 (6K) = 50,000 hours (IES TM-21). Provide with 0-10V dimming drivers as standard. g. The fixture manufacturer(s) shall warrant the luminaires, in their entirety, to be free from defects in material or workmanship for at least 5 years from date of manufacture. Provide warranty in accordance with other sections of this specification and include a certificate of warranty from the fixture manufacturer with extended warranty information and proper forms and procedure description. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standards of Installation", NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate with other work as appropriate to properly interface installation of lighting fixtures with other work. Consult architectural reflected ceiling plan for exact location of all lighting fixtures. C. Provide all necessary supports, brackets, and miscellaneous equipment for mounting of fixtures. Support all ceiling mounted fixtures from the building structure; independent of
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 5100-2 © BNA Consulting INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING
the ceiling system, unless noted. Support each recessed fixture (fluorescent incandescent, and/or HID) from the building structure with #12 ga. steel wire attached to each corner (in addition to supports normally provided for attachment to the ceiling system). Provide backing supports above (or behind) sheetrock, plaster and similar ceiling and wall materials. Support surface mounted ceiling fixtures from channel. Support ceiling mounted outlet boxes independent of the raceway system, and capable of supporting 200 pounds. Feed each recessed fixture directly from an outlet box with flex conduit as required; do not loop from fixture to fixture. See plans for additional details. D. Coordinate lighting in mechanical room with duct and equipment locations to avoid obstruction of illumination. E. Provide gypsum board protection as required, (acceptable to fire official having jurisdiction) to ensure fire rating of each ceiling that the fixtures are installed in. F. COORDINATION MEETINGS: 1. Meet at least twice with the ceiling installer. Hold first meeting before submittal of shop drawings to coordinate each light fixture mounting condition with ceiling type. During second meeting, coordinate fixture layout in each area. 2. Meet at least once with the mechanical installer prior to fabrication and installation of duct work. Coordinate depth and location of all fixtures and duct work in all areas. G. ADJUST AND CLEAN: 1. Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. 2. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period. Repair all nicks and scratches to appearance of original finish. H. SPARE PARTS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. B. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. C. At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in interior lighting fixtures that are observed to be noticeably dimmed after the Contractor's use and testing, as judged by Architect/Engineer. D. GROUNDING: 1. Provide equipment grounding connections for each lighting fixture.
END OF SECTION 26 5100
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 5100-3 © BNA Consulting INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING
BLANK PAGE
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 26 5100-4 © BNA Consulting UTAH NATIONAL GUARD CAMP WILLIAMS BUILDING RENOVATIONS CAMP WILLIAMS, UTAH
SECTION 28 3111
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of fire alarm and detection systems work is indicated by drawings, schedules and as specified herein. B. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of fire alarm and detection system components and accessories. Provide components and systems that are UL- listed and labeled for fire alarm. Provide fire alarm and detection systems and accessories that are FM approved. Comply with State and local requirements as applicable. C. Comply with applicable provisions of current NFPA Standards 72, National Fire Alarm Code, local building codes, and meet requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. D. Carefully review all Division 23 drawings for all fire/smoke dampers. Fire/smoke dampers are NOT shown on electrical plans. Electrical contractor is responsible for coordinating 120V power to all dampers and providing fire alarm connections to each one. See mechanical drawings for all locations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. MANUFACTURER: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire alarm and detection systems to match the existing fire alarm system. B. The job foreman or lead technician shall be factory trained and certified on the system being installed. Individual shall have a minimum NICET II certification. 2.2 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS:
A. GENERAL: Provide devices to be connected to an existing fire alarm system. Include control units, power supplies, alarm initiating and indicating devices, conduit, wire, fittings and accessories required to provide a complete operating system. Enclose entire system in raceway. Provide basic wiring materials that comply with Division 26, Basic Materials and Methods Sections for raceways, conductors, boxes, fittings, supports, etc. Minimum wire size to be #14 AWG copper. B. SYSTEM TYPE: Analog addressable, non-coded. Either manual activation of a fire alarm station or activation of an automatic initiating device energizes all fire alarm signaling devices, sounding a non-coded alarm and providing device identification on an annunciator panel.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 28 3111-1 © BNA Consulting FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
C. SYSTEM OPERATION: Provide system such that any manual station or automatic initiating device annunciates all alarm indicating units (bells, horns, buzzers, chimes, visual alarm lamps, etc.) continuously until the manual station or initiating device is restored to normal and the fire alarm control unit reset. Annunciate alarm signals by device at the control panel and all remote annunciators. Provide all conductors, raceway, equipment and labor to accomplish the following: D. For fans that are not part of the smoke evacuation system, deactivate air supply and return fan units simultaneously by means of a supervised master fan shutdown relay with slave relays as required. Restart air units automatically after panel has been reset. Provide a bypass switch for master fan shut down relay for drill purposes, and indicate by a locked-in lamp that the circuit has been bypassed. E. Selectively activate and/or deactivate fan units as required. F. Release all magnetic door holders upon activation of an alarm from any device by use of a master relay in the control panel. G. Provide supervised circuits for the following: 1. Close dampers upon activation of an alarm from any device through the HVAC interface relays at the Fire Command Center. 2. Recall elevators, upon activation of an alarm, to the floor of building egress unless the alarm is on the egress floor, in that case recall elevator to the level designated by the Fire Marshall. Cooperate with the elevator supplier to ensure complete operable system. Provide shunt trip breaker(s) as required. 2.3 SCOPE OF THE WORK:
A. Provide compatible devices for the existing fire alarm system in Building 4101. B. Provide all fire alarm devices. C. Provide duct smoke detectors and fan relays at all fan units 2000 CFM and over. Shut down all supply and return fans upon a general alarm signal. D. Provide a fire alarm duct detector within 5-feet of any fire/smoke damper as required to comply with IMC 607.5.4.1. The duct detector shall be listed for the air velocity, temperature and humidity at the point where it is to be installed. A duct detector will not be required at a fire/smoke damper located on a corridor wall where the corridor has smoke detection devices installed. For dampers installed within an un-ducted opening in a wall, a spot-type detector listed for releasing service shall be installed within 5-feet horizontally of the damper. Provide a fire alarm relay at each fire/smoke damper. Provide a test switch at each location where the damper is located above an inaccessible ceiling or is located more than 10 feet above the finished floor. Coordinate the location of test switches with owner/architect. E. All initiating devices connected to the fire alarm control panel shall be analog addressable. F. All wiring shall be in conduit (3/4" minimum). All conduit and connectors, shall be made of steel. All conduit runs shall form a complete loop from the fire alarm control panel. G. Provide vandal resistant cages to protect horn/strobes, smoke and heat detectors as indicated and, in gyms whether shown or not. Securely fasten security cages as required. Provide backing and bracing as required to ensure that attachment extends beyond the ceiling materials. Cages shall have two pieces, one backplate and one cover to attach to backplate.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 28 3111-2 © BNA Consulting FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
2.4 MONITOR MODULE (FCI AMM-2):
A. Remote identification module devices shall be attached to any single normally open initiating device (heat detector, waterflow switch, duct detectors, sprinkler, tamper switches, kitchen hood, pull station, etc.). The modules shall supply addressing and status information to the Fire Alarm Control Panel through the dual loop module. 2.5 CONTROL POINT MODULE (FCI AOM):
A. The control point module shall be connected to the same loop as the initiating devices, and shall provide a relay output (Form "C" 2 Amp @ 24 VDC, resistive only). B. This relay output shall be used to perform auxiliary functions. C. When the AOM is activated, the red "ACTIVE" LED shall be on solid. Under normal conditions, the red "ON LINE" LED shall flash. 2.6 DUCT FIRE DETECTORS (FCI DH500AC/DC WITH SAMPLING TUBE):
A. Provide ionization type with UL 268A listings. Each detector shall be equipped with a remote light. Each detector shall have (2) form "c" alarm contacts rated at 10 amps (at 120VAC). 2.7 THERMAL DETECTORS (FCI ATD WITH/ADB-F BASE):
A. Thermal detectors shall operate on the Rate-of-Rise principal. The detectors shall have a fixed temperature rating of 135 degrees Fahrenheit. Exception: in Boiler rooms, provide temperature rating of 200 degrees Fahrenheit. 1. The heat detector shall consist of a base and a head. 2. The base shall be capable of accepting either a smoke detector or a 135 (or 200) degree heat detector. 3. The head shall automatically restore to its normal standby condition when the temperature returns to its normal range. 2.8 AUDIOVISUAL ALARM HORNS (FCI, HMF/STS SEMI-FLUSH MOUNTED OR EQUAL):
A. Provide audio-visual alarm horns with the following features: 1. Die cast or stamped steel construction, finished in red/white (color by Architect) enamel, suitable for indoor or outdoor application. 2. Capable of 90 db (UL rating) sound level at 10 feet. 3. Flush mounted 4. Integrally mounted flashing light unit, with Lexan lens with block letters “FIRE”, and minimum flash rate of ONE per second, and 110 candela minimum. 5. Electrically compatible with system requirements. 6. Horns shall sound the temporal pattern (code 3) until silenced. 7. Audiovisual alarm horns shall have the ability to silence horns while maintaining the strobe flash, until reset. 8. Mechanical horn mechanism only, electronic horns are not acceptable. 9. Maximum 24 horns per circuit, maximum 8 strobes per circuit. B. Strobes shall be synchronized when there are three or more within sight and less than 55 feet of viewer.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 28 3111-3 © BNA Consulting FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
2.9 STROBES (FCI Model STS, FLUSH MOUNT):
A. Provide strobe with flashing light unit, with Lexan lens with block letters “FIRE”, and minimum flash rate of ONE per second, and high intensity 110 candela minimum. Strobes shall be synchronized when there are three or more within sight and less than 55 feet of viewer. Furnish in Red/White (color by Architect). 2.10 CEILING MOUNT STROBES (WHEELOCK RSS24100C-FW, FLUSH MOUNT, WHITE):
A. Provide strobe UL listed for ceiling mounting, flush mounted in ceiling or concrete vaulted ceiling. Provide strobe with flashing light unit, with Lexan lens with block letters “FIRE”, and minimum flash rate of ONE per second, and 110 candela minimum. B. Strobes shall be synchronized when there are three or more within sight and less than 55 feet of viewer. C. Furnish in Red/White (color by Architect). 2.11 AUXILIARY RELAY (FCI, ARB-C):
A. Remote auxiliary relay boards shall be rated at 10 AMPS @ 120 VAC. A red LED shall light to indicate relay activation. All relays shall transfer on general alarm and latch on until reset. All relays shall be supervised. The control output provided can be used in conjunction with fire alarm applications (i.e. fan controls, dampers, doors, and any other general alarm control). 2.12 INITIATING MODULES:
A. Provide style "6" initiating modules capable of receiving and annunciating an alarm from any detector, even with a single fault condition on any initiating circuit. B. Power all smoke detectors from the "Style 6" initiating loop wiring. For systems that power smoke detectors separately from the "Style 6" loop, provide monitoring for both the power source and the independent initiating wiring, so that complete trouble and alarm indication is achieved by loop. Provide capability to operate all smoke detectors, even with a single fault condition on the smoke detector power wiring. Provide one spare initiating circuit. 2.13 SIGNALING MODULES:
A. Provide signaling as required. Provide power adequate to sound all signaling devices concurrently. Provide supervised indicating circuits for polarized 24V D.C. alarm signaling devices. Provide 2 spare signaling circuits. B. Each signal circuit shall have a separate disconnect switch for servicing the fire alarm system. Each and every indicating circuit shall have a distinct location description. Power supply shall be at fire alarm control panel. Remote power supplies and indicating circuits will not be acceptable. 2.14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING:
A. To help the owner in programming, system changes, and servicing, the fire alarm system shall have the following functions. 1. The FACP shall be capable of an auto-configuration, that via a password, all analog devices and panel modules are automatically programmed into the system. At this point the system will operate as a general alarm system without any other programming.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 28 3111-4 © BNA Consulting FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
2. If any two devices are addressed the same, the LED's on both devices will light steady and the panel will read "extra address and the address number”. 3. If any device is installed and not programmed into the system the LED will light steady and the panel will read the same as above. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Install fire alarm and detection systems as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s written instructions and complying with applicable portions of NEC and NECA’s “standard of installation”. B. Install wiring, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods section, “Raceways”, “Wires and Cables”, and “Electrical Boxes and Fittings”, and in accordance with other sections, as applicable. C. All wire used on the fire alarm system shall be U.L. Listed as fire alarm protective signaling circuit cable per NEC, Article 760. D. If twisted or shielded wire is required or recommended by the manufacturer it must be used. E. Review proper installation procedure for each type of device with equipment supplier before installation. F. Where smoke or heat detectors are specified, install device a minimum of three feet from adjacent air supply diffusers to ensure proper operation of device. G. Refer to NFPA for spacing and exact placement of fire alarm devices. H. Electrical Identification: Refer to Section 260553 for requirements. PART 4 - FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND GUARANTEE
4.1 GUARANTEE:
A. Furnish a three-year guarantee for all equipment, materials and installation, including all labor, transportation, and equipment. B. Emergency Response. The fire alarm equipment supplier shall provide an emergency response within four hours of any reported system failure to resolve the problem on a continuous basis. 4.2 PRE-TEST:
A. The contractor shall with a representative of the manufacturer conduct a test 3 days before the final test to verify operation of all devices. Any problems must be corrected before the final test. 4.3 FINAL TEST:
A. Before the installation shall be considered completed and acceptable, a test on the system shall be performed as follows: 1. The contractor's job foreman, a representative of the manufacturer, a representative of the owner, shall operate every building fire alarm device to ensure proper operation and correct annunciation at the control panel. Fan shutdown and door holder circuits shall operate.
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 28 3111-5 © BNA Consulting FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
2. Conduct a full 24 hour test of battery operation. System shall be put on the batteries for a full 24 hours and all notification appliances shall be operational for a period of 5 minutes. The supervisory circuitry of the initiating and indicating circuits shall also be verified. 4.4 SPARE PARTS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements. PART 5 - AS BUILT DRAWINGS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:
5.1 LABELING:
A. All devices shall be labeled with their appropriate address. The labels shall be 18 point pressure sensitive labels. B. All initiating devices shall be programmed to include the device address and a complete user text English location description, i.e. Device L4S76, Smoke Detector, 1st floor Rm.17 5.2 RECORD DRAWINGS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
5.3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: Refer to Section 26 0502 for requirements.
END OF SECTION 28 3111
BNA 18312 2019-01-11 28 3111-6 © BNA Consulting